ABB Drives Reference Manual

PC Elements

Advant Controller 80
 Reference Manual
PC Elements

Advant Controller 80

AC80

Code: 3BFE 64021737 R0225

EFFECTIVE: 15.03.2000
SUPERSEDES: 01.06.1999

ã2000 ABB Industry Oy. All rights reserved.

 Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents..................................................................................................... 1-i

Chapter 2 - Introduction ............................................................................................................. 2-1
Summary .................................................................................................................................. 2-1
The Programming Language .................................................................................................... 2-1
Call............................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Call Name ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Call Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
Graphic Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
Connection of PC Element Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................ 2-2
Error Handling........................................................................................................................... 2-2
Integer Overflow ..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Overflow of Real Numbers ..................................................................................................... 2-3
Element Library for AC80 ......................................................................................................... 2-3
Programming with the PC Language........................................................................................ 2-3
The Data Sheets....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type ................................................................. 3-1
Structure Elements ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Combinational Elements........................................................................................................... 3-1
Bitwise Operation on the Integer Data Type............................................................................. 3-1
Memory Elements..................................................................................................................... 3-1
Time Elements.......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Register .................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Switches ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Code Converters....................................................................................................................... 3-2
Multiplexers............................................................................................................................... 3-2
Arithmetic Elements.................................................................................................................. 3-2
Counters ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Comparators ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Function Generators ................................................................................................................. 3-3
Feedback and Filter Algorithms ................................................................................................ 3-3
Supervision Elements ............................................................................................................... 3-3
Communication Elements......................................................................................................... 3-3
Parameter Handling Elements.................................................................................................. 3-4
Status Supervision.................................................................................................................... 3-4
Event Handling Elements ......................................................................................................... 3-4
Datalogging Elements............................................................................................................... 3-4
Other Elements......................................................................................................................... 3-4
DataBase Elements .................................................................................................................. 3-4
Chapter 4 - Short Form Description - PC Elements, DB Elements and “GHOST” Elements4-1
Chapter 5 - PC Elements Groups by Product........................................................................... 5-1
Common (to all) ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
APC Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements ........................................................... 5-1
AC80 Elements with no Corresponding APC Elements ........................................................... 5-1
AC70 Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements.......................................................... 5-2
Corresponding APC and AC80 Elements................................................................................. 5-2
Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements......................................................................... 6-1
Execution Times ....................................................................................................................... 6-1
Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements.................................................................. 7-1

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements I

 Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

Chapter 8 - PC ELEMENTS from A to C .................................................................................... 8-1

Absolute Value ABS ..................................................... 8-1

Transmit/Receive ACS Datasets ACSRX ........................................ 8-2

Receive ACS Datasets ACSRXA ..................................................... 8-8

Adder ADD ............................................................................ 8-12

Adder ADD-MR ............................................................... 8-13

DataSet Receiver for AF100 AFREC ...................................... 8-14

DataSet Transmitter for AF100 AFTRA ..................................... 8-20

And Gate AND ............................................................... 8-27

And Gate AND-O ............................................................... 8-28

Average AVG ............................................................... 8-30

Read One Bit BGET ............................................................... 8-31

Block Header BLOCK ............................................................... 8-32

Set One Bit BSET ............................................................... 8-33

Comment C ............................................................... 8-34

Comparator COMP ............................................................... 8-35

Comparator Integer COMP-I ................................................... 8-36

Comparator Real COMP-R ................................................... 8-37

Three State Controller CON-PU1 ...................................... 8-40

Control Module CONTRM ................................................... 8-42

Code Converter CONV ................................................... 8-44

Code Converter CONV-BI ................................................... 8-45

Code Converter CONV-IB ................................................... 8-49

Counter COUNT ............................................................... 8-52

Chapter 9 - PC ELEMENTS from D to F .................................................................................... 9-1

Data Logger DATALOG ................................................................. 9-1

Management of FBA Communications DCBAID ........................... 9-5

ii AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Communications with FieldBusAdapter DCBRX ............................ 9-10

Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer Address DEMUX-MI ............. 9-15

Derivator DER ............................................................... 9-17

Divider DIV ............................................................... 9-20

Divider DIV-MR ............................................................... 9-21

Error Detection ERROR ................................................... 9-22

Event Logger Debug EVBUG ................................................... 9-24

EVENT Detection EVENT ................................................... 9-26

Change Event Priority EVPRTY ................................................... 9-28

Event Detection EVT ................................................... 9-30

Event Logger EVTLOG ............................................................... 9-32

Queue Register FIFO ................................................... 9-35

Filter FILT-1P ............................................................................ 9-38

Filter Integer FILTI ............................................................... 9-40

Function Header FUNCM ................................................... 9-41

Function Generator FUNG-1V ................................................... 9-42

Chapter 10 - PC ELEMENTS from I to P.................................................................................. 10-1

Two Integer to Integer Long Conversion IIL .......................... 10-1

Integer Long to two Integer Conversion ILI ............................ 10-2

Integrator INT ............................................................... 10-3

Inverter INV ............................................................... 10-6

Absolute Read from Dual Port Memory IOBUSRD ........................ 10-7

Absolute Write into Dual Port Memory IOBUSWR ......................... 10-9

Transmit/Receive I/O Datasets IORX ................................... 10-11

Limiter LIM-N ............................................................. 10-16

Master Header MASTER ................................................. 10-19

Maximum Selector MAX ................................................. 10-20

DataSet Receiver for AF100 MB90REC .................................... 10-22

iii AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

DataSet Transmitter for AF100 MB90TRA MB90TRA ................. 10-28

Minimum Selector MIN ................................................. 10-34

ModBus Read MODR ................................................. 10-36

ModBus Write MODW ................................................. 10-38

Mono Function MONO ................................................. 10-40

Element for Copying Data MOVE .................................... 10-42

Multiplier MUL ............................................................. 10-43

Integer Scaling Element MULDIV .................................... 10-44

Multiplexer for Text MUXA-I ................................................. 10-45

Multiplexer with Integer Address MUX-I ................................ 10-46

Multiplexer with Memory and Integer Address MUX-MI ........... 10-48

Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N Address MUX-MN ............ 10-50

Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address MUX-N .................................. 10-52

Or Gate OR ............................................................. 10-54

Or Gate OR-A ............................................................. 10-55

Oscillator OSC-B ............................................................. 10-57

Oscillator for Sine Wave OSC-SIN .................................... 10-58

Panel Control PC Element PANC .................................... 10-59

Save PARDAT Values to PROM PARSAVE ................................ 10-69

Program Header PCPGM ................................................. 10-71

PDP-Function PDP ................................................. 10-73

PI-Function PI ............................................................. 10-75

PII Regulator PII ............................................................. 10-79

PIP-Function PIP ............................................................. 10-82

Pointer to next PC element POINT .................................... 10-84

Printer Control PC element PRTCON .................................... 10-87

Chapter 11 - PC ELEMENTS from R to X ................................................................................ 11-1

Ramp Generator RAMP ........................................ 11-1

iv AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 S-RAMP Generator RAMP-S1 ................................................... 11-4

S-RAMP Generator RAMP-SSH ................................................... 11-7

Register REG ............................................................. 11-10

Group Data Register REG-G ................................................. 11-12

Memory Monitoring RWM ................................................. 11-15

Save a Value SAVE ............................................................. 11-16

Shift Register SHIFT ............................................................. 11-18

Slave Header SLAVEM ............................................................. 11-20

Square Root Element SQRT ................................................. 11-21

Memory Element SR ................................................. 11-22

Memory Element SR-AA ................................................. 11-23

Memory Element SR-AO ................................................. 11-25

Memory Element SR-D ................................................. 11-27

Memory Element SR-OA ................................................. 11-28

Memory Element SR-OO ................................................. 11-30

Subtractor SUB ............................................................. 11-32

Switch SW ............................................................. 11-33

Switch - Change Over SW-C ................................................. 11-34

Element for Calculation of System Load SYSL .................... 11-36

Time and Date Element SYSTIME .................................... 11-37

Threshold Element THRESH-L ................................................. 11-38

Time Delay Off TOFF ................................................. 11-39

Time Delay On TON ................................................. 11-40

Time Delay On Retentive TON-RET .................................... 11-41

Trigger Element TRIGG ................................................. 11-43

Watchdog for AC80 WDOG80 ................................................. 11-44

Exclusive Or Gate XOR ................................................. 11-45

v AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

Chapter 12 -DB Elements from A to P..................................................................................... 12-1

AI Module AI810,AI820 ............................................................... 12-1

RTD Module AI830 ............................................................... 12-3

TC Module AI835 ............................................................... 12-5

AI Calculated (Event option) AIC ...................................... 12-7

AO Module AO810,AO820 ............................................................. 12-10

Boolean Data DAT(B) ............................................................. 12-12

Integer Data DAT(I) ............................................................. 12-15

Packed Integer Data DAT(II) ................................................. 12-16

IntegerLong Data DAT(IL) ................................................. 12-17

Real Data DAT(R) ............................................................. 12-18

Fieldbus Adapter Parameters(=DCB initialisation) DCB01 ..... 12-19

DI Module DI810,DI811,DI820,DI821 ............................................................. 12-24

DI Calculated (Event option) DIC .................................... 12-26

DO Module DO810, DO820 ............................................................. 12-28

DriveBus Link DRB00 ............................................................. 12-30

Drive Data Set DRIDS ................................................. 12-32

Engineered Drive DRIENG ................................................. 12-33

Standard Drive DRISTD ............................................................. 12-36

DataSet Peripheral DSP ................................................. 12-39

Event Set (Send) (Event option) EVS(S) ................................. 12-43

MVI Data Block (ModBus option) MVB .................................. 12-46

MVI Channel (ModBus option) MVICHAN .................................... 12-50

MVI Node (ModBus option) MVINODE .................................... 12-54

Special I/O Link NCBIO ................................................. 12-56

Panel Bus Configuration PANBUS .................................... 12-57

Boolean Param PARDAT(B) ............................................................. 12-61

vi AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Integer Param PARDAT(I) ................................................. 12-64

Packed Int. Param PARDAT(II) ................................................. 12-65

IntegerLong Param PARDAT(IL) ................................................. 12-66

Packed Bool. Param PARDAT(NB) ................................................. 12-67

Packed Int. Param PARDAT(NI) ................................................. 12-68

Real Param PARDAT(R) ............................................................. 12-69

Processor Module PM825 ................................................. 12-70

vii AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 2 - Introduction

Summary AC80 (Advant Controller) is a microcomputer based control system

designed specially for electrical drive applications. The system
provides a programming language, methods and tools for process
control functions. The programming language for process control
functions is based on software implemented logic elements, viz. PC
Elements and DataBase (DB) Elements. Many of the PC Elements
are the same as those in the industrial controllers of the Advant OCS
family (e.g. Advant Controller 110 and Advant Controller 70) and APC
(Application Controller for drive applications). The remaining PC
elements are specific to the AC80.

The Programming A PC element is the smallest unit of the application program. Each
element performs a complete function, such as a logical AND gate, a
Language counter or a feedback control element.
COMP-I(C1)
Call Each element has an unique call name that
-1 I1 I1>I2 5
enables it to be accessed. Many of the elements -2 I2 I1=I2 6
have call parameters which allow size, function, I1<I2 7
data type, and other properties to be determined.
Figure 1.
Call Name The mnemonic call name provides information
Graphic Symbol
about the basic function of the element. Further
information about the function of the element or the
data types for which the element is intended is given by a suffix to the
name. E.g. COMP-I, comparator for integers, and COMP-R,
comparator for real numbers, see table 2-1.

Table 2-1Suffix
Suffix Description
A AND function in compound elements
B Boolean
D Data
I Integer
R Real number
O OR function in compound elements
T Time
G Group data
M Memory function
L Load function;
Limiting function,
Threshold function
N 1-of-N addressing
P Number of poles
PB Packed Boolean
V Variable

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 2-1

 Chapter 2 - Introduction

COUNT (C1)
Call Parameters For structure elements, the call parameters > 0
- 1 > L 10
determine the cycle time, and the place in the - 2 U / D-N = 0 11
cycle time table (this determines the order of - 3 > C < 0 12
execution for control modules having the - 4 R
same cycle time). - 5 EN

- 21 I O 22
For a function element, the call parameters
may specify the size, data type, number of
inputs and outputs, etc. Figure 2. Graphic
Symbol
Graphic Symbol Each PC element has a graphic symbol
similar to that shown in figure 2. Normally it is the call name of the
element written in the upper part of the symbol. For certain functions,
e.g. AND and OR, there is a graphic a symbol instead of the name.

When the element has supervisory control signals, the terminals for
these signals are collected in a separate part of the symbol as shown
in figure 2.

Connection of PC Only inputs and outputs with the same data type can be
interconnected. If, for example, an output of the type IL is to be
Element Inputs and connected to an input of the type R, a type conversion element, e.g.
Outputs CONV (with parameters C1= IL, C2 = R) must be inserted in the data
path.

Table 2-2Data types

Designation Data type
A Character Array
B Boolean
G Group data, i.e. a collection of data with one of the
above data types
I Integer, 16 bit
IL Integer, 32 bit
R Real number
T Time
TR Time, real representation

Error Handling
Integer Overflow The range of integer values allowed is as follows.

For I = -32768 ...32767

For IL = -2147483648 ... 2147483647

2-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 2 - Introduction

When the range is exceeded, the output is set to the respective

limiting value.

Overflow of Real The range of allowed real numbers is 9.2 x 1018 ... -0.1.x 1018.
Numbers When the range is exceeded, the output is set to the respective
limiting value. The smallest magnitude that can be represented by a
real number is 5.0 x 10-20. Any output with an absolute value smaller
than this is set to 0.

Element Library for The AC80 has an element library which defines the set of available
AC80 PC elements. Detailed documentation of the available PC elements
can be found in the PC Element and DB Element Descriptions parts
of this manual.

Programming with When programming an AC80 based control system, PC elements are
selected from the AC80 PC element library and included on a AC80
the PC Language software design template. The PC elements are then interconnected
on the diagram to define the data interchange between the elements.
The compiler of the FCB translates the program into object (target)
code, which is loaded into the AC80 memory.

An element description starts with a short Summary that describes

the main function of the element. The graphic symbol of the element
is shown to the right of the summary. The calling of the element is
described under the heading Call.
The Data Sheets
If the element has call parameters, they are described in a table
where their permissible values are stated. Element inputs and
outputs are described under the heading Connections. This section
provides a table giving each terminal a number, name, type,
description and permissible values. The type of connection is given
as xy, where x is I or O if it is an input or an output terminal, and y
denotes the data type previously described in Table 2-2. If the
terminal data type is specified with a call parameter, y is the call
parameter name (e.g. IC1 for an input for which data type is defined
with call parameter C1).

A detailed functional description is given under the heading Function.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 2-3

 Chapter 2 - Introduction

AC80 PC Element Descriptions

Subtractor SUB The call name of the element.

Summary
SUB is used for subtraction of two integers or Short description of the
1 - 20

real numbers. 2 function of the element.

Call SUB The graphic symbol
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1. of the element.
Parameter Description Permissible values
Call, with table over the
C1 Data type I, IL, R parameters, if any.
Connections Table 2. The terminals of the
No Name Type Application element are described
in a table.
1 - IC1 Input for minuend Detailed description of the
2 - IC1 Input for subtrahend elements function.
20 - OC1 Output for difference
Function
The value at input 2 subtracted from valve at input 1
and the result is stored at output 20.
Overflow
If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the
output is limited to the highest or lowest allowable for the
data type.

Figure 3. Description, Schematic Outline.

2-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Note: Only elements included in AC80PC element library are listed

here.

Structure Elements Block Header BLOCK

Control Module Header CONTRM
Change Event Priority EVPRTY
Function Module Header FUNCM
Master Module Header MASTER
Program Header PCPGM
Slave Module Header SLAVEM

Combinational And Gate AND

And Gate with Or-ed inputs AND-O
Elements Inverter INV
Or Gate OR
Or gate with And-ed inputs OR-A
Threshold Element THRESH-L
Exclusive Or Gate XOR

Bitwise Operation Read One Bit BGET

Set One Bit BSET
on the Integer Data
Type
Memory Elements Memory Element SR
Memoy Elements SR-AA
Memory Elements SR-AO
Memory Element with Data Input SR-D
Memory Element SR-OA
Memory Element SR-OO

Time Elements Mono Function MONO

Oscillator OSC-B
Sine Wave Oscillator OSC-SIN
Time Delay Off TOFF
Time Delay On TON
Time Delay On Retriggable TON-RET
Trigger Element TRIGG

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 3-1

 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Register Queue Register FIFO

Data Copying Element MOVE
Register REG
Group Data Register REG-G
Shift Register SHIFT

Switches Switch SW
Switch with Changeover SW-C

Code Converters Code Converter CONV

Code Converter from Boolean to CONV-BI
Integer
Code Converter from Integer to CONV-IB
Boolean
Two Integers to Integer Long IIL
Conversion
Integer long to two Integers Conversion ILI

Multiplexers Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer DEMUX-MI

Address
Multiplexer for ASCII-strings MUXA-I
Multiplexer with Integer Address MUX-I
Multiplexer with Memory and Integer MUX-MI
Address
Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N MUX-MN
Address
Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address MUX-N

Absolute Value Element ABS

Arithmetic Adder ADD
Elements Adder with a multiplication ADD-MR
Divider DIV
Divider with multiplied inputs DIV-MR
Limiter LIM-N
Multiplier MUL
Integer Scaling Element MULDIV
Square Root Element SQRT
Subtractor SUB

Counters Counter COUNT

3-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Comparators Comparator COMP

Comparator for Integer Values COMP-I
Comparator for Real Values COMP-R
Maximum Selector MAX
Minimum Selector MIN

Function Function Generator FUNG-1V

Generators
Average of n-samples AVG
Feedback and Three State Controller CON-PU1
Filter Algorithms Derivator DER
Single pole Filter FILT-1P
Single Pole Filter for Integer Signals FILTI
Integrator INT
PDP-controller PDP
PI-controller PI
PI controller with integer calculation PII
PIP-Function PIP
Ramp generator RAMP
S-ramp generator RAMP-S1
SSH-ramp generator RAMP-SSH

Supervision Element for Actual Time and Date SYSTIME

Elements System Load Measurement SYSL

Communication Transmit and receive datasets to/from ACSRX

ACS 600 MultiDrive or ACS 600
Elements SingleDrive.
Receive datasets from ACS 600 ACSRXA
Multidrive or ACS 600 SingleDrive.
Receive dataset from AF100 AFREC
Transmit dataset to AF100 AFTRA
To exit once in every application DCBAID
program, which contains DCBRX
elements (or other FBA communication
elements).
DCBRX may exist as several instances DCBRX
in same application program.
Generate cyclic communication with IO- IORX
board through NCB.
ModBus Read MODR
ModBus Write MODW
AF100 receive (packed integers) MB90REC
AF100 transmit (packed integers) MB90TRA
Panel Control PANC
Printer Control PRTCON

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 3-3

 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Status Supervision Memory monitoring RWM

Watchdog WDOG80

Parameter Save PARDAT values to PROM. PARSAVE

Save reference value in RWM (battery SAVE
Handling Elements backup).

Event Handling Error recording element ERROR

Event logger debug aid EVBUG
Elements Event recorder EVENT
Event recorder with acknowledgement EVT
Event logger definition EVTLOG

Datalogging Datalogging element DATALOG

Elements
Other Elements Comment C
I/O Bus Read IOBUSRD (toolbox option)
I/O Bus Write IOBUSWR (toolbox option)
Gives absolute address for debugging POINT (toolbox option)

DataBase Elements Analog Input AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835

Analog Output AO810, AO820
Boolean Data DAT(B)
Integer Data DAT(I)
IntegerInteger Data DAT(II)
IntegerLong Data DAT(IL)
Named Integers Data DAT(NI)
Real Data DAT(R)
DCB initialisation DCB01
DI module DI810, DI811, DI814, DI820,
DI821
DO module DO810, DO814, DO820
Drive Bus Link DRB00
Drive Data Set DRIDS
Engineered Drive DRIENG
Standard Drive DRISTD
DataSet Peripheral (=AF100 dataset) DSP
NCB I/O configuration NCBIO
Panel Bus configuration PANBUS
Boolean Param PARDAT(B)
Integer Param PARDAT(I)
Packed Int. Param PARDAT(II)
IntegerLong Param PARDAT(IL)

3-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

DataBase Elements Packed Bool. Param with names PARDAT(NB)

continued Packed Int. Param with names PARDAT(NI)
Real Param PARDAT(R)
Processor Module PM825

Event Option AI Calculated AIC

DI Calculated DIC
Event Srt (Send) EVS(S)

ModBus Option Multivendor interface data block MVB

Multivendor interface channel MVICHAN
(embedded)
Multivendor interface node MVINODE

Reads basic analog inputs AIAPC

APC PC Elements Reads extended Analog inputs AIEXT
Option (“GHOST” Writes to extended analog outputs AOEXT
Write to analog outputs on Speed AOMEAS
Elements) Measurement board
Read basic digital inputs DIAPC
Read extended digital inputs DIEXT
Write to basic digital outputs DOAPC
Write to extended digital outputs DOEXT
Diagnostic counters of the Drive Links DRDIAG
Error reading from a drive DRFLT
Send parameters to a drive DRPAR
Receives signals from a drive DRREC
Transmit signals to a drive DRTRA
Read parameters from a drive DRUPL
Read speed measurement SPEEDP

APC DB Elements Drive Communication Board DCB00

configuration
Option (“GHOST” Drive Link configuration DRL00
Elements) Event Logger configuration EVT00,EVT01
AF100 or MasterBus 90 configuration MB90
Panel Link configuration PAN00
Memory reservation for saved values SAVE00
Note: APC PC/DB Elements option to be removed or replaced by
real AC80 Elements after backtranslate of APC source code.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 3-5

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description - PC Elements,
DB Elements and “GHOST” Elements

Table 4 - 1Short form description of PC Elements

Element Description
ABS Calculates the absolute value of an integer or a real number.
The result is multiplied by a scale factor.
ACSRX Transmit and receive datasets to/from and ACS600 MultiDrive
or ACS600 SingleDrive.
ACSRXA ACSRXA element can be used to for reading dataset values
from an ACS 600 drives.
ADD Adds up to 19 integers or real numbers.
ADD-MR Adds and subtracts signal values and multiplies the result by
another value.
AFREC Receives a data set over the AF100 bus.
AFTRA Sends a data set over the AF100 bus.
AND Gives the Boolean product of up to 19 Boolean values
AND-O Performs a combination of the AND and OR functions on the
input signal groups.
AVG Calculates the average of a selected number of signal
samples.
BGET Reads the value of the selected bit from an integer or integer
long value..
BLOCK Module header for conditionally executed blocks.
BSET Sets the value of the selected bit in an integer or integer long
value.
C Write comments in application program.
COMP Comparates two values with equal datatype.
COMP-I Compares two integers.
COMP-R Compares two real numbers.
CON-PU1 Three state controller with outputs for increase/decrease for
control via an integrating actuator.
CONTRM Module header for control modules.
CONV Conversion of data between the types I, IL, R, T and TR.
CONV-BI Converts data in BC, BCD, 1-of-N code and Gray code given at
a number of boolean inputs into data in integer form (I or IL).
CONV-IB Converts data in integer form (I or IL) into data in BC, BCD, 1-
of-N code Gray code at a number of boolean outputs.
COUNT Pre-settable counter for counting pulses, up or down. With
checking of the value relative to 0.
DATALOG Logs the selected data.
DCBAID Makes possible to use FBA (FieldBusAdapter) modules
connected to NCB board.
DCBRX Creates one or two VCIs (=VirtualConnectorInterfaces) and
using it/them as data buffers acts as interface between FBA
(=FieldBusAdapter) module and AC80 application program.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 4-1

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements

Table 4 - 1 continued
Element Description
DEMUX-MI Signal demultiplexer with the memory.
DER Gives derivation effect. The elements has inputs and outputs
for limit values, setting of gain, filter function for restricting the
derivation effect and the possibility of following and external
reference
DIV Divides two real numbers or two integers. For integers the
quotient is obtained along with the remainder at a separate
output.
DIV-MR Performs compounded multiplication/division operations on the
input signal groups.
ERROR Writes detected error codes to the Event Logger.
EVBUG EVBUG element can be used to diagnose event loggers.
EVENT Detects a Boolean event and writes the associated information
to Alarm/Fault logger or Event logger.
EVPRTY EVPRTY element provides means for changing the priority of
an event driven CONTRM.
EVT Detects both edges of event signal, allows acknowledgement.
EVTLOG EVTLOG element is used to create and manage an event
logger.
FIFO Queue register with up to 9 queues each with a maximum of 64
places.
FILT-1P 1-pole low pass filter with options for limiting the output signal
and for following an external reference.
FILTI Single pole low pass filter for integers.
FUNCM Module header for function module.
FUNG-1V Generates a piece-wise linear function of one variable using
tables, with up to 255 elements.
IIL Packs two integers into an integer long value.
ILI Unpacks an integer long to two integer values.
INT Gives integration effect. The element has inputs and outputs for
limit values, setting of gain and following with an external
reference.
INV Inverts a Boolean value.
IOBUSRD IOBUSRD element makes possible to read contents OF Dual
Port Memory of NCB board. IOBUSRD is available only if you
have enabled “Toolbox option” of AC80.
IOBUSWR IOBUSWR element makes possible to write data into absolute
addresses of Dual Port Memory of NCB board. IOBUSWR is
available only if you have enabled “Toolbox option” of AC80.
In APC IOBUSRD and IOBUSWR access Dual Port Memory of
extended I/O boards.
In AC80 they access Dual Port Memory of NCB board.
IORX Used to transmit and/or receive datasets to/from an I/O device.
LIM-N Limits integers,real numbers or time values. Several limit values
may be selected.
MASTER Module header for master modules.
MAX Selects the largest of up to 19 integers or real numbers.
MB90REC Receives a Data Set over the MP90 bus.
MB90TRA Sends a Data Set over the MP90 bus.
MIN Selects the smallest of up to 19 integers or real numbers.

4-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements

Table 4 - 1 continued
Element Description
MODR MODR element can be used for reading data from a remote
device through ModBus.
MODW MODW element can be used for writing data to a remote device
through ModBus.
MONO Generates a pulse with a given duration when the input
changes from 0 to 1. The pulse duration is specified at an input.
Retriggability is controlled with an input.
MOVE Moves data from input terminals to output terminals.
MUL Multiplies of up to 19 integers or real numbers.
MULDIV Scaling element for the integer data.
MUXA-I Multiplexer for text arrays with integer address.
MUX-I Selector for up to 19 inputs. Integer address.
MUX-MI Selector for up to 19 inputs. Integer address and memory.
MUX-MN Selector for up to 19 inputs. 1-of-N address and memory.
MUX-N Selector for up to 19 inputs. 1 out of N address.
OR Gives the Boolean sum of up to 19 Boolean values.
OR-A Performs a combination of the AND and OR functions on the
input signal groups.
OSC-B Oscillator for a Boolean variable with variable frequency and
pulse time.
OSC-SIN Sine wave generator.
PANC PANC controls one CDP80 panel.
PARSAVE PARSAVE element provides means for controlling the storage
of current PARDAT values into PROM memory.
PCPGM Module header for a PC program.
PDP Gives proportional effect and limited derivation effect. The
element permits limiting of the output signal and following.
PI Standard PI regulator for serial compensation in feedback
systems. The element permits limiting of the output signal and
following.
PII PI controller for the signals represented as integers with the
integer long arithmetics.
PIP Used to give proportional effect and limited integration effect.
The element permits limiting of the output signal and following.
POINT Gives absolute address for debugging. The Point is available
only if you have enabled “Toolbox option” of AC80.
PRTCON Printer control.
RAMP Limits the rate of change of a signal. The element permits
limiting of the output signal and tracking.
RAMP-S1 Reference signal generator with the second derivative limitation.
RAMP-SSH Generates an S-shaped output signal when reaching the level
of the input signal.
REG Memory element with an optional number of positions.
REG-G Assembles simple variables into one single variable of the
group type.
RWM Monitors the memory.
SAVE Saves the signal/parameter value to the battery backed RWM
area.
SHIFT Shift register with optional length.
Table 4 - 1 continued

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 4-3

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements

Element Description
SLAVEM Module header for slave modules. Subordinate of MASTER.
SQRT Calculates the square root of a real number. The result is
multiplied by a scale factor.
SR Memory for Boolean variables. The element has one Set and
one Reset input.
SR-AA SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs: A for AND function.
SR-AO SR flip flop with compinatory S, R inputs. A for AND, O for OR
function.
SR-D Memory for Boolean variables with data input. The element has
one Set and one Reset input and data and clock inputs for
clocking in data.
SR-OA SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs. A for AND, O for OR
function.
SR-OO SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs. O for OR function.
SUB Subtracts one real number or one integer from another.
SW Switching element with up to 9 closing channels.
SW-C Switching elements with up to 9 change-over channels.
SYSL Calculates and indicates the system load.
SYSTIME Actual time and date
THRESH-L Determines when more than a given number of Boolean signals
are set.
TOFF Delay for turning a Boolean signal off.
TON Delay for turning a Boolean signal on.
TON-RET Delay for turning a Boolean signal on with accumulating time
measurement.
TRIGG Provides a pulse with duration of one program cycle when the
input signal changes from 0 to 1.
WDOG80 Watchdog
XOR Give a signal when just one of several input signals is true.
Table 4 - 2 Short form description of DB Elements
Element Description
AIC AI Calculated (= event option)
AI810, AI820, Analog Input
AI830, AI835
AO810, AO820 Analog Output
DAT(B) Boolean Data
DAT(I) Integer Data
DAT(II) IntegerInteger Data
DAT(IL) IntegerLong Data
DAT(NI) Named Integers Data
DAT(R) Real Data
DCB01 DCB01 element is necessary for initialization and usage of
an optional FBA module of AC80.
DI810, DI811, DI module
DI820, DI821

4-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements

Table 4 - 3 continued
DO810, DO820 DO module
DIC DI calculated element is an event channel element used for
detection of calculated digital events. (= optio)
DRB00 DRB00 is used to define the (physical) drive numbers, drive
types and application identifiers of the ACS 600 drives
connected to AC80.
DRIDS Drive Data Set
DRIENG Engineered Drive
DRISTD Standard Drive.
DSP DataSet Peripheral (=AF100 dataset)
EVS(S) Event Srt (Send) (= optio)
MVB Multivendor interface data block (= optional tool)
MVICHAN Multivendor interface channel (= optional tool)
MVINODE Multivendor interface node (= optional tool))
NCBIO NCB I/O configuration
PANBUS Panel Bus configuration
PARDAT(B) Boolean Param
PARDAT(I) Integer Param
PARDAT(II) Packed Integer Param
PARDAT(IL) IntegerLong Param
PARDAT(NB) Packed Bool. Param with names
PARDAT(NI) Packed Int. Param with names
PARDAT(R) Real Param
PM825 Processor Module (CPU) of the AC80 control system.
Table 4 - 3 Short form description of “GHOST” PC Elements.
Element Description
AIAPC Reads basic analog input channels from the APC board.
AIEXT Reads analog input channels from the Extension I/O boards.
AOEXT Writes to the analog output channels on the Extension I/O board.
AOMEAS Writes to the analog output channels on the Speed Measurement
board.
DIAPC Reads basic digital input channels from the APC board.
DIEXT Reads digital input channels from the Extension I/O board.
DOAPC Writes to the digital output channels on the APC board.
DOEXT Writes to the digital output channels on the Extension I/O board.
DRDIAG Displays and optionally clears the diagnostic counters of the
drive links.
DRFLT Detects drive faults and writes them to the Event Logger.
DRPAR Sends parameter values to a drive controller (drive).
DRREC Receives signal values from a drive controller.
DRTRA Sends values for drive signals to a drive controller.
DRUPL Reads (drive) parameter values from a drive controller.
SPEEDP Calculates the speed and position measured with the YPH107
board.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 4-5

 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements

Table 4 – 4 Short form description of “GHOST” DB Elements

Element Description
DCB00 Reserves memory for buffers of the DCB driver.
DRL00 Reserves memory for a drive link.
EVT00,EVT01 Reserves the memory for Event Loggers.
MB90 Reserves memory and activates the MB90/AF100 dataset
driver.
PAN00 Reserves the memory and initiates the panel link.
SAVE00 Reserves the storage area in RWM memory to be used by the
SAVE elements.

4-6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 5 - PC Elements Groups by Product

This chapter shows the correspondence between AC80, APC and

AC70.

Common (to all) ABS, ADD, ADD-MR, AND, AND-O,

BGET, BLOCK, BSET,
COMP-R, CONTRM, CONV, CONV-BI, CONV-IB, COUNT, DER,
DIV, DIV-MR,
FIFO, FILT-1P, FUNCM, FUNG-1V,
INT, INV,
LIM-N,
MASTER, MAX, MIN, MONO, MOVE, MUL, MULDIV, MUX-I,
MUX-MI, MUX-MN,
OR, OR-A,
PCPGM, PDP, PI,
RAMP, REG, REG-G,
SHIFT, SLAVEM, SQRT, SR, SR-AA, SR-AO, SR-D, SR-OA, SR-
OO, SUB, SW, SW-C, SYSL,
THRESH-L, TOFF, TON, TON-RET, TRIGG,
XOR.

APC Elements with ACSPR, ACSPW, AIAPC, AIEXT, AOEXT, AOMEAS,

DCBINIT, DCBRD, DCBREC, DCBTRA, DCBWR, DIAPC, DIEXT,
no Corresponding DOAPC, DOEXT, DRDIAG, DRFLT, DRPAR, DRPAR, DRREC,
AC80 Elements DRTRA, DRUPL,
EVLOG,
FBI,
PANCON, PANREC, PANTRA, PAR,
SPEEDP,
WDOG.

AC80 Elements ACSRXA,

COMP-I, CON-PU1,
with no DCBAID, DCBRX
Corresponding EVBUG, EVPRTY, EVTLOG,
APC Elements IORX,
MODR, MODW,
OSC-B,
PANC, PARSAVE, PIP, POINT, PRTCON,
SYSTIME,
WDOG80.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 5-1

 Chapter 5 - Product grouping for PC Elements

AC70 Elements COMP-B,

with no DRI-CNV,
OR-TRG,
Corresponding P-1,
AC80 Elements SEQ, STEP,
TIMER.

Corresponding APC Element AC80 Element

APC and AC80 DCB00→ DCB01

Elements EVLOG→ EVTLOG
PANCON→ PANC
PAR→ PARDAT, PARSAVE
PANREC→ MODR
PANTRA→ MODW

5-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Execution Times The following pages show the execution times for PC elements.

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 1 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
ABS 7 C1 = I
17 C1 = IL
23 C1 = R
ACSRX 61+18xC2 EN = 1
34 EN = 0
ACSRXA
ADD 3+0.7xC2 C1 = I
3+1xC2 C1 = IL
10.7xC2 C1 = R
ADD-MR 6.4+11.7xC1+11.7xC2
AFREC 41+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 ACT = 1
10 ACT = 0
AFTRA 51+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 ACT = 1
11 ACT = 0
AND 2.4+1.4xC1
AND-O 5.4+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3+2xC4+2xC5+2xC6
AVG 9 C1 = I
15 C1 = IL
33 C1 = R
6 C1 = I & SET = 1
10 C1 = IL & SET = 1
23 C1 = R & SET = 1
BGET 5 C1 = I,IL
BLOCK 3
BSET 5 EN = 1
4 EN = 0
C
COMP 9 C1 = I, IL, B, T
9 C1 = R. TR
9 C1 = A
COMP-I 9 C1 = I, IL
COMP-R 16.4+7x(C1+C2)
CON-PU1 189 C1 = 0
155 C1 = 1
CONTRM 330

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 6-1

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 2 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
CONV 7 I,IL → I,IL
17 I,IL → R
21 I,IL → T, TR
15 R → I,IL,TR
33 R→T
39 T → I,IL,R,TR
17
TR → I,IL
5
TR → R
33
TR → T
CONV-BI 11+2xC3 C1=I,IL,C2=1(BC→I,IL)
16.8+3.1xC3 C1=I,IL C2=2(BCD→I,IL)
7+2xC3 C1=I,IL C2=3(1of N→I,IL)
16.8+3.1xC3 C1=I,IL C2=4(Gray→I,IL)
11+2xC3 C1=I,IL C2=5(16/32BC→I,IL)
5 R=1 or L passive
CONV-IB 10.8+2.5xC3 C1=I,IL C2=1(I,IL→BC)
25.6+3.1xC3 C1=I,IL C2=2(I,IL→BCD)
10.8+2.5xC3 C1=I,IL C2=3(I,IL→1 of N)
12.8+2.5xC3 C1=I,IL C2=1(IL→Gray)
5 R=1 or L passive
COUNT 15 EN = 1 & R = 0
5 EN = 0 & R = 0
10 CLEAR = 1
DATALOG 17.7 EN = 1 & CLEAR = 0
7 EN = 0 & CLEAR = 0
6 CLEAR = 1
DCBAID
DCBRX
DEMUX-MI 13+1xC3 C1 = I, IL, B, T
14+1xC3 C1 = R, TR
14 R = 1 or L passive
DER 58 BAL = 0 & RDER = 0
23 BAL = 0 & RDER = 1
13 BAL = 1

6-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 3 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
DIV 7.4 C1 = 1
18 C1 = IL
24 C1 = R
DIV-MR 16.4xC1+16.4xC2
ERROR 11.5 No events
30.4 Events
EVBUG 169.5
EVENT 11 No events
81.7. Events
EVPRTY
EVT 19 ACK = 1
6 ACK = 0
EVTLOG 189.5
FIFO 24.5+2.5xC2 C1 = I
25.4+2.6xC2 C1 = IL, R
30+4.6xC2 C1 = B
30+3.5xC2 C1 = T
24.8+3.2xC2 C1 = TR
11 R=1
FILT-1P 72 BAL = 0
14 BAL = 1
FILTI 10.7
FUNCM 0
FUNG-1V 91 BAL = 0
80 BAL = 1
IIL 5
ILI 5
INT 41 BAL & RINT = 0
11 BAL & RINT = 1
INV 3
IOBUSRD 16+4.5xC1+4.5xC2 EN = 1
EN = 0
IOBUSWR 16+4.5xC1+4.5xC2 EN = 1
EN = 0
IORX 55+26xC2
LIM-N 9+1.4xC2 C1 = I
12+1xC2 C1 = IL
14+1xC2 C1 = R
12.4+1xC2 C1 = T
13+1xC2 C1 = TR
MASTER 330
MAX 5.7+1.7xC2 C1 = I
7+2.4xC2 C1 = IL
33+3.4xC2 C1 = R

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 6-3

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 4 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
MB90REC 41+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 ACT = 1
10 ACT = 0
MB90TRA 51+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 ACT = 1
9 ACT = 0
MIN 5.7+1.7xC2 C1 = I
7+2.4xC2 C1 = IL
33+3.4xC2 C1 = R
MODR
MODW
MONO 8
MOVE 1.8+2.6xC2 C1 = B, I, IL, R
2.8+3.1xC2 C1 = T, TR
MUL 1.4+2xC2 C1 = I
9xC2 C1 = IL
15xC2 C1 = R
MULDIV 7.4
MUXA-I 10.4 C2 = 20
MUX-I 6 C1 = I
6 C1 = IL, R, B, TR
7 C1 = T
MUX-MI 11 C1 = I, IL,B, R, T, TR
7 RESET = 1
MUX-MN 10.4+1.3xC2 C1 = I, IL, R, TR
12.4+1.3xC2 C1 = T
9 RESET = 1
MUX-N 6.8+1.1xC2 C1 = I, IL, R, B, TR
9.5+1.1xC2 C1 = T
OR 2.4+1.4xC1 (1.4+1.2xC1),()=“Inline”time
OR-A 2+2x(C1+C2+C3+C4+C5+C6)
OSC-B 9.5
OSC-SIN 53 EN = 1
4 EN = 0
PANC
PARSAVE 33
PCPGM 330
PDP 87 BAL = 0
13 BAL = 1
PI 90 REVACT = 1
95 REVACT = 0
63 RINT = 1

6-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 5 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
PII 37 RESET = 0
10 RESET = 1
PIP 85
POINT 21
PRTCON
RAMP 67 BAL = 0
15 BAL = 1
RAMP-S1 299 BAL = 0
43 BAL = 1
RAMP-SSH 201 BAL = 0
35 BAL = 1
REG 7+1.7xC2 C1 = I
6.4+2xC2 C1 = IL, R, B
6.4+3x C2 C1 = T
7+2.4xC2 C1 = TR
6 S=0
REG-G 7+1xC2 C1 = I
8+1xC2 L1 = IL
8.4+1xC2 C1 = R
7.4+1.4xC2 C1 = B
8.7+1xC2 C1 = T
9+1xC2 C1 = TR
8 S=0
RWM 10 SEL = -2 or -1
183 SEL = 0
29 SEL = XXY & Y = 0
20 SEL = XXY other conversions
SAVE 8 C1 = I, IL
8.4 C1 = R
8.7 C1 = B
5.7 EN = 0
SHIFT 7 C1 = I
8 L1 = IL, R
14 C1 = B
9 C1 = T, TR
7 R=1
SLAVEM 0
SQRT 54
SR 4
SR-AA 4+1xC1+1xC2
SR-AO 4+1xC1+1xC2
SR-D 6 S=0&R=0
4 S = 1 or R = 1
SR-OA 4+1xC1+1xC2
SR-OO 4+1xC1+1xC2
SUB 5 C1 = I, IL, R

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 6-5

 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 6 of 6

Name µs)
Execution time, Typical (µ Notes
SW 5.7+1.7xC2 C1 = I
6+2xC2 C1 = IL, R, B
5.7+3xC2 C1 = T
6+2.4xC2 C1 = TR
4 ACT = 0
SW-C 4.7+2xC2 C1 = I
4.3+2.3xC2 C1 = IL, R, B
4.3+3.3xC2 C1 = T
4.7+2.7xC2 C1 = TR
SYSL 13+18xC1
SYSTIME 87
THRESH-L 4.6+1.2xC2
TOFF 8 I=1
3 I=0
TON 4 I=1
3 I=0
TON-RET 8.4 I=1
6 I=0&R=0
3 I=0&R=1
TRIGG 4
WDOG80 11
XOR 4 (1.5), () = “inline” time

6-6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements

The following pages show the RAM space requirements for the PC
elements when all the inputs of each element are connected to the
output of another element.

Table 7 – 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 1 of 3

Element PC Statement Data Notes
ABS 12 2 C1=I
4 C1=IL
ACSRX
ACSRXA
ADD 2xC2+8 2 C1=I
4 C1=IL,R
ADD-MR 10+2C1+2C2 0
AFREC
AFTRA
AND 2xC1+8 2
AND-O 12+6C1+6C2+X0
6C3+6C4+6C5+6C6
AVG 16 12+2xC2
BGET 12 0
BLOCK 10 2
BSET 16 0
C
COMP
COMP-I
COMP-R 4x(C1+C2)+16 8+2x(C1+C2)
CON-PU1
CONTRM
CONV
CONV-BI 2xC3+22 6 C1=I
8 C1=IL
CONV-IB 2xC3+22 12+2xC3
COUNT 28 10 C1=I
12 C1=IL
DATALOG 36 22+2xC2 XC1=B,I
36 22+4xC2 XC1=IL,R
DCBAID
DCBRX
DEMUX-MI 20+2xC2 X2
DER 32 44
DIV 16 4 C1=I
8 C1=IL
DIV-MR 8+2C1+2C2 0

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 7-1

 Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements

Table 7 – 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 2 of 3

Element PC Statement Local Data Notes
ERROR 12 84
EVBUG
EVENT
EVPRTY
EVT
EVTLOG
FIFO 4xC2+22 16+2x(C2+C2xC3) C1=I,B
16+4x(C2+C2xC3) C1=IL,R,T,TR
FILT-1P 12 12
FILTI 28 40
FUNCM 0 0
FUNG-1V 24 36
IIL 10 0
ILI 10 0
INT
INV
IOBUSRD
IOBUSWR
IORX
LIM-N 6xC2+22 14 C1=I
20 C1=IL,R,T,TR
MASTER 32 4
MAX 2xC2+12 4
MB90REC 22+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3 14
MB90TRA 20+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3 14
MIN 2xC2+12 4 C1=I
6 C1=IL
MODR
MODW
MONO 16 12
MOVE 4xC2+6 2xC2 C1=B,I
4xC2 C1=IL,R,T,TR
MUL 2xC2+8 2 C1=I
4 C1=IL,R
MULDIV 14 0
MUX-I 2xC2+12 4 C1=B,I
6 C1=IL,R,T,TR
MUX-MI 2xC2+20 6 C1=B,I
C1=IL,R,T,TR
MUX-MN 4xC2+18 6 C1=B,I
8 C1=IL,R,T,TR
MUX-N 10+2xC2 0
MUXA-I 12+2xC1 0
OR 2xC1+8
OR-A 12+2C1+2C2+2C3
OSC-B
OSC-SIN 16 16

7-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements

Table 7 – 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 3 of 3

Element PC Statement Local Data Notes
PANC
PARSAVE
PCPGM 20 2
PDP 30 48
PI 36 36
PII 32 20
PIP
POINT
PRTCON
RAMP 32 52
RAMP-S1 42 54
RAMP-SSH 44 66
REG 4xC2+14 2+2xC2 C1=B,I
2+4xC2 C1=IL,R,T,TR
REG-G 26+2xC2+2xC3 6+2xC5 C1=B,I
6+4xC5 C1=IL,R,T,TR
RWM
SAVE 20 4
SHIFT 22 2+2xC2 C1=B,I
2+4xC2 C1=IL,R,T,TR
SLAVEM
SQRT 12 6
SR 9 2
SR-AA 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 0
+2C4+2C5+2C6
SR-AO 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 0
+2C4+2C5+2C6
SR-D 16 4
SR-OA 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 0
+2C4+2C5+2C6
SR-OO 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 0
+2C4+2C5+2C6
SUB 12 2 C1=I
4 C1=IL,R
SW 4xC2+8 2xC2 C1=B,I
4xC2 C1=IL,R,T,TR
SW-C 6xC2+8 2xC2 C1=B,I
4xC2 C1=IL,R,T,TR
SYSL 8+8xC1 8+6xC1
SYSTIME
THRESH-L
TOFF 14 12
TON 14 12
TON-RET 16 12
TRIGG 10 4
WDOG80
XOR 10 2

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 7-3

 Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements

7-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Chapter 8 - PC ELEMENTS from A to C

Absolute Value ABS

Summary ABS (ABSolute value) is used to obtain the absolute ABS

(C1)
value of an integer, long integer or a real number. 1 I O 5
The absolute value is multiplied by an optional value. 2 K

Call ABS (C1) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values

C1 Data type IL, R, I

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description

1 I IC1 Input. Input for number, whose absolute value is

to be obtained.
2 K IC1 Input for multiplication factor K.
5 O OC1 Output. Output for the product of K and the
absolute value of I.

Function The absolute value of input I is multiplied by the value at input K and
the result is stored at output O.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8- 1

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Transmit/Receive ACS Datasets ACSRX

Summary The ACSRX (ACS Receive Xmit)

F1
ACSRX C1
DRNR
element is used to transmit and/or 1 EN ERR 4
receive datasets to/from an ACS 600 2 RESET RDY 5
Drive (e.g. ACS 600 MultiDrive or 3 CNTRL LINK 6
ACS600 SingleDrive).
21 DS1
22 WR1
23 I11 O11 26
24 I21 O21 27
25 I31 O31 28

11+10*C2 DS*C2
12+10*C2 WR*C2
13+10*C2 I1*C2 O1*C2 16+10*C
14+10*C2 I2*C2 O2*C2 17+10*C
15+10*C2 I3*C2 O3*C2 18+10*C

Call ACSRX (C1,C2) ERRC 99

Call Parameters Table 1. Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values

C1 Block number 1 = “basic” block, 2...6 “other” block

C2 Number of datasets

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Value

FI DRNR II Target DRIve NumbeR. 1...12

1 EN IB ENable the block. 0 or 1
2 RESET IB RESET the error code ERRC. 0→1
3 CNTRL II Operation CoNTRoL see table 3
4 ERR OB ERRor in the FB or ACS link
operation.
5 RDY OB Data ReaDY. New valid data
received.
6 LINK OI Current status of the ACS LINK. see table 4
21 DS1 II DataSet number of the first 1...254
transmit dataset.
22 WR1 IB Enable the WRrite of the first 0 or 1
transmit dataset.
23 I11 II First Integer of the first transmit
dataset.

8-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Value

24 I21 II Second Integer of the first transmit

dataset.
25 I31 II Third Integer of the first transmit
dataset.
26 O11 OI First integer of the first received
dataset.
27 O21 OI Second integer of the first received
dataset.
28 O31 OI Third integer of the first received
dataset.
n1 DS*C2 II DataSet number of the last (C2)
transmit dataset.
n2 WR*C2 IB Enable the Write of the last (C2) 0 or 1
transmit dataset.
n3 I1*C2 II First Integer of the last (C2)
transmit dataset.
n4 I2*C2 II Second Integer of the last (C2)
transmit dataset.
n5 I3*C2 II Third Integer of the last (C2)
transmit dataset.
n6 OI*C2 OI First integer of the last (C2)
received dataset.
n7 O2*C2 OI Second integer of the last (C2)
received dataset.
n8 O3*C2 OI Third integer of the last (C2)
received dataset.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code see Table 5

Bits of the CNTRL Table 3.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 This block is a synchronizing block (this block must be a "basic"
block, too).

Bits of the LINK Table 4.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 ACS link is OK.
1 ACS link is broken.
2 ACS link initialization (by the ACS comm board) after startup is not
finished.
Note: The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of 16 bits.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8- 3

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Initialisation of the Before ACSRX PC element can be executed you must initialise (with
DB elements DRB00) the communication links to the drives that are
Drive Communication used in the application program.
Links
Use of a ACSRX The (logical) target drive number of a ACSRX element is defined with
the function parameter DRNR (the physical drive number of this
Element target drive is defined in the DB element DRB00).

Call parameter C1 defines the number of the ACSRX element:

• 1 = basic (of this DRNR)
• 2...6 = other (of this DRNR)

Every drive that is used in the application program has a "basic"

ACSRX element (and optional "other" ACSRX element) of its own.

Maximum total number of ACS blocks (ACSRX, ACSPR and

ACSPW) / drive is 6. The value of this call parameter is displayed
inside the graphical ACSRX element by FCB.

Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...4) of the transmit

datasets.

The inputs DS1 to DS*C2 define the dataset numbers (1 to 254) of

the transmit datasets.

The values of the transmit datasets are in the I11...I3*C2 inputs. One
dataset contains always three 16 bit integers. If other number types
are needed then these must be packed/unpacked in the AC80 by
using e.g. PC elements IIL, ILI and CONV.

If the WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 1 then the ACSRX

element transmits the values of this dataset to the target drive and
automatically receives the values of a dataset whose dataset number
= transmit dataset number + 1 (a ACSRX element only starts this
transmit/receive process during its execution and the actual
transmitting/receiving is done as a background operation while the
other blocks are executing).

The values of the received datasets are in the O11...O3*C2 outputs.

These values have been received from the target drive after the
previous execution of the ACSRX element (they are not read from the
drive during the current execution of this block).

The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the
ACSRX element is acknowledged by setting the RDY output to 1 for
one execution cycle of this block.

8-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

This output is set to 0 if new valid dataset values have not been
received since the last execution of this block (either the cycle time of
this block is too short or the ACS communication link is invalid).

Note: Application programs both in the AC80 and in the target drive
must interpret the meaning of the values in the transmit and receive
datasets in the same way. This is left on the responsibility of the
application programmer(s).

The Application Identifier (a 16 bit integer defined by the drive

application programmer) of the target drive application assists in
verifying the correct meaning of the dataset values (see the APPIDn
inputs in the DB elements and error number 50 in Table 5).

Execution The drive communication time is divided into a sequence of fixed-

length time slots.
Sequence of the
ACSRX Element The length of one time slot = the time that is needed to process all
datasets in all “basic” blocks.

Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "other"
blocks and for other drive communication.

Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "Other"
blocks and for other ACS communication (if the number of all "Other"
datasets is greater or equal than the number of all "Basic" datasets
then two or more two-slot sequences are needed to process all
"Other" datasets).

This time slot sequence is illustrated in Figure 2:

All All All →
“Basic” datasets “Basic” datasets “Basic” datasets
Part of (or all) Part of (or all) →
“Other”datasets “Other”datasets

Figure 2. Processing of the Datasets of the ACSRX the ACSRX

elements.

Synchronization of If bit 0 in the CNTRL inputs of all "basic" blocks is set to 0 then the
ACSRX communication is freewheeling (as described in the previous
the ACSRX
chapter).
Element of a ACS
Comm Board

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8- 5

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

During every time slot reserved for “other” datasets the system
periodically check (check interval = 1 millisecond) if bit 0 in the
CNTRL input of a “Basic” block is set to 1 (the EN input of this block
must be set to 1, too). If it is then the execution of this “other” time
slot is terminated and the execution of a new “basic” time slot is
started.

Note 1: At least one “other” dataset is processed in the beginning of

every “other” time slot before the above described sync block test.
This ensures that the processing of “other” datasets is never totally
blocked.

Note 2: If bit 0 in the CNTRL inputs of several “basic” blocks are set
to 1 (this is a programming error in the application program) then the
“basic” block with the smallest DRNR is used as the synchronizing
block.

Error Handling In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output
indicates the applicable error code (see Table 5).

Errors are originated either from the execution of the ACSRX element
itself (error codes 70nn to 82nn) or from the DB element DRB00 that
defines the target drive of the ACSRX element (error codes 89nn).

The ERR output is set to 0 with the first successful response. The
ERRC output retains the code of the last occurred error. A 0->1
transition in the RESET input clears the ERRC output if the error
situation is no more in effect.
Error code = 7000+error_number 34 (see below) or
Error Codes Error code = 7000+drive_number (1...12)* 100+error_number (see below) or
Error code = 8900+error_number (see below)
Table 5.
Error # Description
1 Invalid drive type definition (DRTYPEn) in DB element DRB00.
4 The NCB communication board is missing.
5 Invalid NCB communication board.
8 The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB communication
board.
16 Initialization error in NCB communication board.
31 Call parameter C1 is not in the range 1...6.
32 Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...4.
33 Drive link timeout.
34 Drive number (DRNR) is not in the range 1...12.
35 DB element DRB00 does not exist.
38 This block number (C1) is already in use with this drive (DRNR).

8-6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 5 continued
Error # Description
39 Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254.
40...49 Communication error in NCB communication board.
50 Application IDs in the DRB00 (APPIDn) and in the drive are different.

Related Description of DB elements DRB00.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8- 7

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Receive ACS Datasets ACSRXA

ACSRXA
Summary The ACSRXA (ACS Receive Xmit Auxiliary) F=1-F1 DRNR ERR 2
element can be used to for reading dataset RDY 3
values from an ACS 600 drive (e.g. ACS 600 LINK 4

SingleDrive or ACS 600 MultiDrive). The

011 10
advantage of using ACSRXA is, that the new
021 11
values are thus (typically) available for 031 12
application program before they appear into 012 20
output pins of actual ACSRX. Using of 022 21
ACSRXA does not change “reception 032 22
characteristics” of ACSRX: It will also copy 013 30
023 31
the read values to it is output pins, whether
033 32
ACSRXA exist or not. 014 40
024 41
034 42
ERRC 99
Call Parameters ACSRXA (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values

C1 Block number 1 = “basic” block, 2...6 “other” block

C2 Number of datasets 1...4

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Value

FI DRNR II Target DRIve NumbeR. 1...12

2 ERR OB ERRor in the FB or drive link
operation.
3 RDY OB Data ReaDY. New valid data
received.
4 LINK OI Current status of the drive LINK. see Table 3
10 O11 OI First integer of the first received
dataset.
11 O21 OI Second integer of the first received
dataset.
12 O31 OI Third integer of the first received
dataset.
n0 O1*C2 OI First integer of the last (C2) received
dataset.
n1 O2*C2 OI Second integer of the last (C2)
received dataset.
n2 O3*C2 OI Third integer of the last (C2)
received dataset.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code. see Table 4

8-8 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Bits of the LINK Table 3.

Terminal Bit # Description

0 Drive link is OK.
1 Drive link is broken.
2 Drive link initialization (by the NCB comm board) after startup is not
finished.
Note: The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of 16 bits.

Use of ACSRXA Before ACSRXA element can be executed you must insert respective
ACSRX element in some other place of your program.
Element
(Recommendation = in same task, but in later point of execution
chain). Respective block = Block, which has same call parameters C1
and C2 and same function parameter DRNR.

The (logical) target drive number of a ACSRX/ACSRXA elements is

defined with the function parameter DRNR (the physical drive number
of this target drive is defined in the DB element DRB00).

Call parameter C1 defines the number of the ACSRX element:

• 1 = basic (of this DRNR)
• 2...6 = other (of this DRNR)

Every drive that is used in the application program has a "basic"

ACSRX/ACSRXA element (and optional "other" ACSRX elements) of
its own. The value of this call parameter is displayed inside the
graphical ACSRXA element by FCB.

Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...4) of the transmit

datasets. Also this parameter must be the same as used in ACSRX
(for safety and simplicity)

There are no inputs to define the dataset numbers (1...254) of the

datasets to be received. The definition is common with ACSRX. In
other words: The received dataset numbers are those written in
ACSRX input pins, incremented by 1, because the given values are
there for sendind datasets. This convention is common to ACSRX
and ACSRXA.

The values of the received datasets are written into the O11...O3*C2
outputs. These values have been asked from the target drive after
the previous execution of the accompanying ACSRX element.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8- 9

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the
ACSRX/ACSRXA elements acknowledged by setting the RDY output
to 1 for one execution cycle of this block. This output is set to 0 if new
valid dataset values have not been received since the last execution
of this block (either the cycle time of this block is too short or the drive
communication link is inoperational).

Note: Application programs both in the AC80 and in the target drive
must interpret the meaning of the values in the receive datasets in
the same way. This is left on the responsibility of the application
programmer(s).

The Application Identifier (a 16 bit integer defined by the drive

application programmer) of the target drive application assists in
verifying the correct meaning of the dataset values (see the APPIDn
inputs in the DB element DRB00).

Execution The drive communication time is divided into a sequence of fixed-

length time slots.
Sequence of the
ACSRX/ACSRXA The length of one time slot = the time that is needed to process all
Elements datasets in all "Basic" elements.

Every second time slot is always reserved for all datasets in all
"Basic" elements.

Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "Other"
elements and for other drive communication.

This time slot sequence is illustrated in Figure 2:

All All All →
“Basic” datasets “Basic” datasets “Basic” datasets
Part of (or all) Part of (or all) →
“Other”datasets “Other”datasets

Figure 2. Processing of the Datasets of the ACSRX/ACSRXA

elements.

Error Handling In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output
indicates the applicable error code (see Table 5).

Errors are originated either from the execution of the ACSRX or

ACSRXA element itself (error codes 70nn...82nn) or from the DB
element DRB00 that defines the target drive of the ACSRX/ACSRXA
element (error codes 89nn).

The ERR and ERRC outputs are set to 0 with the first successful
response.

8 - 10 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Error code = 7000+error_number 34 (see below) or

Error Codes Error code = 7000+drive_number (1...12)* 100+error_number (see below) or
Error code = 8900+error_number (see below)
Table 5.
Error # Description
1 Invalid drive type definition (DRTYPEn) in DB element DRB00.
4 The NCB communication board is missing.
5 Invalid NCB communication board.
8 The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB communication
board.
16 Initialization error in NCB communication board.
31 Call parameter C1 is not in the range 1...6.
32 Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...4.
33 Drive link timeout.
34 Drive number (DRNR) is not in range 1...12.
35 DB element DRB00 does not exit.
38 This block number (C1) is already in use with this drive (DRNR).
39 Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254.
40...49 Communication error in NCB communication board.
50 Application IDs in the DRB00 (APPIDn) and in the drive are different.
53 Respective ACSRX element is missing.
54 Respective ACSRXA created twice.
55 Respective ACSRX has different number of datasets.

Related Description of DB elements DRB00.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 11

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Adder ADD

Summary ADD (ADDer) is used to calculate the sum of up to 1 + 20

19 integers or real numbers. 2 C1

C2
Call ADD (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R
C2 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IC1 Input for addend.
2 - IC1 Input for addend.
.
.
.
C2 - IC1 Input for addend.
20 - OC1 Output for sum.

The values at inputs 1...C2 are added and the sum is stored at output
Function 20.

Overflow If the maximum positive or negative value is exceeded, the output is

limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.

8 - 12 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Adder ADD-MR

Summary ADDer with Multiplier of Real numbers is 1 * 50

used for the addition of an optional number
11
of real numbers. The numbers are added .. +
in two groups, each of a maximum of 19 10 + C1
numbers, after which the second group is
subtracted from the first. The result is 31 -
.. -
multiplied with a real number. -
30 + C2

Call ADD-MR (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of positive inputs in the 1...19
addition element.
C2 Number of negative inputs in the 1...19
addition element.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IR Input for the multiplication factor.
11 - IR1 Input for augend with positive weight factor.
12 IR Input for addend with positive weight factor.
.
.
.
10+C1 - IR Input for addend with positive weight factor.
31 - IR Input for augend with negative weight factor.
32 - IR Input for addend with negative weight factor.
.
.
.
30+C2 - IR Input for addend with negative weight factor.
50 - OB Output for result.

Function The sum of the real numbers at the inputs 31 to 30 + C2 is subtracted

from the sum of the inputs 11 to 10 + C1. The result is multiplied with
the value at input 1. The result is stored at the output 50.

Overflow If the maximum positive or negative real number is exceeded, the

output is limited to the greatest or lowest representable value
respectively.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 13

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

DataSet Receiver for AF100 AFREC

AFREC
Summary Advant Fieldbus 100 RECeive element is F1 IDENT ERR 10
used to receive cyclic data packets F2 STATION
(=CDPs) from the Advant Field Bus 1 ACT RDY 11
AF100. Data types within the packet are I1 21
indicated by the call parameters and can I... 20+...
be I, IL, or R, and should equal the call I*C1 20+C1
parameters of the respective transmitting IL1 51
IL...
AFTRA PC element (or DSP DB-element if 50+...
IL*C2 50+C2
the transmitting station is not APC or
R1 71
AC80). AFREC element should be always R... 70+...
accompanied with respective DSP in DB RC3 70+C3
part of the application (in order to specify ERRC 99
assumed CDP transfer interval and to
enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to
summarize various CDPs in each station). Figure 1.
The AFREC PC element can be used to
trigger execution of event driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0))

Call AFREC (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of I values 0...8
C2 Number of IL values 0...8
C3 Number of R values 0...8
Where: 0 < C1 + C 2 + C 3 ≤ 8

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 IDENT II Dataset IDENTity number. 1...50
F2 STATION II Node number of the sender. 1...79
1 ACT IB Input. ACTivates CDP 1=active
reception.
10 ERR OB Communication ERRor.

8 - 14 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
11 RDY OB Output data has been
updated.
21 I1 OI Output. I value number 1.
.
.
.
20+C1 IC1 OI Output. I value number C1.
51 IL1 OIL Output. IL value number 1.
.
.
.
50+C2 ILC2 OIL Output. IL value number C2.
71 R1 OR Output. R value number 1
.
.
.
70+C3 RC3 OR Output. R value number C3.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code *see Table 3

Error Codes Table 3.

Error code # Description
Communication startup errors:
3002 Bus coupler self-test failed.
3003 Not enough memory available in system-RWM.
3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element.
3005 Station address in the hardware is not equal to the
STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part.
3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element
in the same AC80).
3102 STATION value is equal to the address defined in the
PM825 STNNO. (= impossible to receive from itself)
3103 Illegal IDENT.
3104 Illegal length of CDP
3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified.
3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part.
3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length.
3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction.
3201 Too many CDPs used in this station.
3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP
configuration.
Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up):
3402 Time-out when waiting for address frames from the BA.
3403 No response to address frame from the data source
station.
3501 CRC-error (data frame corrupted during transfer, or two
stations responded to same address frame).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 15

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code
(above) are translated to texts:
3000...3099 MB90 START FAILED
3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ.
3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL)
3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL
3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE

Upon initialization the AFREC PC element:

Function
• checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus
coupler
• checks the working condition of the bus coupler
• checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters
• checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application
• allocates a communication port for the CDP.

The reception of the CDP is introduced internally to AF100 specific

system software of the station, which then configures the local bus
coupler respectively. But the reception preparations are not told to (or
made in) the BusAdministrator. The specified CDP should be
configured into BA by some other station, which thereafter is
responsible also to send the data always after BA sends the proper
address frames. If the sender is an AC80 station, it should contain a
respective AFTRA PC element or if some other type of station,
contain a respective sending DSP element. This mechanism makes it
possible, that AFREC can indicate at ERRC pin, why the data was
not received: Either address frames from the BA or actual CDP data
from the sending station were missing.

AFREC captures from AF100 the CDP telegrams tagged with the
specified signal address. The signal address is computed using the
STATION and IDENT parameters.

To enable the receive function of a communication port, the

STATION and IDENT of the AFREC PC element must equal the
station and ident numbers found in the sending block. Additionally,
the length of the telegram must equal the length specified by the
transmitting block. Identical values for call parameters (which
effectively specify CDP length) should be therefore used in
transmitting and receiving ends. (mismatching length specification
may disable the bus coupler to receive the CDPs, although they
contained correct signal address).

The STATION parameter of the AFREC must be equal to the STNNO

value of PM825 (AF100 part of it) DB-element in the sending station.

8 - 16 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

The IDENT parameter must be equal to IDENT of the sending

AFTRA.

RDY is set (to 1) if a new CDP telegram was transferred after the
previous execution, and the output terminals were updated. Updating
of output data (and all other output pins as well) can be temporarily or
permanently disabled by clearing the input ACT = 0. Error code
ERRC, if set for any reason, can be cleared only by a raising edge
(=transition 0 -> 1) at ACT pin.

Boolean values must be unpacked from integers ( I ) or long integers

(IL). Packed booleans DAT(B) or DAT(NB) from DSPs of other
Advant Controller types must be unpacked from long integers. All
data items within a CDP are assumed to be 4 bytes long, even if they
are16 bit integers. This makes AFREC compatible with DSPs of other
Advant Controller types, where DAT(I) is also placed into CDPs so,
that it takes 4 bytes space. Therefore the restriction C1 + C2 + C3
must be <= 8. (because max. CDP length = 32 bytes). If the sending
DSP contains DAT(II) or DAT(NI), they should be received in AC80
by AFREC as IL data item and then unpacked with ILI element (or
use MB90REC element for reception instead of AFREC)

The order of the data in the CDP received by the AFREC PC element
is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to
keep track of this rule, when assembling DSPs in other Advant
Controller stations, if they should be receivable by AC80. If receiving
integers (I) sent by MB90TRA, the first, third, fifth etc. integer will be
lost. (However such communication (MB90TRA -> AFREC) should be
never necessary (or used) between two APC or AC80 stations).

Fault Handling The ERR output is set (to 1) when a new reception does not occur
within 4 receiving intervals (or within 4 execution intervals, if the
respective DSP is missing from the DB-part). A diagnostic error code
is loaded to output ERRC (see table 3). The ERR output will reset (to
0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last
error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is
reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the
station, or by a 0-pulse in the ACT-pin.)

A mismatch between the NODE value and hardware switch settings

disables all CDP communications from and to the station. However,
service communications to the station are still possible via AF100.

During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the

value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not
been received from the bus administrator and is not an error
condition.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 17

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up, because BA

does not send proper address frames for AFREC before respective
CDP is configured there by the sending station, and this may happen
after AFTRA became active. Look always ERR pin before you worry
about ERRC contents.

Event Triggering In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC,
AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC elements that specifies an
interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to
denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and
start an event driven application task in the station. AFREC or AFTRA
PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to
data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus
administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts.

AFREC will be typically used to specify the triggering CDP, although

AFTRA may be used as well.

In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM
that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must
have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined
as 2 (AF100 interrupts).

The event triggering AFREC PC element will normally reside inside

the event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between the
physical data reception and the actual updating of the output pins of
the AFREC PC element.

The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be

reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur:
• the respective CDP communication port will be disabled
• no AF100 interrupts will be generated
• the event task will no longer be executed
• if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM
then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the
AFREC is never executed and therefore never detects the
change of ACT signal. (If the AFREC element is outside the event
driven task, then setting the ACT input (from 0 to 1) will reenable
events to be triggered.)

It is not necessary that the interrupting CDP is the same in all AC80
stations.

Type Circuits AFIN and AF_IN type circuits are available to make it easier to insert
both AFREC and respective DSP into AC80 application.

8 - 18 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

AFIN will insert dedicated DAT(x) elements respective to each data

pin of AFREC, and MOVE elementsfor updating the contents of these
DATs.

AF_IN will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common

DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content.
DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_IN can be
inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 19

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

DataSet Transmitter for AF100 AFTRA

Summary Advant Fieldbus 100 TRAnsmit element is AFTRA

F1 IDENT ERR 10
used to send cyclic data packets (=CDPs) F2 SCAN
to the Advant Field Bus AF100. The data 1 ACT
values are updated in the bus coupler
21 I1 ERRC 99
memory each time the PC element is 20+... I...
executed. The actual cyclic transmission of 20+C1 I*C1
the data is however independent of the PC 51 IL1
element execution. The sending interval is 50+... IL...
configured by this block. Data types within 50+C2 IL*C2
71 R1
the packet are indicated by the call 70+... R...
parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and 70+C3 RC3
should equal the call parameters of the
respective receiving AFREC PC elements Figure 1.
(or DSP DB-elements if the receiving
station is not APC or AC80). AFTRA element should be always
accompanied with respective DSP in DB part of the application (in
order to enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to summarize various
CDPs in each station). The AFTRA PC element can be used to
trigger execution of event driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0))

Call AFTRA (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of I values 0...16
C2 Number of IL values 0...8
C3 Number of R values 0...8
Where: 0 < C1 + C 2 + C 3 ≤ 8

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 IDENT II CDP IDENTity number. 1...50
F2 SCAN II Transmission interval. 1...4096 ms
see Table 3
1 ACT IB Input. ACTivates CDP 1 = active
reception.
10 ERR OB Communication ERRor.

8 - 20 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
21 I1 II Input. I value number 1.
.
.
.
20+C1 IC1 II Input. I value number C1.
51 IL1 IIL Input. IL value number 1.
.
.
.
50+C2 ILC2 IIL Input. IL value number C2.
71 R1 IR Input. R value number 1
.
.
.
70+C3 RC3 IR Input. R value number C3.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code *see Table 4

SCAN Values Table 3.

Value of SCAN Actual transmission interval used
1 1
2 2
3...5 4
6...11 8
12...23 16
24...47 32
48...95 64
96...191 128
192...383 256
384...767 512
768...1535 1024
1536...3071 2048
3072...4096 4096
Although all SCAN values <= 4096 are allowed, the value should
match with respective DSP and there is aloowed only 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.

Error Codes Table 4.

Error Code # Description
3002 Bus coupler self-test failed.
3003 Not enough memory available in system-RWM.
3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element.
3005 Station address in the hardware is not equal to the
STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part.
3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element
in the same APC).
3103 Illegal IDENT-value.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 21

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 4 continued
Error Code # Description
3104 Illegal length or SCAN-value of CDP.
3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified.
3201 Too many CDPs used in this station.
3301 Time slots cannot be allocated for the CDP.
3302 CDP identifier reserved by another station.
3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP
configuration.
Run time error (may occur even after successful start-up):
3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA.

When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error
code(above) are translated to texts:
3000...3099 MB90 START.FAILED
3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ.
3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL)
3300...3399 MB90 FULL (GLOBAL)
3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL
3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE

Function Upon initialization the AFTRA PC element:

• checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus
coupler
• checks the working condition of the bus coupler
• checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters
• checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application
• allocates a communication port for the CDP.

The CDP is introduced to the Bus Administrator. After approval, the

transmission of the CDP is started after a while (= not immediately),
and repeated at intervals determined by the parameter SCAN.
Time-out of approval message and/or disappearance of cyclic time
slots for the CDP (=disappearance of respective address frames from
the BA) will be detected and signaled at AFTRA error pins.

8 - 22 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

The CDP configured by a AFTRA PC element can be received by

AFREC PC element in other AC80s or APCs or by a DSP database
element in other Advant Controller stations. Each AFTRA IDENT
value should be unique for a station.

To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a

receiver element AFREC with identical call parameter and IDENT
values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the
station number of the transmitting AC80.

The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the

STNNO parameter of the DB element PM825. The matching address
value must be also set physically in the AC80 hardware using the
provided rotary switches in front panel. Allowed address range is
1...79, and the station number must match with STNNO parameter
defined in PM825. Otherwise it is impossible to even download the
application into the AC80.

(Note: Hardware address is set up as decimal number. Tens in upper

switch and ones in lower switch)

SCAN determines the transmission interval for the CDP on AF100

(i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for
possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than
the execution interval of AFTRA, provided there is capacity on
AF100. (Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded and there
is free capacity available in AC80, AFTRA execution interval may be
much shorter than than the CDP transfer interval.)

Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by

reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the AFTRA PC element will
present a CDP to the bus administrator and a communication port is
locally reserved in the bus coupler memory for the CDP. However,
the transmit function associated with the signal address will be
disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will
show an error.

Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers

(IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller stations (= for
DAT(B)s in DSPs) must be packed to long integers with CONV-BI
before connecting to AFTRA input.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 23

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

All data items sent by AFTRA always occupied 4 bytes. The order of
the data in the CDP sent by the AFTRA PC element is always: I
values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of
this rule, when transmitting to other Advant Controller stations. It is
recommended not to use many integer (I) values, because thus the
first, third, fifth, etc. word of the transmitted telegrams will not be
utilized.

To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a

receiver element AFREC with identical call parameter and IDENT
values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the
station number of the transmitting APC.

The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the

NODE parameter of the DB element MB90. The matching address
value must be also set on the AF100 bus coupler board (YPK112A)
using the provided hardware switches. If the NODE value is 127 or
255, all hardware settings (within supported address range 1 to 79 =
00H to 4FH) are correct, and the station number for AFTRA is copied
from the hardware switches.
(Note: Hardware address switches are read as hexadecimal values,
e.g., station 33 must be 21H in the set-up switches.)

SCAN determines the transmission interval for the dataset on AF100

(i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for
possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than
the execution interval of AFTRA provided there is capacity on AF100.
(Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded, there is free
capacity available in APC, and the transmission delays should be
minimal.)

Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by

reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the AFTRA PC element will
present a dataset to the bus administrator and a communication port
is locally reserved in the dual port memory of YPK112A. However,
the transmit function associated with the signal address will be
disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will
show an error.

Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers

(IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller 100 stations
must be packed to long integers. All data items sent by AFTRA
always occupied 4 bytes.

8 - 24 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

The order of the data in the dataset sent by the AFTRA PC element
is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to
keep track of this order when transmitting to Advant Controller 100
stations. It is recommended not to use integer (I) values, because
then the first, third, fifth, etc. word of the transmitted telegrams will
not be utilized.

Fault Handling The ERR output is set (to 1) when a transmission does not occur
within 4 sending intervals as defined by SCAN pin of the PC element.
A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 4). The
ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the
communication status, but the last error code will always remain at
the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be
cleared during the next restart of the station or by a zero-pulse in the
ACT-pin).

A mismatch between the STNNO value of PM825 and hardware

switch settings disables all CDP communication from and to the
station. However, service communications to the station are still
possible via AF100.

During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the

value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not
been received from the bus administrator and is not an error
condition. Error code 3402 is also normal after start-up, because BA
does not start sending proper address frames for AFTRA immediately
after it sent acknowledgement message about the CDP configuration.
Look always ERR pin before you worry about ERRC contents.

Event Triggering In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC,
AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC element that specifies an
interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to
denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and
start an event driven application task in the station. AFREC or AFTRA
PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to
data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus
administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts.

AFTRA may be used to specify the event triggering CDP, although

AFREC or MB90REC will be typically used.

In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM
that is executed due to interrupts from AF100.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 25

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

This CONTRM must have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven

task) and C1 defined as 2 (AF100 event task).

The event triggering AFTRA PC element will normally reside inside

the AF100 event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between
the physical data transmitted and the actual updating of data for next
transmission. (=maximizes the time, how long updated data waits for
transfer along the bus, and makes that time constant = c. scan time
of the CDP)

Note that the first event caused by the AFTRA is generated after the
configuration message is received from the Bus Administrator. This
first event does not signify that actual data has been sent from this
AFTRA by the AF100 bus coupler.

The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be

reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur:
• the respective CDP communication port will be disabled
• no AF100 interrupts will be generated
• the event task will no longer be executed
• if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM
then setting ACT (from 0 to 1) will have no effect, because the
AFTRA is never executed and therefore never detects the change
of ACT signal. (If the AFTRA element is outside the event driven
task, then setting the ACT input (from 0 to 1) will reenable events
to be triggered.)

It is not necessary that the interrupting CDP is the same in all AC80
stations.

8 - 26 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

And Gate AND

Summary AND elements are used to form general combinatory 1 & 20

expressions with Boolean variables. The elements 2

can have a maximum of 19 inputs.

C1

Call AND (C1)

Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input
2 - IB Input
.
.
.
C1 - IB Input
20 - OB Output

Function The output signal is set to 1 if all inputs 1..C1 are set to 1. See the
truth table below.

Truth Table of AND(2) Table 3.

1 2 3 20
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 27

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

And Gate AND-O

Summary AND with OR gates on the inputs is used to 1 & 60

form general combinatory expressions with -
C1
boolean variables.
11
- >1
10+C2

51
- >1
50+C6
Call AND-O (C1,C2,C3,Cn)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the AND part of the 0...9
element.
C2 Number of inputs in the first OR gate of 0...9
the element.
C3 Number of inputs in the second OR 0...9
gate of the element
.
.
.
Cn Number of inputs in the last OR gate of 0...9
the element.

Where: 1
n
6
1
C1  C 2 ..  Cn
40

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 IB Input direct to the AND gate in the
element.
2 IB Input direct to the AND gate in the
element.
.
.
.
C1 IB Input direct to the AND gate in the
element.
11 IB Input to the first OR gate in the
element.
12 IB Input to the first OR gate in the
element.

8 - 28 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
.
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the first OR gate in the
element.
21 IB Input to the second OR gate in the
element.
22 IB Input to the second OR gate in the
element.
.
.
.
10*(n-1)+1 IB Input to the last OR gate in the
element.
10*(n-1)+2 IB Input to the last OR gate in the
element.
.
.
.
10*(n-1)+Cn IB Input to the last OR gate in the
element.
60 OB Output.

Function This function provides faster execution than if separate elements are
used. The inputs only need to be tested until the value of the output
can be determined. If input 1 is 0, then the output can be reset to 0
irrespective of all other inputs. See the example of AND_O (3,3,3) as
shown in figure 2 and in table 3.

Truth Table of AND-O (3,3,3) Table 3

1 2 3 11 12 13 21 22 23 60
0 x x x x x x x x 0
1 0 x x x x x x x 0
1 1 0 x x x x x x 0
1 1 1 0 0 0 x x x 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 x 1
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 x x 1
1 1 1 0 1 x 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 x 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 x 0 1 x 1
1 1 1 0 1 x 1 x x 1
1 1 1 1 x x 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 x x 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 x x 0 1 x 1
1 1 1 1 x x 1 x x 1
x indicates that the input has no effect on the value o the output or
the execution time of the PC element.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 29

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Average AVG

Summary AVeraGe element is used to calculate the AVG(C1,C2)

floating average of an optional number of 1 SET O 10
integers or real numbers. 2 I OF 11

Call AVG (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R
C2 Number of samples 2...255

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 SET IB Input for storage of a new sample value
each time the element is executed.
2 I IC1 Input of signal whose floating average is
to be calculated.
10 O OC1 Output for the calculated floating
average.
11 OF OC1 Output for First value in the sample
queue.

Function New data is entered into the queue by replacing the oldest sample
with the current value of I. The floating average is calculated by
summing all values in the queue and then dividing by the number
queue places C2 as shown in figure 1 below:

I
C2
1
O
n
C2 n
1

Figure 2. Floating Average Calculation

Output of Data When the input SET is 1, data at I is loaded to the outputs O and OF.
The number of values samples is set to 1.
When the input SET is reset (to 0), the last value loaded at OF
remains and O is calculated as in figure 1 above.

If the number of sampled values, i.e., the number of times the

element has been executed after SET has gone from 1 to 0, is less
than C2 then this value is substituted as the divisor in calculation
shown in figure 2, above.

8 - 30 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Read One Bit BGET

Summary BGET is used to read one selected bit from an BGET(C1)

integer or long integer. The integer usually 1 BITNR
2 I O 10
contains packed Boolean data.
Figure 1.

Call BGET

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 BITNR II The selected BIT NumberR 0...15 (C1=I) or
to read. 0...31 (C1=IL)
2 I II Input. Data input.
10 O OB Output. Status of the selected
bit.

Function The bit value of input I, specified by BITNR, is loaded to the output O.
If BITNR is not in the range 0 to 15 (C1=I) or 0 to 31 (C1=IL), then
the output O is set to 0.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 31

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Block Header BLOCK

Summary Block header BLOCK is used to enable/disable the BLOCK

execution of several PC elements. 1 ON RUN 5

Call BLOCK Figure 1.

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 ON IB Control input which is set (to 1) for normal
execution.
5 RUN OB RUN indicates execution of elements in the
block.

Function The structure element BLOCK is used to enable/disable a number of

PC elements in a control module, a slave module or sequence step.
A block may not contain structure elements or nested BLOCK
elements.

Execution For normal execution of a block, the supervisory execution unit must
be under normal execution, and the input ON of the block header
must be set to 1. If the ON input is set to 0 after the block has been
executed, the calculated data remains until the next time the block is
executed. If the supervisory execution unit is executed in the reset
mode, the elements in the block are also executed in that mode,
irrespective of the state of the ON input.

Run The output RUN is set if normal execution is in progress, i.e. the
supervisory ecxecution unit is under normal execution and the ON
input of the block is set.

.
1 ON RUN 5

Normal execution of
PC elements

Figure 2. Function Diagram

8 - 32 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Set One Bit BSET

Summary BSET is used to change the state of one BSET(C1)

selected bit of an integer or long integer value. 1 EN
The integer usually contains packed Boolean 2 BITNR

data. 3 BIT
4 I O 10

Figure 1.
Call BSET (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 EN IB ENable. If EN is reset (to 0),
then the current value I is
loaded unchanged to output
O.
2 BITNR II Input for selecting the BIT 0...15(C1=I) or
NumberR to set. 0...31(C1=IL)
3 BIT IB Input. Value for the BIT. 0...1
4 I II Input. Data Input.
10 O OI Output. Output of data.

Function If the value of the input EN is set (to 1), then the data bit, determined
by BITNR, is replaced by the value of the input BIT and the result is
loaded to the output O.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 33

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Comment C

Summary C (C1, C2) is used to write comments in application program.

Call C (C1,C2)

Connection Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of string values. 1...32
C2 No. of characters in string. 1...30

8 - 34 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Comparator COMP

Summary COMP (COMParator) is used to compare inputs. COMP(C1,C2)

1 I1 I1>I2 5
2 I2 I1=I2 6
Call COMP (C1,C2) I1<I2 7

Call Parameter Table 1. Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type. A, B, I, IL, R, T,TR
C2 Length of the array. 0...80

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 I1 IC1 Input 1. Input, whose value is
compared with input I2.
2 I2 IC1 Input of signal whose floating average
is to be calculated.
5 I1>I2 OB Input 1 > Input 2. Output which is set
if input I1 is grater than input I2.
6 I1=I2 OB Input 1 = Input 2.Output which is set if
input I1 is equal to input I2.
7 I1<I2 OB Input 1< Input 2. Output which is set if
input I1 is less than input I2.

The values at the two inputs are compared and the result of the
Function comparison can be read at the outputs I1<I2, I1=I2 or I1>I2.
If the type of inputs is array, outputs I1 > I2 and I1 < I2 are set based
on the first not equal characters of the input arrays.

Example: If I1 = "AAAA" and I2 = "AAXA" then I1 < I2.

At startup, output I1=I2 is set before the first execution regardless of

the values of inputs I1 and I2.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 35

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Comparator Integer COMP-I

Summary COMP-I (COMParator - Integer) is used to COMP-I(C1)

compare two integers or long integers. 1 I1 I1>I2 5
2 I2 I1=I2 6
I1<I2 7

Call COMP-I (C1) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 I1 IC1 Input 1. Input, whose value is compared with the
value at input I2.
2 I2 IC1 Input 2. Input, whose value is compared with the
value at input I1.
5 I1 > I2 OB Input 1 > Input 2. Output which is set to 1 if the
value at input I1 is greater than the value at input
I2.
6 I1 = I2 OB Input 1 = Input 2. Output which is set if the value
at input I1 is equal to the value at input I2.
7 I1 < I2 OB Input 1 < Input 2. Output which is set if the value
at input I1 is less than the value at input I2.

Function The values at the two inputs are compared and the result of the
comparison can be read at the outputs I1 > I2, I1 = I2, I1 < I2. The
output signal is 0 if the input signals are different and 1 if they are
equal. At startup, output I1 = I2 is set before the first execution,
regardless of the values of inputs I1 and I2.

8 - 36 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Comparator Real COMP-R

Summary COMP-R (COMParator - Real) is COMP-R

(C1,C2)
used for limit value monitoring of
1 I
real numbers with relation to 10 HHYS I<H1 20
several limits. 11 H1 I>=H1 21
12 H2 I>=H2 22

10+C1 HC1 I>=HC1 20+C1

30 LHYS I>L1 40
31 L1 I<=L1 41
32 L2 I<=L2 42

30+C2 LC1 I<=LC2 40+C2

Call COMP-R (C1, C2
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible
values
C1 Number of limit values for high level 1...9
C2 Number of limit values for low level 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input whose value is compared
with limit values H1...HC1 and L1...LC2.
10 HHYS IR High HYSteresis. Hysteresis common for
all H-values. The Hysteresis is the
difference between the I-value at which
the H outputs are reset and the value at
which they are set.
11 H1 IR High 1. Upper limit value 1.
12 H2 IR High 2. Upper limit value 2.
.
.
.
10 + C1 HC1 IR High C1. Upper limit value C1.
20 I < H1 OB Input < H1. Output which is set if I is less
than H1.
21 I ≥ H1 OB Input ≥ H1. Output which is set if I is
greater than or equal to H1.
22 I ≥ H2 OB Input ≥ H2. Output which is set if I is
greater than or equal to H2.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 37

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
.
.
.
20 + C1 I ≥ HC1 OB Input ≥ HC1. Output which is set if I is
greater than or equal to HC1.
30 LHYS IR Low HYSteresis. Hysteresis common for
all L values. The Hysteresis is the
difference between the I-values at which
the L outputs are reset and the value at
which they are set.
31 L1 IR Low 1. Lower limit value 1.
32 L2 IR Low 2. Lower limit value 2.
.
.
.
30 + C2 LC2 IR Low C2. Lower limit value C2.
40 I > L1 OB Input > L1. Output which is set if I is
greater than L1.
41 I ≤ L1 OB Input ≤ L1. Output which is set if I is less
than or equal to L1.
42 I ≤ L2 OB Input ≤ L2. Output which is set if I is less
than or equal to L2.
.
.
.
40 + C2 I ≤ LC2 OB Input ≤ LC2. Output which is set if I is
less than or equal to LC2.

Function Input signal I is compared with the limit values specified at inputs
H1...HC1 and L1...LC2. For upper limits, the output for the different
limits will be set when input I becomes equal to or greater than the
limit value. For lower limits, the output is set when I becomes less
than or equal to the limit value. Limits can be set optionally within the
range -9.2 x 10-18 to 9.2 x 1018. The lowest allowable positive and
negative values are 5.0 x 10-20 and -5.0 x 1020.

The element sets 20 (I < H1) and 40 (I > L1) to 1 before the first
execution, regardless of the value at input I.

Hysteresis The input HHYS gives the hysteresis for all limits at high level, and
LHYS for all limits at low level. The hysteresis is the difference
between the input values at which the different outputs are set and
the values at which they are reset.

8 - 38 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

At high level, the outputs will be reset when I becomes lower than the
limit minus the hysteresis HHYS. At low level, the outputs will be
reset when I becomes greater than the limit value plus the hysteresis
LHYS.

Figure 3. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 39

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Three State Controller CON-PU1

Summary CON-PU1 (CONtroller-PUlsed CON-PU1 (C1)

1) is a three state controller 1 REVF DEV 30
PULSE
intended to control, by means 2 I CALCUL. INC 31
of pulses 3 BLK DEC 32
(increase/decrease), a 4 PF
process via an integrating 5 ACTT
actuator such as a shifting 6 TPMIN
7 TGAP
motor of a solenoid valve.
8 K
CON-PU1 can be combined 9 DEADB
with, for example, a PI 10 TMBC
regulator for process control. 20 MAXDEV
If only pulse generation is 21 TPAMIN
desired, a simplified function 22 TPAC
can be chosen with a call
parameter. 23 SIM SIMULATION
24 BAL OF ACTUATOR
25 BALREF POSITION

26 DBPOS SUPERVISION ERR 33

Call CON-PU1 (C1) 27 DBREF

Call Parameters Table 1.

Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible

values
C1 Selection of extended or ordinary function. 0...1
The value 0 gives ordinary function.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 REFV IR REFerence Value. Input for setpoint.
2 I IR Input value. Input for measured value.
3 BLK IB BLocK pulse calculation.
4 PF II Pulse Frequency Factor. Minimum pulse
cycle time = PF x TS.
5 ACTT ITR ACTuator Time. The delay time interval of
the actuator.
6 TPMIN ITR Time Pulse MINimum. Min pulse length
for excitation of the motor.
7 TGAP ITR Time GAP. Compensation for play.
8 K IR Pulse length factor. Pulse =
(KxdDEVxACTT)/100+TGAP+TPMIN.

8 - 40 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
9 DEADB IR DEADBand.  DEV ≥DEADB if a pulse
is to be given.
10 TMBC ITR Time Minimum Between Change.
Minimum pause time after DEV having
changed sign.
(1)
20 MAXDEV IR MAXimum DEViation. Maximum deviation
for pulse length calculation. This value
does not affect output DEV.
(1)
21 TPAMIN ITR Time PAuse MINimum. Minimum pause
time.
(1)
22 TPAC IR Time PAuse Constant. Pause Time
factor. Pulse time = TPAMIN + TPAC x
Pulse duration.
(1)
23 SIM IB SIMulate actuator position. Input for
activation of simulation of actuator
position.
(1)
24 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking.
(1)
25 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference
value when tracking.
(1)
26 DBPOS IR DeadBand for POSition change.
Deadband for supervision of position
change of actuator.
(1)
27 DBREF IR DeadBand REFerence for position
change alarm.
When  ƒ DEVk DT >DBPOS
tn

a check is made to determine if

Itn - Ito>DBREF and if not, the error
signal ERR is set.
30 DEV OR Position DEViation. DEV=I - REFV.
31 INC OB INCrease. Output for increase of actuator
position.
32 DEC OB DECrease. Output for decrease of
actuator position.
(1)
33 ERR OB ERRor. Actuator position has not followed
the change commanded.

Function The three state controller CON-PU1 is intended to control, by means

of pulses at the outputs INC and DEC (increase/decrease
respectively), a process via for example a shifting motor or a solenoid
valve. With the call parameter C1 can be selected ordinary (C1=0) or
extended (C1=1) function. The following inputs should be in unit %
(0-100): REFV, I, DEADB, MAXDEV, BALREF, DBPOS, DBREF.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 41

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Control Module CONTRM

Summary CONTRM (CONTRol Module) is used for CONTRM(C1,C2,C3)

structuring a PC program into separate 1 ON RUN 5
execution units. Function modules, 2 SINGLE MODP 6

blocks and function elements can be 3 R

included in a control module.

Figure 1.
Call CONTRM (C1, C2, C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Cyclicity in ms. Allowed values are between 2ms
and 2000 ms in steps of 2 ms.
C2 Place in the cycle time 1...251:place in the cycle time
table and/or scheduling table, cyclic activation.
strategy. 252: activation at initialisation after
power down.
253:activation at power down
C3 Currently not used.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 ON IB Control input which is set (to 1) with normal
execution.
2 SINGLE IB If input ON and R are 0, elements in the
control module can be executed once by
setting SINGLE.
3 R IB Reset. Input for clearing elements in the
control module are executed.
5 RUN OB RUN indicates that elements in the control
module are executed.
6 MODP OB MODify Permission. Is always true.

Function The control module header CONTRM is a supervisory execution

controlling element for a control module. The call parameter C1 is
used to specify how often the control module is to be executed. The
call parameter C2 is used to specify the execution sequence of
execution units with te same cycle time. When and how the control
module is to be executed is determined with the control inputs ON,
SINGLE and R.

8 - 42 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Execution The input ON is set for normal execution. The control module is then
executed in accordance with the call parameters C1 and C2. If ON
input is reset after execution of the control module, the calculated
data remains until the next time the control module is executed. The
ON input overrides the SINGLE input, i.e. if ON is set, SINGLE has
no effect.

The execution is performed in three steps:

1. reading variables from the I/O devices, common data area, and a
from other modules
2. element execution
3. writing variables to the I/O devices, common data area, and to
other modules.

SINGLE Execution In the SINGLE input is set when the ON input is reset, the control
module is executed once in accordance with normal execution.

Clearing If input R is set, the control module is executed in the reset mode.
This means that all outputs of the elements within the control module
are given default values which in most cases are the 0-value of the
data.

Input R overrides the inputs ON and SINGLE.

RUN Output RUN is set only if normal execution is in progress, i.e. if ON is

set, or if the control module is being SINGLE executed. With SINGLE
execution, the RUN output is set during one cycle only.

MODP Is always true.

Effects from ON and R inputs on the program header override the inputs on the
control module header. The input ON on PCPGM must be set to
PCPGM
permit normal execution or reset execution of the elements in the
control module.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 43

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Code Converter CONV

Summary CONV (CONVerter) converts integer, real, time CONV

(C1,C2)
and time-real data from one representation to
1 I O 5
another. ERR 6

Figure 1.

Call CONV (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Input data type I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Output data type I, IL, R, T, TR

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 I IC1 Input. Input for data to be converted.
5 O OC2 Output. Output for converted data.
6 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if a limit is
reached at output O.

Function Data at input I with data type in accordance with the call parameter
C1 is converted to data with data type according to the call parameter
C2 at the output O. When conversion is to the data types I and IL
(integer) or T (time), overflow can occur at the maximum or minimum
limit values. The error signal output ERR is set when an overflow
occurs.

Rounding Off When converting from real numbers to integers, the number is
rounded up when the decimal is 0.5 or greater, and down when the
decimal is less than 0.5.

When converting from T to R, I or IL the value given is the number of

entire seconds from midnight.
When converting from R, I or IL to T the input value is treated as the
number of entire seconds from midnight.

8 - 44 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Code Converter CONV-BI

Summary CONV-BI (CONVerter - Boolean to CONV-BI

(C1,C2,C3)
Integer) converts data from BC, BCD,
1 S ERR 6
1-of-N, Gray code or 16/32 bit BC formed 2 L
from Boolean variables into integers. The 3 R
element has a memory function for 4 SIGN
storage of converted data.
11 I1 O 50
12 I2

10+C3 IC3

Figure 1.
Call CONV-BI (C1, C2, C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL
C2 Type of input code 1...5
1 for BC
2 for BCD
3 for 1-of-N code
4 for Gray code
5 for 16/32 bit BC*
C3 Number of inputs for data to be 1...31
converted.
If C2=5 then C3 must be 31.
* when C2=5 the output O cannot be interpreted as I/IL by the aid.

Number of Inputs Table 2.

Reguired with Number of Inputs Required with
Code I IL
BC 15 31
BCD 18 31
1-of-N 31 31
Gray 15 31
16/32 bit BC 15+SIGN 31+SIGN

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 45

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Connections Table 3.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for storage of a new value each time
the element is executed. When this input is
reset (to 0) the last calculated value will remain
at the output.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of data.
3 R IB Reset. Input for clearing of the output. This
input overrides the S and L inputs.
4 SIGN IB Input set (to 1) with negative data values. If
C2=5, SIGN is used as the most significant
input to get a 16/32 bit conversion.
5 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set when more than
one input is set with conversion of 1-of-N code
or if the integer value to be stored at the output
cannot be represented by the data type.
11 I1 IB* Input 1. Input 1 for BC, BCD, 1-of-N,
Gray code or 16/32 bit BC..
12 I2 IB* Input 2. Input 2 for BC, BCD, 1-of-N,
Gray code or 16/32 bit BC.
10+C3 IC3 IB* Input C3. Input C3 for BC,BCD, 1-OF-N,
Gray code or 16/32 bit BC..
50 O OC1 Output 1. Output for the converted data.
* the data at each of these inputs is of Boolean type, but together they form
a value of the type specified by parameter C1.

Function The element can convert binary code (BC), binary coded decimal
code (BCD), 1-of-N code or Gray code to integers of data type I (16
bit) or IL (32 bit). With BC the SIGN input can be used as a sign bit
(C2=1) or as most significant bit (C2=5).

Examples of Input Table 4.

Values with Input Input Integer Value BC BC without Sign BCD 1-of-N
with Sign
Different
I1 1 1 1 1
Recordings I2 2 2 2 2
I3 4 4 4 3
I4 8 8 8 4
I5 16 16 10 5
I6 32 32 20 6
I7 64 64 40 7
I8 128 128 80 8

8 - 46 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 4 continued
Input Input Integer Value BC BC without Sign BCD 1-of-N
with Sign
I9 256 256 100 9
I10 512 212 200 10
. . .
. . .
: . .
30 30
I31 2 2
31
SIGN sign 2
Only one of the inputs may be set with 1-of-N code. All inputs have a
fixed value with BC, BCD and 1-of-N codes but not with Gray code.
BC Gray Code 1-of-N-code
I4 I3 I2 I1 I4 I3 I2 I1 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Storage of Data When input L is set, the code at inputs I1 to IC3 is immediately
converted and stored. If input S is set, the input code is converted
and the integer is stored each time the element is executed. When S
is reset (to 0) after having been set, the data stored most recently
remains. The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has
no effect.

Clearing The input R clears the output and prevents all further storage of data
while R is set.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 47

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Supervision When converting 1-of-N code, the setting of only one of the inputs 1
to IC3 is supervised. If two or more inputs are set, the value of the
input signal with the lowest number is stored. The error signal output
ERR is also set. If the integer value to be stored at the output
exceeds the allowable range, the error signal output is set. In
addition, the output is limited to the upper or lower limit value.

CONV-BI
11 I1
12 I2 When
DEC ERR 5
2 1
test
IC3

10 + C3
Test
Con- valid
version data
4 SIGN

I
1 S O 50
C
1
2 L
1
3 R
R

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

8 - 48 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Code Converter CONV-IB

Summary CONV-BI (CONVerter -Integer to Boolean) CONV-IB

(C1,C2,C3)
converts data from integers into BC, BCD, -1 S ERR 5
1-of-N, Gray code 16/32 bit BC formed -2 >L SIGN 6

from Boolean variables. The element has -3 R ZERO 7

a memory function for storage of -10 I O1 11

converted data. O2 12 .
.
.
OC3 10+C3

Figure 1.
Call CONV-BI (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL
C2 Type of input code 1...4
1 for BC
2 for BCD
3 for 1-of-N code
4 for 16 or 32 bit BC *
C3 Number of outputs for converted data. 1..23
* when C2=4, the input 1 cannot be interpreted as I/IL by the aid MasterAid
2XX.

Number of Outputs Table 2.

with Different Number of Outputs Required with
Code I IL
Codes BC 15 31
BCD 18 32
1-of-N 32 32
16/32 bit BC 15+SIGN 31+SIGN

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 49

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Connections Table 3.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for storage of a new value each time
the element is executed. When this input is
reset (to 0) the last calculated value will remain
at the outputs.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of data.
3 R IB Reset. Input for clearing of the output. This
input overrides the S and L inputs.
5 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set when the integer
value exceeds the value which can be
represented at the outputs.
6 SIGN OB Output which is set to 1 with negative data
values.
7 ZERO OB Output which is set to 1 when the input I is
ZERO.
10 I IC1 Input. Input for the integer value to be
converted.
11 O1 OB* Output 1. Output 1 for the binary code.
12 O2 OB*
.
.
.
10+C3 OC3 OB* Output C3. Output C3 for the BC, BCD, 1-of-N
code or 16/32 bit BC.
* the data at each of these outputs is of Boolean type, but together they form a
value of the type specified by parameter C2.

Function The element can convert integers of the data types I (15 bits) or IL
(31 bits) to binary code (BC), binary coded decimal code (BCD) or
1-of-N code. The data type I/IL can also be converted to 16/32 bit BC.
The code conversion to be performed is specified by the call
parameters C1 and C2. With positive data values the output SIGN is
reset (to 0) and with negative values, set (to 1). For 16/32 bit BC
SIGN is used as output 16/32.

Table 4.
Ex. of Output
Output BC Output Integer Value BCD 1-of-N
Values with
O1 1 1 1
Different O2 2 2 2
Recordings O3 4 4 4
O4 8 8 4

8 - 50 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 4 continued
Output BC Output Integer Value BCD 1-of-N
O5 16 10 5
O6 32 20 6
07 64 40 7
O8 128 80 9
O9 256 100 9
O10 512 200 10
.
.
.
SIGN*
* SIGN is used as a sign for BC, BCD and 1-of-N. Only one of the outputs is
set with 1-of-N-code.

Storage of Data When input L is set, the integer at input I is ommediately converted. If
input S is set, the input code is stored and the result is converted
each time the element is executed. When S is reset (to 0) after
having been set, the data stored most recently remains until the
element is executed once more with one of the inputs S, L or R set.
The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect.

Clearing The input R clears the output and prevents all further storage of data
while R is set.

Supervision When converting data from integers to 1-of-N code, the numbers are
restricted to - 32 to + 32.
If the integer value to be converted exceeds the allowable output
range, the error signal output is set. In addition, the output is limited
to the upper or lower limit value.

CONV-IB

01 11
10 I 02 12
I
1 S
C
1
2 L Con-
1 version 0C3 10 + C3
3 R
R ZERO 7
SIGN 6

Test
ERR 5
valid
data

Figure 2. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 51

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Counter COUNT

Summary COUNT (COUNTer) is a presettable counter COUNT(C1)

1 L >0 10
for counting pulses, up or down. The counter
2 U/D-N =0 11
also monitors the relation of the counter value 3 C <0 12
to 0. 4 R
5 EN

21 I O 22

Call COUNT(C1)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 L IB Load. Loads the counter with the value at input I
2 U/D-N IB Up/Down-N. Input which determines if the counter
is to count up (U/D-N=1) or down (U/D-N=0)
3 C IB Clock. When this input changes from 0 to 1 the
counter counts up or down in accordance with the
status of the input U/D-N.
4 R IB Reset. Input which clears the counter and
prevents all further counting or loading. This input
overrides all other inputs!
5 EN IB ENable. Input which is set to 1 to permit counting
or loading. Reset execution is, however,
performed independently of EN.
10 >0 OB Output which is set when the value of the counter
is greater than 0.
11 =0 OB Output which is set when the value of the counter
is 0.
12 <0 OB Output which is set when the value of the counter
is less than 0.
21 I IC1 Input. Input for new value when loading.
22 O OC1 Output. Output for counter value.

8 - 52 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

Function When input C is set, the counter value immediately increases or

decreases. The value increases if U/D-N = 1 and decreases if U/D-N
= 0. The duration of the counter period may not be less than twice the
cycle time of the program.

When the input L is set, the counter is loaded with the value at input
I. If both input L and C are set simultaneously, the counter is first
loaded, after which an up or down count is performed. The input EN
must be set for the counter to count or load a new value.

The input R clears the counter and prevents all further counting or
Clearing loading. R overrides EN.

Supervision The status outputs specify the relation of the counter value to zero
(>0, =0, <0). When the counter reaches its least or greatest value for
the data type, all counting ceases.

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 8 - 53

 Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions

8 - 54 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Chapter 9 - PC ELEMENTS from D to F

Data Logger DATALOG

DATALOG
Summary DATALOG PC element is a single channel data (C1,C2,C3)
logger used to record a stream of variable 1 CLEAR ACT 10
samples into the buffer. One value is stored into 2 EN RUN 11

the buffer every time the PC element is executed. 3 >TRIGG RDY 12

4 POSTNR FULL 13
Logger operation can be controlled from both the
application program via input terminals 1 to 4 or 21 I O 31
the Drive Tool via a special Command (CMD) 22 ELEM LAST 32
word internal to the DATALOG element structure. TIME 33

Multiple DATALOG elements can be Figure 1.

implemented under the same CONTRM.

Call DATALOG (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R, B
C2 Storage unit size 2...250 samples */
C3 Number of storage units in a 1...4 */
buffer
*/ the total capacity of the Data logger buffer is calculated as C2 x C3. Any
combination of valid C2 and C3 is acceptable.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 CLEAR IB Logger reset.
2 EN IB Sampling ENable.
3 TRIGG IB Init for the logging termination
sequence.
4 POSTNR II Number of samples to be
collected after trigger.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9-1

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
10 ACT OB Logger not in RESET mode.
11 RUN OB Logger in RUN mode
(sampling).
12 RDY OB Sampling teminated, data
available in the buffer.
13 FULL OB Logger buffer FULL.
21 I IC1 Input data to log.
22 ELEM II Location number of the logged
sample.
31 O OC1 Value of the sample selected
by ELEM.
32 LAST OI Location number of the
LAteST sample.
33 TIME OIL TIME stamp for the TRIGG or,
the last sample if logger
stopped but not triggered or,
the first sample if logger is
running.

Function DATALOG samples input data into its internal buffer. The logger
operation can be controlled both by the application program or by the
Drive Tool.

The FB input terminals CLEAR, ENABLE and TRIGG are used by the
application program for this purpose.

The Drive Tool accesses the internal DATALOG element Status and
Command (CMD) words. The Status word includes the same
information as the DATALOG FB output terminals: ACT, RUN, RDY
POST and FULL. The CMD word includes the CLEAR, ENABLE and
STOP individual control bits.

The resultant control signals are formed in a following way:

• signal CLEAR = (input CLEAR ) or (CMD bit CLEAR)
• signal ENABLE = (input ENABLE) or (CMD bit ENABLE)
• signal TRIGG = input TRIGG
• signal STOP = CMD bit STOP

9-2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

There are 4 possible states that the DATALOG operation can enter:
RESET, RUN, RDY and POST.

RESET

RUN=1 CLEAR=1, or
STOP= 1->0
CLEAR=1 CLEAR=1
EN=0, or
STOP=0->1
RUN RDY

TRIGG=0->1 POST_CNT=0
POST

Figure 2. State Diagram of

DATALOG element.

(the highest priority)

RESET State Entered in the system "Power up" mode and also when:
CLEAR signal becomes 1, or STOP changes from 1 to 0.

In this state:
• sampling is stopped
• the buffer is cleared and LAST points to the first (sample) position
in the buffer
• the time mark is cleared
• ACT, RUN, RDY and FULL are all reset (to 0).

This RESET state is terminated after one cycle if the EN = 1

RUN State Entered from the RESET state when EN signal becomes 1. The Time
of the first recorded data sample is recorded for the TIME output. In
this state:
• input data are collected,
• ACT is set to 1,
• RUN is set to 1,
• RDY is set to 0,
• FULL reflects the current buffer status.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9-3

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

If the EN signal changes from 1 to 0 or the STOP signal changes

from 1 to 0 then the TIME stamp is updated with the current time and
LAST is updated with the current sample location (number) after
which the RDY state is entered.

POST State The state POST is entered when the signal TRIGG becomes active.
It executes the following logging termination sequence:
1. update the TIME stamp with the current time
2. collect "POSTNR" additional input data samples
3. freeze the content of the logger buffer and then
4. enter the RDY state.

RDY State Entered from the RUN state when EN becomes 0 or the STOP
changes from 1 to 0 or, from the POST state after the sampling
termination procedure has been completed. In this state:

Sampled data are frozen in the buffer.

• ACT is set to 1,
• RUN is set to 0,
• RDY is set to 1,
• FULL reflects current buffer status.

FULL is set when the buffer becomes full. Recording continues by

overwriting the oldest sampled value. Recording can be stopped
when the buffer is full by a feedback connection from the output FULL
to input ENABLE.

Data samples in the buffer are numbered 1. (C2 x C3). ELEM

indicates the number of the sample to be moved to the DATALOG
OUT terminal. If is out of range then OUT is zero.

TIME Output
The TIME is expressed as a 32 bit integer. It is read from the system
clock and represents the number of the 100us ticks since midnight.

9-4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Management of FBA Communications DCBAID

DCBAID
Summary DCBAID PC element makes possible to use -1 CHAN ERR 10
FBA (=FieldBusAdapter) modules connected -2 PARID FAIL 11
to NCB board. It is intended for general -3 VCIADDR FBATYPE 12
management of the link between NCB and -4 VCIOFFS PROTOCS 13
HWVERS 14
FCA, and also for debugging of
SWVERS 15
communications start up. 16
DATE
DCBAID is necessary to exist once in every DCBSTAT 17
application program, which contains DCBRX DCBERR 18
elements (or other FBA communication DCBSPEC 19
elements). NCBSTAT 20
NCBERR 21
DCBAID should not be inserted more than
NCBSPEC 22
once in any application program. FBASTAT 23
FBAERR 24
FBASPEC 25
PARVAL 30
VCIMAX 31
VCIUSED 32
VCIVAL 40
ERRC 99
Call DCBAID
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 CHAN II 1…2 CHANnel, whose VCI is to be shown
2 PARID II Parameter, whose actual value is to be
shown.
3 VCIADDR IIL Which VCI is to be shown.
4 LAST II Which location in the VCI to be shown.
10 ERR OB Is the DCBAID usable or not.
11 FAIL OI Code (= reason) why parameterization
FAILed.
12 FBATYPE OA20 FBA board TYPE text.
13 PROTOCS OA20 Available PROTOColS in FBA.
14 HWVERS OA20 HardWare VERSion of FBA.
15 SWVERS OA20 SoftWare VERSion of FBA.
16 DATE OA20 Generation DATE of FBA software.
17 DCBSTAT OI DCB STATe.
18 DCBERR OI DCB ERRor code.
19 DCBSPEC OI DCB SPECial info.
20 NCBSTAT OI NCB STATe.
21 NCBERR OI NCB ERRor code.
22 NCBSPEC OI NCB SPECial info.
23 FBASTAT OI FBA STATe.
24 FBAERR OI FBA ERRor code.
25 FBASPEC OI FBA SPECial info.
30 PARVAL OI VALue of inquired PARameter.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9-5

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
No Name Type Description
31 VCIMAX OI MAX amount of VCIs (of special size).
32 VCIUSED OI Number of created VCIs.
40 VCIVAL OI VALue of inquired location in VCI header.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.
Function The PC element has dual role:
1. Towards other FBA related software it is taking care of “DCB
state machine” status of this machine is stored in
DualPortMemory between AC80 CPU and NCB boards, and from
there it is distributed readable by NCB and FBA software.
2. Towards the human debugger of the application, DCBAID shall
help testing of FBA communication. Especially those things,
which are common to whole FBA module (or whole channel of
FBA module) can be checked from output pins of DCBAID.
1. CHAN specifies, from which channel the output pins VCIMAX
Input Pins
and VCIUSED shall be fetched. Normally this pin should have
value =1, but with some (future) FBAs there might exist 2
channels, and then possible values are 1 and 2.
2. PARID specifies which FBA parameter value (= actual value)
should be shown in PARVAL output. Some values have
special meaning:
0 = do not show any value,
1 = show board type (=enumerate),
which should match with the given board type text in DCB01,
2 = show actually used protocol (= same as given in DCB01,
presuming, that FBA accepted it), 3…32 other FBA
parameters. (Note: that you can use PARID and PARVAL
pins to look at both the default values of the FBA parameters
and the parameter values given by DCB01 DB element.)
3. VCIADDR specifies which VCI shall be the source for VCIVAL
output: 0 = VCIVAL not updated, 1…255 = identification
number of the VCI (available from output pins VCI_IN and
VCI_OUT of DCBRX), >256 = pointer to the actual VCI .
4. VCIOFFS = specifies how far from the beginning of the VCI
the value toVCIVAL pin shall be picked.

Output Pins 10. ERR indicates whether DCBAID is usable (= 0) or not (= 1).
11. FAIL indicates some programming errors
(e.g. FB_NO_NCB_AVAIL or DCB01_PAR_ERR).
12. FBATYPE shows the board type identification text.

9-6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Output Pins continued

13. PROTOCS shows all available protocols in FBA. They are
shown as a string, where each character reflects one available
protocol, so that protocols 1…9 are shown with respective
digit, and protocols 10…15 are shown with characters A…F.
14 HWVERS shows FBA hardware identification text.
15. SWVERS shows FBA software identification text.
16. DATE shows FBA software generation date as text.
Note: that all pins 12…16 are initialized to show text “UNKNOWN”. If
you see such text, you know that no text has arrived from the FBA
since initialization (or re-initialization).
17. DCBSTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside
CPU of AC80. This variable is maintained by the DCBAID
itself, and read by the NCB and FBA software.
18. DCBERR = error code shown by DCBAID to NCB and FBA
software.
19. DCBSPEC = special info from DCBAID to NCB and FBA
software. (if DCBERR = 0, then used as free running counter
to indicate that DCBAID (and contained state machine) is still
alive.)
20. NCBSTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside
NCB board of AC80. This variable is maintained by the NCB
firmware, and read by the respective state machines of CPU
and FBA.
21. NCBERR = FBA communications’ error code shown by NCB
to CPU and FBA software.
22. NCBSPEC = FBA communications’ special info from NCB to
CPU and FBA software (if NCBERR = 0, then used as free
running counter to indicate that NCBSTAT state machine is
still alive.)
23. FBASTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside
FieldBusAdapter. This variable is cyclically sent to the NCB
(using DDCS protocol) and stored there in DualPortMemory to
be readable by DCBAID.
24. FBAERR = error code sent by FBA to NCB and CPU software
(see FBA protocol specific manual.)
25. FBASPEC = special info from FBA to NCB and CPU software
(see FBA protocol specific manual.)
30. PARVAL shows the actually used parameter value, whose
identity is specified by PARID pin. Note: that all actual
parameter values have come from FBA, and they are checked
there against allowed range limit values.
31. VCIMAX shows how many VCIs are possible on channel
CHAN with given size of DCB01.
32. VCIUSED shows how many VCIs actually are created on
channel CHAN.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9-7

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Output Pins continued

40. VCIVAL shows the requested value from a VCI header. The
VCI is specified through VCIADDR pin, where you can tell
either VCI identifier number (=1…255) or VCI starting
address. Or if VCIADDR = 0, DCBAID does not show anything
on VCIVAL pin. Offset from start of VCI is given via pin
VCIOFFS. (To be really used, you should know the internal
structure of VCI-header. However normal users do not need
to look into VCI-headers this way…)
99. ERRC = error code, showing what is wrong in using DCBAID.
Note: that actual FBA communication errors are shown in pins
DCBERR, NCBERR and FBAERR, and not in this pin.
Error Codes Table 2.
Error # Description

1000 FB_NO_DCB01 /*No DCB01 element in the application */

1100 FB_DCBAID_FOUND_ALREADY /*DCBAID can exist only once */

1101 ILLEGAL_VCI_NUM /* illegal value in DCBAID input pin */

State Machines
DCBSTAT Following states may occur in DCBSTAT
0. DCB_NOT_DEFINED (= no DCB01 DB-element in the
application.)
1. DCB_DATA_BASE_DEFINED (= DCB01 element found and
configured.)
2. DCB_DEFIN_WRITTEN_TO_DPM, (=DCBAID found in the
application.)
3. DCB_VCIS_RESERVED (= DCBAID run in normal cyclic
mode, and found, that all created VCIs are fully configured.)
4. DCB_RUNNING (= DCBAID found that NCB and FBA
software are ready for normal cyclic communications.)
5. DCB_BLOCKED (After user’s Block command from FCB this
code is set into DCBSTAT presuming, that old state there was
DCB_RUNNING. This is exceptionally done by NCB software,
because DCBAID cannot do anything while blocked.)
6. DCB_RECONFIG (Set by system software while detecting
DCB01 in the newly downloaded application, presuming that
old state was nonzero, i.e. the old application contained
DCB01, too.
NCBSTAT Following states may occur in NCBSTAT
0. AC80_SYSTEM_NOT_OPERATIVE
1. DCB_UNDEFINED
2. NCB_READY_FOR_DCB_DEFINITIONS
3. DCB_DEFIN_WRITTEN_TO_AMCT
4. FBA_TYPE_APPROVED

9-8 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

NCBSTAT continued
5. PARAM_WAIT_FROM_FBA
6. DCB_PARAM_WRITTEN_TO_DPM
7. ( not used)
8. DCB_HEADERS_READY_FOR_FBA
9. NCB_RUNNING_DCB
10. NCB_BLOCKED_DCB
11. NCB_RECONFIGURATION
12. FBA_FAILURE
99. NCB_ERROR
FBASTAT Following states may occur in FBASTAT
0. DDCS_LINKOFF
1. DDCS_DATASETS_RUN_TO_NCB
2. CID1_CONNECT
3. ID_DATA_SENT
4. PARAMETER_DEFIN_RECEIVED
5. PARAMETER_LIMIT_CHECKED
6. PARAMETER_BLOCK_SENT (to NCB)
7. (not used)
8. VCB_HEADERS_N_RECEIVED
9. VCB_HEADERS_CHECKED
10. (not used)
11. FIELD_BUS_COMM_STARTED
12. FBA_COMMUNICATION_RUN
13. FBA_BLOCKED_DCB
14. FBA_RECONFIGURATION
99. DCB_COMMUNICAT_FAIL

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9-9

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Communications with FieldBusAdapter DCBRX

DCBRX
F=1-F1 CHAN RDY 4
Summary DCBRX PC element creates one or two F=0-F2 SPECIAL ERR 5
VCIs (= VirtualConnectorInterfaces) and F=0-F3 >STATION STATUS 6
using it/them as data buffers acts as F=0-F4 IDENT LASTPIN 7
F=0-F5 CONFIG VCI_IN 8
interface between FBA (=
-1 EN VCI_OUT 9
FieldBusAdapter) module and AC80 -2 >INIT
application program. DCBRX may exist as -3 >CLEAR
several instances in same application
program. -10 IN1 OUT1 50
-11 IN2 OUT2 51
-12 IN3 OUT3 52
-13 IN4 OUT4 53
-14 IN5 OUT5 54
-15 IN6 OUT6 55
ERRC 99

Call DCBRX (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of input pins 0…32
C2 Number of output pins 0…32

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
F1 CHAN II 1…2 CHANnel, where VCI is to be created.
F2 SPECIAL II SPECIAL info, if needed.
F3 STATION II Remote STATION ID
F4 IDENT IL IDENTifier of the data block.
F5 CONFIG II Communication mode through the VCI.
1 EN IB ENable DCBRX to communicate.
2 INIT IB Abort and re-INITialize communication.
3 CLEAR IB CLEAR error code in ERRC.
4 RDY OB New transfer to/from the FBA just detected.
5 ERR OB Communication via these VCIs not usable.
6 STATUS OI Combination of STATUS bits.
7 LASTPIN OI How many output pins were updated.
8 VCI_IN OIL Identifier of INput VCI.
9 VCI_OUT OIL Identifier of OUTput VCI.
10 IN1 II First transmit data pIN.

9+C1 IN*C1 II Last transmit data pin.

50 OUT1 OI First receive data pin.
49+C2 OUT*C2 OI Last receive data pin.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code

9 - 10 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function During initialization phase DCBRX shall specify an input VCI, an

output VCI or both (= a “VCI pair”) depending on values of C1 and
C2. If C1 or C2 = 0, respective VCI is not generated. It is forbidden,
that both C1 and C2 are = 0. Additionally C1 and C2 values specify
how long VCIs are needed for the DCBRX. If DCB01 specified
shorter buffers, an error code is set and no VCIs created. Created
VCIs’ identifiers are available from pins VCI_IN and VCI_OUT, and
can be from there connected e.g. to DCBAID pin VCIADDR. Each
VCI (or VCI pair) will have additionally two attributes: IDENT and
STATION, which specify the data source or the destination in the
remote station.

During normal runtime DCBRX will control the communication status

of the dedicated VCIs (through pin EN). And if EN = 1, it will also
copy values from pins I1…I*C1 to output_VCI and from input_VCI to
pins OUT1…OUT*C2.

There are several possible variations, how the communications (and

copying of data pins to/from VCIs) can be done. The actual selection
of variation is given with pin CONFIG.
1. CHAN specifies, from which channel data area the VCI shall
Function
be taken. (If the FBA supports one channel only, CHAN must
Parameters be = 1.)
2. SPECIAL can be used to specify such things, which do not
have dedicated input pins.
3. STATION specifies the station address of the communication
partner.
4. IDENT specifies the identifier for the data block(s) for (or in)
the remote station.
5. CONFIG is a word, which consist of independent configuration
bits. Their meanings are
1= Next transmission forbidden before previous acknowledged.
2= Transmit only when/if requested by the remote station.
4= Output VCI is updated by DCBRX during every execution,
although transmitted to remote station only when/if requested by
the remote station. (auto-answer mode.)
8= Copy all received data from the VCI to DCBRX output pins, i.e.
older data is sent first to FBA, if the VCI contains both older and
newer data. (If this bit is not set, DCBRX overwrites always the
older data in the VCI with newer data regardless whether FBA
got the older data or not.
The exception case is while FBA is just reading the older data.
In such case DCBRX cannot write new data into VCI at all, but
gives error code.)
32= This DCBRX is intended to ask data from the remote station.
(OUT_VCI is used for sending questions and IN_VCI for
receiving answers.)

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 11

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function Parameters continued

64= The created VCI shall receive local error information from
the FBA (the VCI is an “Error-VCI").
128= The created VCI shall receive local diagnostic information
from the FBA (the VCI is an “Diagnostics-VCI”).
256= No timeout supervision for this DCBRX. If this bit is = 0, the
timeout supervision is done against timeout limit given in
DCB01 parameter #33 (= timeout in milliseconds). Or if
parameter #33 is not specified, default timeout limit = 1000
ms.
512= FBA is not capable to process several VCIs alternately using
same DDCS datasets. Therefore we allow only one DCBRX
(= this one) in AC80 application, and specify the used
dataset numbers with mask words in SPECIAL (= input
mask) and STATION (= output mask) pins according
following interpretation:
1 dataset#1 in SPECIAL dataset#2 in STATION
2 dataset#3 in SPECIAL dataset#4 in STATION
4 dataset#5 in SPECIAL dataset#6 in STATION
8 dataset#7 in SPECIAL dataset#8 in STATION
16 dataset#10 in SPECIAL dataset#10 in SPECIAL
32 dataset#12 in SPECIAL dataset#13 in SPECIAL
64 dataset#14 in SPECIAL dataset#15 in SPECIAL
128 dataset#16 in SPECIAL dataset#17 in SPECIAL
256 dataset#18 in SPECIAL dataset#19 in SPECIAL
512 dataset#20 in SPECIAL dataset#21 in SPECIAL
1024 dataset#22 in SPECIAL dataset#23 in SPECIAL
2048 dataset#24 in SPECIAL dataset#25 in SPECIAL
4096 dataset#26 in SPECIAL dataset#27 in SPECIAL
8192 dataset#28 in SPECIAL dataset#29 in SPECIAL
16384 dataset#30 in SPECIAL dataset#31 in SPECIAL
-32768 dataset#32 in SPECIAL dataset#33 in SPECIAL

Input Pins 1. EN enables use of the VCI(s) for communication (or disables
while EN = 0).
2. INIT positive edge will abort from any pending dialog, and
restart the usage of the VCIs of this DCBRX. (This is an
abnormal thing, and should not be done except in some
recovery procedure.)
3. CLEAR positive edge will clear the error code in ERRC.
Otherwise the last nonzero value will sustain there “forever”.
10. IN1…IN*C1 will carry data for the FBA to transmit it to the
remote station. It is not possible limit sending into some part
of the pins. They are sent all if any (or at least all copied into
the output_VCI. It is also impossible to use other data types
than Integer. (IL type may be converted to 2 Integers with ILI
PC-element before connecting to DCBRX.

9 - 12 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Output Pins 4. RDY indicates whether DCBRX just found new data in the
input_VCI or if just detected that previous data was picked
from the output_VCI.
5. ERR indicates whether this DCBRX is operative and
communicated with FBA in the near history (= within timeout
limit).
6. STATUS is a word, which consist of several independent bits:
1= ACT (= DCBRX is active).
2= INITOK (=initialization succeeded).
4= CLEAR (= INIT pin caused reinitialization).
8= STARTING (= have not yet detected FBA to be in normal cyclic
mode).
16= RDY (= have detected FBA to be in normal cyclic mode).
32= BUSY (= waiting for response or acknowledgement from remote
station).
64= IN_DONE (= just copied new data from input_VCI to OUTx
pins).
128= OUT_DONE (= just found, that old data from output_VCI sent to
FBA).
256= SHORT (= new data received from FBA was shorter than
configured by C2. Use LASTPIN to see how many data pins
contain new data).
512= NAK (= received bad acknowledgement from remote station).
1024= REQ (= remote station is asking information from this DCBRX,
or was asking, if this DCBRX is in auto-answer mode).
16384= RECONFIG.
-32768= ERR (= configuration error. This DCBRX is unusable.)
7. LASTPIN shows how many OUTx pins contain new data. This
pin is irrelevant (and not updated) if the protocol always
updates all OUTx pins.
8. VCI_IN shows identifier of allocated input_VCI.
9. VCI_OUT shows identifier of allocated output_VCI.
50. OUT1…OUT*C2 will carry data from the FBA (= received from
the remote station). It is possible that with some protocols,
new values are received into limited (first) part of the pins
only. Then the number of updated pins can be read from
LASTPIN pin. It is impossible to use other data types than
Integer. (IL type may be converted from 2 Integers with IIL PC
element connected to DCBRX out pins.
99. ERRC = error code, showing what is wrong in using DCBRX.
Note, that link specific failures are shown in DCBAID output
pins. DCBRX shall show only (or typically) VCI specific error
conditions. Note also, that ERRC of DCBRX will register the
last occurred error. Well done communication will not clear old
error code. For that purpose you need to cause rising signal
edge at CLEAR pin.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 13

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Error Codes Table 3.

Error # Description
2 CONTAINS_NO_DATA /*nobody ever written into the buffer*/
3 CONTAINS_OLD_DATA /* no sense to read it again */
4 CONTAIN_STILL_NEW_DATA /* and overwriting is forbidden */
5 BOTH_PAGES_RESERVED /* cannot overwrite, because the older
page is currently reserved for reading (and we never overwrite the
newer page) */
1000 FB_NO_DCB01 /* No DCB01 element in the application */
1200 TOO_SHORT_VCIS /* PC-element needs longer VCI(s) than
configured by DCB01 */
1201 NO_DATA_DEFINED_FOR_VCIS /* Total configured length of VCIs
= 0 */
1202 ONLY_ONE_BLOCK_ALLOWED /* There are several DCBRX
instances, which specify single-VCI-mode */
1203 NO_ACK_BUFFER /* CONFIG-pin specified acknowledgement
mode, but C2 did not specify a buffer for acknowledgements. */
1204 NO_INQUIRY_BUFFER /* CONFIG-pin specified inquiry mode, but
C1 did not specify a buffer for sending inquiries */
1205 FB_NO_MORE_BUFFERS /* all available VCI space already
allocated */
1206 FB_TOO_BIG_CHAN_NUMBER /* no VCIs for such channel# are
possible */
1207 IDENT_ALREADY_USED /* each DCBRX must have unique
identification info */
2000 FB_NO_NCB_AVAIL /* No functional NCB board found */
2001 FB_DCB_START_TIMEOUT /* Waited too long time for
communications to start up */
3000 VCI_IN_TIMEOUT /* Too long time without data update from FBA */
3001 VCI_OUT_TIMEOUT /* Too long time without data request from
FBA */
3002 ACK_TIMEOUT /* Too long time waiting ACK message from
remote station FBA */
3003 VCI_NEVER_IN /* Too long waiting for first data update from FBA
*/
5002 FORBIDDEN_DIRECTION /* PC element tried to write into input
buffer or read from output buffer */
5003 RESERVED /* PC element tried to open already opened VCI */
5004 NOT_OPENED /* PC element tried to close already closed VCI */
5005 VCI_MISSIN /* PC element tried to open or close a missing VCI */

9 - 14 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer Address

DEMUX-MI

DEMUX-MI
Summary DEMUltipleXer with Memory and Integer 1
(C1,C2)
S AERR 10
address is used as a demultiplexer with 2 L
memory function. DEMUX-MI has an optional 3 R
number of outputs can be specified. The data 11 A
type can be integers, real numbers, boolean 31 I OA1 51
variables or time. .
.
.
.
.
.
OA*C2 50+C2
Call DEMUX-MI (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Datatype B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of outputs 1...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for loading of new values each time
the element is executed. When the input S is
reset (to 0), the outputs will retain their most
recently loaded values..
2 >L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of data from
the input I to the output addressed by input A
3 R IB Reset. Input for resetting the outputs. This
input overrides inputs S and >L.
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Set (to 1) when input A is
greater than call parameter C2 or a negative
value.
11 A II Address. Selection of which output, the value
loaded at I should be stored. If the value is 0,
the value 0 is stored at all outputs.
31 I IC1 Input. Data input
50 OA1 OC1 Output Address 1. The first output from the
demultiplexer.
.
.
.
50+C2-1 OAC2 OC1 Output Address C2. The last output from the
demultiplexer.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 15

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function The input address A (1..C2) specifies at which output (OA1...OAC2)

the data value at input I is to be stored. If A is 0 then the value 0 is
Addressing store at all outputs.

Loading If the value of L is 1 when the PC element DEMUX-MI is executed

and the value of L was 0 during the previous execution, then the
value at input I is loaded. If the input S is set, new data from the input
I is loaded each time the PC element is executed. When S is reset (to
0 from 1), the data most recently loaded remains until one of the
inputs S, L, or R are set.

The input S overrides the input L. When S is set L has no meaning.

Clearing When the input R is set (to 1) the data outputs (OA1 to OAC2) are
reset (to 0) and data is not loaded at the input I.

Supervision The value of the input address A is checked each execution of the
PC element. If it is greater than the number of outputs specified by
the call parameter C2 or it is a negative number, then the AERR
output is set (to 1). The data value 0 is stored at all outputs.

9 - 16 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Derivator DER

Summary DER (DERivator) is used to give derivation 1

DER
I O 10
effect. The derivation effect can be limited 2 K O = HL 11
with the filter function, which serves as a 3 TD O = LL 12
low pass filter. 4 TF ERR 13
The output signal can be limited with limit 5 RDER

values specified at special inputs. 6 BAL

7 BALREF
The balancing function permits the output OHL
8
signal to track an external reference and 9 OLL
permits a bumpless return to the normal
function.
Figure 1.
All transfers from static states are
bumpless.

Call DER

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for actual value.
2 K IR Input for setting gain.
3 TD ITR Time Derivation. Input for time constant for
derivation.
4 TF ITR Time Filter. Input for filter time constant.
5 RDER IB Rset DERivator. Input for clearing derivator.
6 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking.
7 BALR IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference
EF value when tracking.
8 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value.
9 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value.
10 O OR Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output reaches to the upper limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output=Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output reaches the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set to 1 if OHL is less
than OLL.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 17

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function The step response in the

K
TD
time plane for a derivator TF
is: O(t) = K (TD/TF)e -VTF
x I(t) where I(t) specifies
the magnitude of the
step. t
The transfer function for TF

a DER function is: G(s) = Figure 2. Step Response.

K(s x TD)/(1 + s x TF)
This has been implemented in the DER element as a recursive
algorithm. The design of the algorithm is such that normal functioning
is maintained even during limiting. This ensures a controlled return to
a dynamic state.
IgIGI
Gain, Derivation-, Certain constants are
Filter- and precalculated to make TD
K
the execution time of
Sampling Time TF
the element as short as
possible. The results
are stored internally in
the element. These Igω
constants are 1
recalculated if TD, TF or TF

K are changed by more

than 1/128 of their previous value, or if the sampling time TS is
changed. When recalculating a test is performed to check whether
TD and TF ≥ 2 x TS. If not,
TD and/or TF are equal to 2
x TS. G
Clearing of the
Derivator Both the output O(t) and + 90
the internal state of the
+ 45
output are cleared when
RDER goes to 1. Ig ω
1
Tracking If BAL is set to 1, the TF
derivator immediately goes
Figure 3. Bode Diagram.
into tracking and the output
O is set to the value of the
input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal
limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. Return to
dynamic state is bumpless.

9 - 18 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Limitation The limitation function

Function limits the output signal to
the values at the inputs
OHL for upper limit and OHL
OLL for the lower limit. If
the actual value exceeds
the upper limit, the output t
O = HL is set to 1. If it falls
below the lower limit, the Figure 4. Function in a Limiting State.
output O = LL is set to 1.
The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the
lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the
error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the
values they had in the sample before the error occurred. After an
error, the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, such as in the case
of tracking above.

7 OHL
8 O LL

ACT
O 10
5 BA L
ACT
6 B A LR E F
I1 0 = H L 11
I1 > I2
1 DER I2
I
2 I1 O = LI 12
K I1 < I2
3 I2
TD
4 TF t I1 E R R 13
I1 < I2
I2
5 RDER RESET

1 PRES ET
ACT

Figure 5. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 19

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Divider DIV

Summary DIV is used for division of two integers or real 1 DIV 20

numbers. When dividing integers, the quotient is 2 REM 21
obtained with the remainder at a separate input.
Figure 1.
Call DIV (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IC1 Input for dividend.
2 - IC1 Input for divisor.
20 - OC1 Output for quotient.
21 REM OC1 REMainder. Output for remainder. Applies only
with division of integers.

Function The value at input 1 is divided by the value at input 2. The quotient is
stored at output 20. When dividing integers, the remainder is stored
at the output REM.

Overflow If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the output
is limited to the highest or lowest allowed value for the data type.

9 - 20 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Divider DIV-MR

Summary DIVider with Multiplier Real numbers is used 1

...
DIV-MR
.
X 40
for the division of two products of real .
C1
numbers. 21
... X
Call DIV-MR (C1,C2) 20+C2

Call Parameters Table 1. Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the first 1...19
multiplication element.
C2 Number of inputs in the second 1...19
multiplication element.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IR Factor for the dividend.
2 - IR Factor for the dividend.
.
.
.
C1 - IR Factor for the dividend.
21 - IR Factor for the divisor.
22 - IR Factor for the divisor.
.
.
.
20+C2 - IR Factor for the divisor.
40 - OB Output for quotient.

Function The product of the real numbers at the inputs 1...3C1 is divided by
the product of the real values at the inputs 21...20+C2. The quotient
is stored at the output 40.

If the maximum positive or negative real numbers is exceeded, the

Owerflow output is limited to the greatest or lowest representable value
respectively.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 21

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Error Detection ERROR

Summary The ERROR PC element is used to write Error

FI
ERROR
LOGNR ERR 10
events into the Event Logger. The Error events
1 I
are created by the ERROR element that works
together with the PC element that generates the
ERRC (Error Code) output signal. Figure 1.

Call ERROR

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 LOGNR II The NumbeR of the Event 1...8
LOGger to be used.
1 I II Dynamic Input for the error
code.
10 ERR OB ERRor

Function All PC elements with an ERRC output terminal generate error codes
in the case of a malfunction. The structure of an error code is 100*
group + number. The group indicates the origin of the fault. The 2-
digit number is a group specific code.

In order to record those errors into the Event logger the ERRC output
of the given PC element has to be connected to the input I of an
ERROR element.
When the ERROR element detects ERRC value change to a non-
zero value then it reads the current date and time and writes this
information along with the descriptive text string (see below) into the
event logger as a new event.

The group code is automatically converted to a descriptive text in

English by the ERROR element. If no text is defined for the group
(inside the ERROR element) then the text “ERROR nnnnn” is used.

The ERRC terminal of a element can generate a sequence of error

codes. Each error code creates a new event but the reappearrance of
an error code in the same sequence is ignored (error code 0 at
ERRC starts a new sequence of ERROR events).

9 - 22 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and

/ or Panel equipments. The simple panel display uses the following
presentation form.
DRIVE LINK 3 ERR 32
1998 01 08 11:25:31 ,0571

Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions

exists:
• function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8
• logger (LOGNR) does not exist
• logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the
CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0

Related Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, EVENT, EVT and EVBUG.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 23

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Event Logger Debug EVBUG

Summary EVBUG element can be used to diagnose

F1
EVBUG
LOGNR ERR 10
event loggers. The input terminals are used to
1 ENABLE FIRST 11
select an event and to acknowledge the 2 CNTRL LAST 12
selected event. The output terminals are used
to monitor the state of the event logger and to 21 RECNR TEXT 31

read the content of the selected event. 22 > ACK TIME 32

CODE 33

Call EVBUG ESTAT

ERRC
34
99

Connections Table 1.
Figure 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 LOGNR II The NumbeR of the Event 1...8
LOGger to be used.
1 ENABLE IB ENABLE the element. 1 = true
2 CNTRL II Operation CoNTRoL See table 2
10 ERR OB ERRor 1 = true
11 FIRST OI Record number of the oldest 1...RECMAX
event.
12 LAST OI Record number of the newest 1...RECMAX
event.
21 RECNR II RECord NumbeR 1...RECMAX
22 ACK IB ACKnowledge the selected 0=>1 = true
event.
31 TEXT OA20 TEXT of the selected event.
32 TIME OT TIME of the selected event.
33 CODE OI CODE of the selected event.
34 ESTAT OI Status of the selected event. See table 3.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code See table 4.

Bits of the CNTRL Table 2.

Terminal Bit # Description

Bits of the ESTAT Table 3.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 Event is acknowledged
1 Event is ON

9 - 24 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Event Logger Event logger writes events into consecutive record locations of the
logger in a cyclic manner. It means that after filling the last location
Operation (its number = the value of the RECMAX terminal of the corresponding
EVTLOG element) in the logger it moves back to the first location.

A new event can be written in only if the next record location is empty
or acknowledged or if the OWR (= overwrite permission ) bit of the
CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 1.

An event record contains event's type, code, date, time and a

descriptive text (max 20 characters).

Use of Event The FIRST and LAST output terminals mark the logger area that
contains unacknowledged events. Once a new event has been
Logger Debug
written in, its record number will be the new value of the LAST
terminal.

If a record in the logger (between FIRST and LAST) is acknowledged

then all older events up to the FIRST event are acknowledged, too.
The new value of the FIRST terminal will be the oldest
unacknowledged record number.

If all events in the logger are acknowledged then value of the

terminals FIRST and LAST = record number of the last
(acknowledged) event. If the logger is empty then the value of these
terminals = RECMAX.

The TIME is read from a system clock and represents the number of
the 100 us ticks since midnight.

The DATE represents the number of days since the new year 1980.

Error Handling In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output
indicates the applicable error code (see table 4).

Error Codes Error code = 10000+logger_number (1...8)*100+error_numbers

(ERRC) Table 4.
Error # Description
0 Function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8.
1 This logger does not exist.
2 Invalid record number (RECNR)
4 This record is empty.
5 This logger does not exist.
14 Two simultaneous attempts to acknowledge an event.

Related Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVENT and EVT.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 25

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

EVENT Detection EVENT

EVENT
Summary The EVENT element is used to detect boolean FI LOGNR ERR 10
events and to write the event name and event 1 I
time into the selected event logger. 2 TEXT

Call EVENT Figure 1.

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 LOGNR II The NumbeR of the Event LOGger 1...8
to be used.
1 I IB Control Input for event recording.
2 TEXT IA20 Event description TEXT.
10 ERR OB ERRor

Function The 0→1 input (I) signal transition signifies event occurrence.
The 1→0 input (I) signal transition signifies event disappearance.

Event occurrence causes the EVENT element to read the current

date and time and write this information along with the descriptive
text string (from the TEXT input) into the event logger as a new
event. The status of this event is set to "ON".

Event disappearance causes the EVENT element to set the event

status to "OFF" in the event created during the previous event
occurence.

Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and

/or Panel equipments.

The simple panel display may use e.g. the following presentation
form:
CONTACTOR FAILURE
1998 01 08 11:25:31,0571

9 - 26 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions

exists:
• function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8
• logger (LOGNR) does not exist
• logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the
CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0.

Related Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVT and EVBUG.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 27

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Change Event Priority EVPRTY

EVPRTY (2)
Summary EVPRTY PC element provides means for F=50-F1 REFCYCLE OLDPRI 2
changing the priority of an event driven 1 EVPRI NEWPRI 3
CONTRM. (By default such tasks have ERRC 10
higher priority than any cyclic task.)
Figure 1.
Call EVPRTY (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Event identification. 1 = digital input from NCB board,
2 = CDP from AF100

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 REFCYCLE II REFerence CYCLE time. (0...10000 ms)
1 EVPRI II Original event priority.
2 OLDPRI OI Original event priority.
3 NEWPRI OI NEW PRIority (after the
change)
10 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

Function EVPRTY can be used for lowering the task priority down to lower
level than the cyclic tasks of given reference cycle time REFCYCLE.
It is not necessary to have any CONTRMs exactly with that cycle
time. All CONTRMs with shorter cycle time will have higher priority
and all with longer cycle time will have lower priority. The new priority
after the change can be read from pin NEWPRI and original “event
priority” from pin OLDPRI.

The original high priority can be also restored with an other instance
EVPRTY. Then REFCYCLE must be = 0, and input pin EVPRI must
be connected to output pin OLDPRI of the first EVPRTY instance.
Such arrangement is planned / recommended for those cases, where
the first actions within the tasks are time critical, but most of the
actions are not. In such a case the event driven CONTRM should
contain
• first the “real time critical” PC elements,
• then EVPRTY, which lowers the priority
• then the other PC elements
• and finally EVPRTY which restores the original high priority.

9 - 28 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Error Codes Table 3.

Error # Description
1001 Illegal event identifier (= no such event driven CONTRM
cannot exist or does not exist).
1002 Illegal cycle time (= illegal value in REFCYCLE pin, must be
>=2 and <=20000. (or ==0)
1003 Illegal parameter (= should never occur, because such is an
internal error between EVPRTY and the base system software.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 29

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Event Detection EVT

EVT
Summary EVT element is used to detect boolean events F1 LOGNR ERR 10
and to write the event name and event time into 1 I O 11
the selected event logger. 2 TEXT
3 ACK

Call EVT
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 LOGNR II The NumbeR of the Event 1...8
LOGger to be used.
1 I IB Control Input for event
recording.
2 TEXT IA20 Event description TEXT. max 20
char
3 ACK B Event ACKnowledgement 0=>1 = true
10 ERR OB ERRor 1 = true
11 O OB Copy of the input pin 1.

Function The 0→1 input (I) signal transition signifies event occurrence.
The 1→0 input (I) signal transition signifies event disappearance.

Event occurrence causes the EVT element to read the current date
and time and write this information along with the descriptive text
string into the event logger as a new event. The descriptive text string
is plus (+) character and the first 19 characters from the text in the
TEXT input.

Event disappearance causes a new event to be written into the

event logger like during the event occurance (see above) but minus
(-) character is used instead of the plus character.

Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and

/or Panel equipments.

The simple panel display may use eg the following presentation form:
+CONTACTOR FAILURE
1998 01 08 11:25:31,0571

The 0→1 ACK signal transition acknowledges the last event created
by this element (and all older unacknowledged events, if any).

9 - 30 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions

exists:
• function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8
• logger (LOGNR) does not exist
• logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the
CNTRL input
• of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0
• two simultaneous attempts to acknowledge an event (0→1 ACK
signal transition).

Related Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVENT and

EVBUG.
Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 31

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Event Logger EVTLOG

EVTLOG
Summary EVTLOG element is used to create and F1 LOGNR
manage an event logger. Up to 8 such F2 RECMAX
loggers (numbered respectively from 1...8) F3 NOTCLEAR
can be declared. The EVENT, EVT and 1 ENABLE ERR 10
2 CNTRL STAT 11
ERROR PC elements are used to source
RECCNT 12
different classes of events that can be written ERRC 99
into the event logger. The event logger can be
accessed by PC Tool services and special Figure 1.
panel PC elements.

Call EVTLOG

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 LOGNR II Event LOGger NumbeR 1...8
F2 RECMAX II MAXimum number of event
RECords.
F3 NOTCLEAR IB During system start: 1=>0 = true
0= Clear to logger
1= Do not clear the logger
On-line change:
Clear to logger
(note: the direction 1=>0)
1 ENABLE IB ENABLE recording of new 0=>1 = true
events.
2 CNTRL II Operation CoNTRoL 1 = true
10 ERR OB ERRor 1 = true
11 STAT OI Logger STATus see Table 3
12 RECCNT OI Current event RECord CouNT 0...RECMAX
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code

Bits of the CNTRL Table 2.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 OWR (permission to overwrite unacknowledged event records)

9 - 32 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Bits of the STAT Table 3.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 Un acknowledged event(s) in the logger.
1 Logger in RUN state
2 Logger in OVERWRITE mode
3 Logger is full

Event Logger EVTLOG writes events into consecutive record locations of the logger
in a cyclic manner. It means that after filling the last location (=
Operation RECMAX) in the logger it moves back to the first location.

A new event can be written in only if the next record location is empty
or acknowledged or if the OWR (= overwrite permission ) bit of the
CNTRL input is set to 1.

An Event Record contains event's type, status, code, date, time and
a descriptive text (max 20 characters).

The following event types can be recorded in the event logger:

• Event; sourced by EVENT and EVT PC elements
• Error; sourced by ERROR PC element
• System error; sourced by the AC80 system software.

Use of Event Event logger(s) in the application program are used by the application
program, the PC Tool, and the (operator or door) panels. There
Loggers
should be only one main user for each event logger. The main user of
a logger can control the operation of the logger. Other users should
only read the contents of the logger.

Logger control means:

• running and stopping logger operation
• clearing of the whole logger
• enabling/disabling the overwriting of unacknowledged records
• acknowledgment of records

Error Handling In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output
indicates the applicable error code (see Table 4).

Error Codes Error code = 10000 + logger_number (1...8) * 100 + error_number

(see below)
(ERRC)

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 33

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 4.
Bit # Description
0 Function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8
11 Function parameter F2 (RECMAX) is too big.
16 Multiple EVTLOG elements use the same LOGNR.

Related Descriptions of PC elements ERROR, EVENT, EVT and EVBUG.

Documents

9 - 34 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Queue Register FIFO

Summary The queue register FIFO (First FIFO

(C1,C2,C3)
In First Out) can be used store 1 IN FULL 8
data to be used later and 2 > OUT OCC 9
irrespective The queue register 3 R EMPTY 10
FIFO (First In First Out) can be
11 I1 01 12
used store data to be used later
21 I2 02 22
and irrespective of when the
data was stored. The different 10xC2+1 IC2 0C2 10xC2+2
queues in the element work in
parallel, i.e. reading in, reading
out, etc. are performed at the
same time in all of the queues.
Figure 1.
Data may be of the types
integer, real number, Boolean or time. A maximum of 9 queues, each
with a maximum of 64 queue places, can be selected.

Call FIFO (C1,C2,C3)

Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B,I,IL,R,T,TR
C2 Number of queues 1...9
C3 Number of queues places 2...64
in each queue.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IN IB Dynamic INput for entering of data in the
queues. Data is read from the inputs 11 to
IC2.
2 >OUT IB Dynamic input for reading data from the
queues.
3 R IB Reset. Input which clears the queue
register and prevents all further entry.
8 FULL OB Output which is set when the queue
register is FULL.
9 OCC OI OCCupied. Output which specifies how
many queue places are occupied.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 35

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
10 EMPTY OB Output which is set when the queue
register is EMPTY.
11 I1 IC1 Input 1. Input data to queue no. 1.
12 O1 OC1 Output 1. Output data from queue no. 1
21 I2 IC1 Input 2. Input data to queue no. 2.
22 O2 OC1 Output 2. Output data from queue no. 2.
.
.
10x0C2+1 IC2 IC1 Input C2. Input data to queue no. C2.
10xC2+2 OC2 OC1 Output C2. Output data from queue no. C2.

Function Each queue has a data input I. It is used to enter data at the end of
the queue. Each queue has a data output O. Data from place 1 in
each queue is continuously available at the outputsO1 to OC2. If both
dynamic inputs (IN and OUT) are set during the same program cycle,
data entry is performed first and then the output is read.

Entry of Data Data at the I inputs are placed last in the queues when input IN is set.
When the queue register is empty, data is stored at queue place 1,
then at queue place 2, etc.

Output of Data When input OUT goes to 1, data at each occupied place in all queues
are moved forward one place. Data that occupied queue place 2 now
occupies queue place 1, and can be read at outputs O1 to OC2. The
value 0 is entered at the previous last occupied place.

Clearing of the When the input R is set, the complete contents the queues are
cleared. All further entry is blocked.
Complete Register
Supervision The number of occupied queue places is indicated continously by the
output OCC. When the queue register is full, the output FULL is set
and when the queue register is empty, the output EMPTY, the output
EMPTY is set.

9 - 36 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

FIFO

1 8
> IN FULL
2 9
> OUT OCC
3 10
R EMPTY

11 I1 O1 12

21 I2 O2 22

Queue 31 I3 O3 32 Queue
inputs outputs

10 x C2 + 1 IC2 OC2 10 x C2 + 2

C3 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Queue place

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 37

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Filter FILT-1P

Summary FILT-1P (FILTer-1Pole) is used as a single

1
FILT-1P
I O 10
pole low-pass filter. The outputs signal can be 2 K O = HL 11
limited with limit values specified at special 3 T1 O = LL 12
inputs. The balancing function permits the 4 BAL ERR 13
output signal to track an external reference 5 BALREF

and permits a bumpless return to the normal 6 OHL

7 OLL
function. All transfer from static states are
bumpless.
t

Call FILT-1P Figure 1.

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for actual value.
2 K IR Input for setting gain.
3 T1 ITR Time 1. Input for filter time constant.
4 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking.
5 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when tracking.
6 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value.
7 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value.
10 O OR Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output O reaches the upper limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output O reaches the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.

Function The step response in the time plane for a

single low-pass filter s O(t) = I(t) K (1-e K
sT1). The transfer function for a single pole

low pass filter is G(s) = K(1/(1+sT1)). This t

has been implemented in the FILT-1P T1

element as a recursive algorithm. Figure 2. Step

Response
Gain, FilterTime Certain constants are precalculated to
make the execution time of the element as short as possible. The
and Sampling Time
result is stored internally in the element. These constants are
recalculated if T1 or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their
previous value, or if the sampling time TS is changed. When
recalculating, a test is performed to check if T1 >2xTS. If not, T1 is
set equal to 2xTS.

9 - 38 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Tracking If BAL is set to 1, the filter IgIGI

immediately goes into tracking and IgK
the output O is set to the value of
the input BALREF. If the value at
BALREF exceeds the output signal
limits, the output is set to the Ig ω
applicable limit value. Return to 1
dynamic state is bumpless. T1

G
Limitation Function The limitation function limits the
Ig ω
output signal to the limit values at 45••
the inputs OHL for upper limit value
-90
and OLL for the lower limit value. If
the actual value exceeds the upper Figure 3. Bode Diagram
limit value, the output O = HL is set
to 1. If it falls below the lower limit
value, the output O = LL is set to 1.

When the limitation status has been detected, a check is made each
time the element is executed to determine whether K x I(t) exceeds
the output signal limitations. If so, the limitation status remains. If not,
the calculation of the output signal is performed by the algorithm in
the normal way. Return from limitation to a dynamic state is
bumpless. The element checks that the upper limit value the is
greater that the lower limit value OLL. if not, the output ERR is set to
1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O
retain the values they had in the sample before the error occurred.
After an error the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, in the same
way as in the case of tracking above.

7 OHL
8 OLL

I1
I1 < I2 1 &
I2

I1 1
I1 < I2 ACT
I2 O 10
4 BA L
ACT
5 B A LR E F
I1 O =H L 11
I1 > I2
I2
I1 O = LI 1 2
I1 < I2
I2

I1 ERR 13
ACT I1 < I2
I2
X
1 I F I LT -1 P
2 K
3 TI
t

1
P re se t

Figure 4. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 39

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Filter Integer FILTI

Summary The FILTer Integer element is used as a 1

FILTI
I O 10
single pole low pass filter for long integer 2 T1
values.
Figure 1.
Call FILTI

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
1 I IIL Input. Input for actual value.
2 T1 IIL Filter Time constant. 0...8388607 (ms)
10 O OIL Output. Filtered actual value.

Function The step response in the time plane for a single low pass filter is:
O(t) = I(t)(1 - e-t/T1)

The transfer function for a single low pass filter is:

G(s) = 1/(1 + sT 1)

The filtering algorithm is calculated using the following formula:

I + (T1 TS) × O n −1
O=
T1 TS+ 1

Where TS is the cycle time of the program in milliseconds and On−1 is

the output from the previous execution cycle. If T1<TS then the
output value O is set to the input value I. The internal calculation of
the algorithm is done with 48-bit accuracy to avoid offset errors.

9 - 40 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function Header FUNCM

Summary The FUNCM (FUNCtion Module) is used FUNCM

for structuring of the PC program.

Call FUNCM Figure 1.

Function The purpose of FUNCM is to control the arrangement of the

documentation. The element does not affect the execution. A function
module can be used to provide a subdivision of a PC program, a
control module or a slave module in several functionally associated
parts. A function module can itself contain a control module or a new
function module.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 41

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function Generator FUNG-1V

Summary FUNG-1V (FUNtion Generator 1 Variable) is

1
FUNG-1V (C1)
X Y 10
used for generation of an optional function 2 BAL ERR 11
of one variable, y = f(x). The function is 3 BALREF BALREFO 12
described by a number of co-ordinates. 4 XTAB
Linear interpolation is used for values 5 YTAB
Y

between these co-ordinates. A maximum of

255 co-ordinates can be specified.
X

Figure 1.
Call FUNG-1V (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of co-ordinates which 2...255
describe the function.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 X IR X-value. Input for X-value.
2 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of balancing.
3 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Value which the Y-
output is to adopt with balancing.
4 XTAB IGC1R X TABle. Group data for the X-table with C1
values.
5 YTAB IGC1R Y TABle. Group data for the Y-table with C1
values.
10 Y OR Y-value. Output for Y-value.
11 ERR OB ERRor. Output set (to 1) if X outside the value
of XTAB or if Y, on balancing, is outside the
YTAB values.
12 BALREFO OR BALance REFerence Output. Output for
calculated X-value with balancing.

9 - 42 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

Function The function generator FUNG-1V for one variable calculates an

output signal Y for a value at the input X. The calculation is
performed in accordance with a piece by piece linear function which
is determined by the vectors XTAB and YTAB. For each X-value in
the XTAB, there is a corresponding Y-value in the YTAB. The Y-value
at the output is calculated by means of linear interpolation between
the XTAB values, between which lies the value of input X is. The
values in XTAB must increase from low to high serial numbers in the
table.

Interpolation The function generated is performed as follows:

y = Yk+(X-Xk)(Yk+1-Yk)/(Xk+1-Xk)

Balancing If BAL is set to 1, the value at Y is set to the value of the input
BALREF. The X-value which corresponds to this Y-value is obtained
at the output BALREFO. On balancing, the X-value is calculated by
interpolation in the same way the Y-value is calculated during normal
operation. To permit the balancing, the values in YTAB must increase
from low to high serial numbers in the table.

If the input signal X is outside the range defined by XTAB, the ERR
Error Signal output is set to 1. The Y-value is then set to the highest or lowest
value in YTAB. ERR is also set to 1 if BALREF is outside the YTAB
value range when BAL is set to 1. The value at Y is then set to the
value at the input BALREF and BALREFO is set to the highest or
lowest value in XTAB.

Yc1

Yk+1
Y
Yk
Y2
Y1

X1 X 2 Xk Xk+1 Xc1 X
X

Figure 2. Example of a Function.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 9 - 43

 Chapter 9 - PC Element Descriptions

9 - 44 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Chapter 10 - PC ELEMENTS from I to P

Two Integer to Integer Long Conversion IIL

Summary IIL PC element is used to pack two Integer values to 1

IIL
L O 10
an Integer long value.
2 H

Call IIL
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 L II Input for the 16 less significant bits of the Integer
Long output.
2 H II Input for the 16 most significant bits of the Integer
long output.
10 O OIL Integer long Output.

Function The IIL PC element ignores the sign of the Integer Inputs. The
element simply writes the L input to the 16 less significant bits and
the H to the 16 most significant bits to the Integer long output O.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 1

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Integer Long to two Integer Conversion ILI

Summary ILI PC element is used to unpack an Integer long

1
ILI
I L 11
value to two Integer values.
H 12

Call ILI
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I ILI Integer long input.
11 L II Output for the 16 less significant bits of the Integer
Long input.
12 H II Output for the 16 most significant bits of the
Integer long input.

Function The ILI PC element ignores the sign of the Integer outputs. The
element simply writes to the L output the 16 less significant bits and
to the H output the 16 most significant bits of the Integer long input I.

10 - 2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Integrator INT

Summary The INT (INTegrator) is used to give an INT

integration effect. The output signal can be 1 I O 10
2 K O=HL 11
limited with limit values. The balancing
3 TI O=LL 12
function permits the output signal to track an 4 RINT ERR 13
external reference and gives a smooth 5 BAL
return to the normal operation. 6 BALREF
7 OHL
8 OLL

Figure 1.
Call INT

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for actual value.
2 K IR Input for setting gain.
3 TI ITR Time Integration. Input for time constant for
integration.
4 RINT IB Reset INTegrator. Input for clearing integrator.
5 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking.
6 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when tracking.
7 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value.
8 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value.
10 O OR Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output reaches to the higher limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output reaches to the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.

Function The INT function can be written in the time K

plane as:

O(t) = K/TI( ò I(t)dt)

TI t

The main property controlled is that the Figure 2. Step

output signal retains its value when the Response
input signal I(t) = 0.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 3

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The step response in the time plane is:

O(t) = k*I(t)*t/T1.

The transfer function for an integrator is:

G(s) = K(1/sTI).

Gain, Integration The constant K*TS/TI is precalculated IgIGI

Time Constant to reduce the execution time of the

element. The result is stored internally lg K
and Sampling TI
in the element. This constant is
Time recalculated if TI or K are changed from
their previous values, or if the cycle K lgω
TI
time TS is changed. When ∠G
recalculating, a test is performed to lgω
- 45°
check whether TS/TI < 1.TS/TI is
- 90°
otherwise set to 1.
Figure 3. Bode Diagram
Clearing of The integrator is cleared when RINT
Integrator goes to 1.

Tracking If BAL is set to 1, the integrator immediately goes into tracking mode
and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value
at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the
applicable limit value. On return to normal operation from tracking
mode, the value of the output O is maintained for one cycle, after
which integration will continue from this value.

10 - 4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Limitation The output value is limited between OHL and OLL. If the actual value
Function exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below
the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. The element checks that
the value OHL is greater than the value OLL. If not, the output ERR is
set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL
and O retain the values they had before the error occurred. After the
limitation or error status has ceased, normal integration will continue
using the old value.

7 OHL
8 OLL

ACT
O 10
4 BAL ACT
5 BALREF
I1 O =HL 11
I1 > I2
I2

I1 O = LI 12
I1 < I2
I2
I1 ERR 13
I1 < I2
I2

1 I INT
2 K
3 TI
t

4 RINT Reset

Figure 4. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 5

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Inverter INV

Summary The INV is used for inverting Boolean variables. The 1 1 5

INV is used particularly when reading signals to the
data base. Figure 1.

Call INV

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input.
5 - OB Output of the inverted input value.

Function The output signal from the INV element is set (to 1) if the input signal
to the element is 0, and reset (to 0) when the input signal is 1. See
the truth table below.

Table 2. Truth table of INV

1 5

1 0

0 1

10 - 6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Absolute Read from Dual Port Memory IOBUSRD

IOBUSRD
Summary IOBUSRD PC element makes possible to (2,3,0,0)
F=1-F1
read contents of Dual Port Memory of NCB- BOARD ERR 10
F=0-F2 SPEC
board. However the user must give the
1 EN
absolute addresses of the interesting
locations. It is intended for debugging new 11 AIB1 IB1 51
NCB specific PC elements and functions 12 AIB2 IB2 52
21 AI1 I1 61
during their development phase. (But it could
22 AI2 I2 62
be used for some special purposes as well.
23 AI3 I3 63
E.g. when used together with IOBUSWR for
HW testing DPM itself.) IOBUSRD is available Figure 1.
only if you have enabled “Toolbox option” of
AC80.

Call IOBUSRD (C1,C2,C3,C4)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of individual bytes to be read. (0...10)
C2 Number of individual words to be read (0...10)
C3 Not used (relict from PC element of
APC with same name).
C4 Not used (relict from PC element of
APC with same name).

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values

F1 BOARD II No meaning
F2 SPEC II No meaning
1 EN IB ENable
11 AIB1 II Address offset of first data byte.
.
.
.
10+C1 AIBC1 II Address offset of last data byte.
21 AI1 II Address offset of first data word.
.
.
.
20+C2 AIC2 II Address offset of last data word.
51 IB1 OI First red data byte.
.
.
.
50+C1 IBC1 OI Last red data byte.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 7

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values

61 I1 OI First red data word.

.
.
.
60+C1 IC2 OI Last red data word.
10 ERR OB ERRor

Function The PC element reads the values from specified DPM locations to
respective output pins. The values can be either words (=16 bits) or
bytes (=8 bits), but in both cases the respective output pins of
IOBUSRD are type (I) i.e.16 bits wide.

The addresses of bytes in pins AIB... (and of words in pins AI...) are
interpreted as offsets from the beginning of Dual Port Memory. The
user does not need to know the base address of DPM.

Remember however, that

• the offsets are byte offsets: difference of addresses between
successive words is 2
• the offsets must be entered as decimal value.

In other words you typically must convert a DPM address, which you
get from NCB software listings according following rules:

• subtract the base address of DPM of NCB side (=0x2000)

• multiply the result by 2
• convert the result to decimal representation.

The ERR output is set only if the NCB board is completely missing
(and there is no DPM available). In other words, the offset values in
input pins of IOBUSRD may refer “over DPM area”, but such an error
is not detected by the PC element .

10 - 8 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Absolute Write into Dual Port Memory IOBUSWR

IOBUSWR
Summary IOBUSWR PC element makes it possible to (2,3,0,0)
F=1-F1
write data into absolute addresses of Dual BOARD ERR 10
F=0-F2 SPEC
Port Memory of NCB board. It is intended for
1 EN
debugging new NCB specific PC elements
and functions during their development phase. 11 AIB1

(it could be used for some special purposes 12 AIB2

21 AI1
as well e.g. when used together with
22 AI2
IOBUSRD for HW testing DPM itself.)
23 AI3
IOBUSWR is available only if you have 51 IB1
enabled “Toolbox option” of AC80. 52 IB2
61 I1
62 I2
63 I3

Call IOBUSWR (C1,C2,C3,C4)

Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of individual bytes to be (0...10)
written.
C2 Number of individual words to be (0...10)
written.
C3 Not used (relic from PC element of
APC with same name).
C4 Not used (relic from PC element of
APC with same name).

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values

F1 BOARD II No meaning
F2 SPEC II No meaning
1 EN IB ENable
11 AIB1 II Address offset of first data byte.
.
.
.
10+C1 AIBC1 II Address offset of last data byte.
21 AI1 II Address offset of first data word.
.
.
.
20+C2 AIC2 II Address offset of last data word.
51 IB1 OI First data byte to be written.
.
.
.
50+C1 IBC1 OI Last data word to be written.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 9

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values

61 I1 OI First data word to be written.

.
.
.
60+C1 IC2 OI Last data word to be written.
10 ERR OB ERRor

Function The PC element writes the specified data values from input pins into
specified DPM locations. The values can be either words (= 16 bits)
or bytes (= 8 bits), but in both cases the respective input pins of
IOBUSWR are type (I) i.e. 16 bits wide.

The addresses of bytes in pins AIB... (and of words in pins AI...) are
interpreted as offsets from the beginning of Dual Port Memory. The
user does not need to know the base address of DPM.

Remember however, that

• the offsets are byte offsets: difference of addresses between
successive words is 2
• the offsets must be entered as decimal values.

In other words you typically must convert a DPM address, which you
get from NCB software listings according following rules:
• subtract the base address of DPM of NCB side (=0x2000)
• multiply the result by 2
• convert the result to decimal representation.

The ERR output is set only if the NCB board is completely missing
(and there is no DPM available). In other words, the offset values in
input pins of IOBUSRD may refer “over DPM area”, but such an error
is not detected by the PC element .

10 - 10 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Transmit/Receive I/O Datasets IORX

IORX
Summary The IORX (Input/Output Receive Xmit) element is (C1,C2,C3)
used to transmit and/or receive datasets to/from F1 NODE ERR 4
an I/O device. 1 EN RDY 5
2 >RESET LINK 6
3 CNTRL

21 DS1
22 WR1
23 I11 O11 26
24 I12 O21 27
25 I31 O31 28
31 DS*C2
32 WR*C2
33 I1*C2 OI*C2 36
34 I2*C2 O2*C2 37
35 I3*C2 O3*C2 38

Call IORX (C1,C2,C3) ERRC 99

Figure 1.
Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Block number 1...8
C2 Number of datasets 1...2 (Note: 1 recommended for NDCS)
C3 Data type I,IL (Note: I only for NDSC)

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values

F1 NODE II NODE number of target device. 1...8

1 EN IB ENable the block. 0 or 1
2 RESET IB RESET the error code ERRC. 0 or 1
3 CNTRL II Operation CoNTRL
4 ERR OB ERRor in the FB or I/O link
operation.
5 RDY OB Data ReaDY. New valid data
received.
6 LINK OI Current status of the I/O LINK. see table 3
21 DS1 II DataSet number of the first 1...254
transmit dataset.
22 WR1 IB Enable the WRite of the first 0 or 1
transmit dataset.
23 I11 II First data Input of the first
transmit dataset.
24 I12 II Second data input of the first
transmit dataset.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 11

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values

25 I31 II Third data input of the first

transmit dataset (when C3=I).
26 O11 OI First data output of the first
received dataset.
27 O21 OI Second data output of the first
received dataset.
28 O31 OI Third data output of the first
received dataset (when C3=I).
31 DC*C2 II DataSet number of the last (C2) 1...254
transmit dataset.
32 WR*C2 IB Enable the WRite of the last (C2) 0 or 1
transmit dataset.
33 I1*C2 II First data input of the last (C2)
transmit dataset.
34 I2*C2 II Second data input of the last
(C2) transmit dataset.
35 I3*C2 II Third data input of the last (C2)
transmit dataset (when C3=I).
36 O1*C2 OI First data output of the last (C2)
received dataset.
37 O2*C2 OI Second data output of the last
(C2) received dataset.
38 O3*C2 OI Third data output of the last (C2)
received dataset (when C3=I).
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code see Table 4

Bits of the LINK Table 3.

Terminal Bit # Description
0 I/O link is OK.
1 I/O link is broken.
2 I/O link initialisation (by the NCB communication board) after startup
is not finished.
Note: The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of
16 bits.

Initialisation of the Before IORX PC elements can be executed you must declare and
initialise (with the DB element NCBIO) the communication links to the
I/O Communication
I/O-modules, that are used in the application program.
Links

10 - 12 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Use of a IORX The physical target device address of a IORX block is defined with
the function parameter NODE (the address of this target device is
Block also defined in the DB element NCBIO).

Call parameter C1 defines the identitity and type of this IORX block.
Each IORX instance with same NODE-parameter must have unique
value for C1 in range 1...8.

If C1 = 1, the IORX will be treated as “basic block”, and it is serviced

by NCB-board with higher priority (=higher frequency) than the other
IORX instances.

Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...2) of the transmit

datasets.

Call parameter C3 defines the type of input and output data used by
the function block:
• I: the 6 bytes of data are represented as 3 integers, each
consisting of two bytes
• IL: the 6 bytes of data are represented as 2 long integers, each
consisting of 3 bytes (the most significant byte of the long integer
is ignored and contains value 0 when read).

The inputs DS1...DS*C2 define the dataset numbers (1...254) of the

transmit datasets.

EN input pin = 0 causes bypassing of all activities of this block.

The values of the transmit datasets are in the I11...I3*C2 inputs. If the
WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 1 then the IORX block
transmits the values of this dataset to the target device and
automatically receives the values returned by the target (an IORX
block only starts this transmit/receive process during its execution
and the actual transmitting/receiving is done as a background
operation while the other blocks are executing). The MAFR code of
the transmitted DDCS message is set to 00h (ddcs_to_dset).
If the WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 0 then the IORX block
does not transmit the values of this dataset to the target device but
only receives the values returned by the target device. The MAFR
code of the transmitted DDCS message is set to 01h
(ddcs_from_dset).

The values of the received datasets are in the O11...O3*C2 outputs.

These values have been received from the target device after the
previous execution of the IORX block (they are not read from the
device during the current execution of this block).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 13

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the IORX
block is acknowledged by setting the RDY output to 1 for one
execution cycle of this block. This output is set to 0 if new valid
dataset values have not been received since the last execution of this
block (either the cycle time of this block is too short or the I/O-
communication link is invalid).

CNTRL input pin is used for specifying several variations or options of

the I/O-communication. I.e. it is value is interpreted as (groups of)
bits, whose values have influence on different things.

Table 4.
Bit# Value Description
0 0x1 This is a synchronizing IORX (only one such IORX is allowed
in whole application (this function is not implemented in current
NCB).
1 0x2 This I/O-module should cause interrupts (this option is possible
only for NODE=1).
2 0x4 If C3 = IL, the most significant byte of output data is filled
according bit #23 of received data.
3 0 Read dataset number is = given number +1 (= read and write
dataset indentifiers are alternating).
0x8 Read dataset number is = given number (= read and write
dataset indentifiers are overlapping).
4..5 0 If C3=IL, do not update 3rd. output pin at all.
0x10 If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 first bytes of read 6
bytes data.
0x20 If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 middle bytes of read
6 bytes data.
0x30 If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 last bytes of read 6
bytes data.

Error Handling In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output
indicates the applicable error code (see Table 4).

Errors are originated either from the execution of the IORX block
itself (error codes 70nn...78nn) or from the DB element NCBIO that
defines the target device of the IORX block (error codes 89nn).

The ERR output is set to 0 with the first successful response.

The ERRC output retains the code of the last occurred error. A 0->1
transition in the RESET input clears the ERRC output if the error
situation is no more in effect.

10 - 14 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Error Codes Table 5.

Error code = 7000 + error_number 34 (see below) or
Error code = 7000 + i/o_device_number (1...8) * 100 +
error_number (see below) or
Error code = 8900 + error_number (see below)

Error # Description
1 Invalid I/O device type definition (IOTYPE pin value in DB
element NCBIO).
4 The NCB communication board is missing.
5 Invalid NCB communication board.
8 The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB
communication board.
16 Initialization error in NCB communication board
31 Call parameter C1 is not in range 1...8
32 Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...2
33 I/O link timeout
34 I/O device address (NODE) is not in the range 1...8
35 DB element NCBIO does not exist in the application
38 NCBIO with same NODE and C1 definitions exists already
39 Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254
40...49 Communication error in NCB communication board

Related Description of DB element NCBIO.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 15

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Limiter LIM-N

LIM-N (C1,C2)
Summary LIM-N (LIMiter-1-of-N address) is used for 1 A1 AERR 10
limitation of integers, real numbers or time 2 A2T ERR 11
values. Several limit values can be C2 AC2

selected. I 22
21 O
31 HLA1 >HLA 40
32 HLA2 HLA 41

30+C2 HLAC2 <LLA 60

51 LLA1 LLA 61
52 LLA2

50+C2 LLAC2

Figure 1.
Call LIM-N (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I,IL,R,T,TR
C2 Number of optional limit values 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description

1 A1 IB Address 1. Input which, when set, limits the

output O to the limit values connected to the
inputs HLA1 and HLL1.
2 A2 IM Address 2. Input which, when set, limits the
output O to the limit values connected to the
inputs HLA2 and HLL2.
.
.
.
C2 AC2 IB Address C2. Input which, when set, limits the
output O to the limit values connected to the
inputs HLAC2 and LLAC2.
10 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set when 2 or
more of the inputs A1 to AC2 are set.
11 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set when the limit for
high level is less than limit for low level.
21 I IC1 Input. Input which is connected to the signal
being limited.
22 O OC1 Output. Output for the limited signal.

10 - 16 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description

31 HLA1 IC1 High Limit Address 1, Input for upper limit

value which limits the signal when the input
A1 is set.
32 HLA2 IC1 High Limit Address 2. Input for upper limit
value which limits the signal when the input
A2 is set.
.
.
.
30+C2 HLAC2 IC1 High Limit Address C2. Input for upper limit
value which limits the signal when the input
AC2 is set.
40 |>HLA OB Input >High Limit Address. Output which is
set when the upper limit of the element is
reached.
41 HLA OC1 High Limit Address. Output which specifies
the upper limit where limiting begins.
51 LLA1 IC1 Low Limit Address 1. Input for lower limit
value which limits the signal when the input
A1 is set.
52 LLA2 IC1 Low Limit Address 2. Input for lower limit
value which limits the signal when the input
A2 is set.
.
.
.
50+C2 LLAC2 IC1 Low Limit Address C2. Input for lower limit
value which limits the signal when the input
AC2 is set.
60 |<LLA OB Input < Low Limit Address. Output which is
set when the lower limit of the element is
reached.
61 LLA OC1 Ligh Limit Address. Output which specifies
the lower limit where limiting begins.

Function LIM-N is used to limit up to 9 different limits. Boolean output signals

are given when the output is limited.

Selection of Limit The limit value inputs HLA1 to HLAC2 or LLA1 to LLAC2 that will limit
the value at output O are selected with the inputs A1 to AC2. If the
Value
input A1 is 1, the output is limited by HLA1 and LLA1, if A2 is 1, the
output is limited by HLA2 and LLA2, etc. if none of the inputs A1 to
AC2 is 1, O is limited to the data value 0. If 2 or more of the inputs A1
to AC2 are set at the same time, the output is limited by the limit
values corresponding to the lowest numbered set input. The error
signal output AERR is set at the same time.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 17

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Limiting When the input I exceeds the selected limit, the output O is limited to
the limit value. One of the outputs |> HLA or |< LLA will then be set
depending on which limit was exceeded. The value of the current
limits for high and low level where limiting begins can be read at the
outputs HLA and LLA.

Supervision of The element checks that the limit value HLA is greater than the limit
LLA. If HLA is less than LLA, the error signal output ERR is set. The
Limit Values
output O and the limit value outputs |> HLA and |< HLL are retained
from the sample before the error status developed.

LIM-N

1 A1
2 A2 2 AERR 10
test

C2 AC2
COMP
I1 ERR 11
I1 > I2
AO I2
(0)
31 HLA1
COMP
32 HLA2 I1 I > HLA 40
I1 > I2
I2

30 + C2 HLAC2 HLA 41

AO
(0)
51 LLA1
COMP
I1
I < LLA 60
52 LLA2 I1 > I2
I2

50 + C2 LLAC2 LLA 61

21 I O 22

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

10 - 18 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Master Header MASTER

Summary The master header MASTER is used for the MASTER(C1,C2)

execution control of subordinate slave 1 ON RUN 5
2 SINGLE MODP 6
modules.
3 R

Figure 1.
Call MASTER (C1, C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Cycle time in ms Allowed values are between 1 ms
and 20000 ms in steps of 1 ms.
C2 Place in the cycle time 1...252: place in the cycle table,
table and/or cyclic activation.
scheduling strategy. 252: activation at initalization after
power up

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 ON IB Currently not used. Should be connected to
constant value 1.
2 SINGLE IB Currently not used. Should be connected to
constant value 0.
3 R IB Currently not used. Should be connected to
constant value 0
5 RUN OB Currently not used. Value is always zero.
6 MODP OB Currently not used. Value is always zero.

Function Master is a supervisory execution controlling element for a number of

slave modules. The parameter C1 specifies how often the master and
associated slave modules are executed, i.e the cycle time for the
modules. Parameter C2 is used to specify the execution order of
execution units with the same cycle time.

Normal Execution The order in which the subordinate slave modules are executed is
determined by their order in the documentation.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 19

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Maximum Selector MAX

Summary MAX (MAXimum selector) is used to MAX(C1,C2)

1 DEADB A 30
select the highest value of an optional
11 IA1 O 31
number of integers or real numbers. 12 IA2

10+C2 IAC2

Call MAX (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data Type I, IL, R
C2 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 DEADB IC1 DEADBand. Input for deadband.
11 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input which is compared
with the other inputs
12 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input which is compared
with the other inputs
.
.
.
10 + C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2 Input which is compared
with the other inputs
30 A OI Address. Output for the number of the input
having the highest value.
31 O OC1 Output. Output for the highest value.

Function The values at the inputs IA1 .. IAC2 are compared and the greatest
value is written to the output O. The number of the input with the
highest value is written to the output A. If the two highest signal
values are equal when the element is executed for the first time, the
signal with the lowest input number is treated as having the highest
output value.

10 - 20 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Deadband The deadband specified at the input DEADB is symmetrical around

the value of the highest input. The upper and lower deadband limits
are calculated from the value for the highest input in the preceding
execution cycle. To prevent rapid changes at the output A, the value
at A is retained until the value at the corresponding input is less than
the calculated lower deadband limit or until one of the other inputs
exceeds the upper deadband limit.

1 2 3 4

Signal 4 = highest
Sample n

2 4 1 3

Signal 4 is still
Sample n + 1 seen as highest
DEADB
2 4 1 3

Signal 3 = highest
Sample n + 2
DEADB
2 3 4 1

Signal 1 = highest
Sample n + 3
DEADB
2 1 3 4

Sample n + 4 Signal 1 is still

seen as highest
DEADB
2 1 3 4

Sample n + 5 Signal 1 is still

seen as highest
DEADB
2 3 4 1

Sample n + 6 Signal 1 = highest

DEADB

Figure 3. Example of Function with Deadban

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 21

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

DataSet Receiver for AF100 MB90REC

MB90REC
Summary A receiving function block, which is used to F1 IDENT ERR 10
receive cyclic dataset (=CDPs) from the F2 STATION
Advant Field Bus AF100 (old name of the 1 ACT RDY 11
bus was sometimes MB90, that is I1 21
explanation for the name). Data types I... 20+...
within the packet are indicated by the call I*C1 20+C1
parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and IL1 51
IL...
should equal the call parameters of the 50+...
IL*C2 50+C2
respective transmitting MB90TRA PC
R1 71
element (or DSP DB element if the R... 70+...
transmitting station is not APC or AC80). RC3 70+C3
MB90REC element should be always ERRC 99
accompanied with respective DSP in DB
part of the application (in order to specify
Figure 1.
assumed CDP transfer interval and to
enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to
summarize various CDPs in each station). The MB90REC PC
element can be used to trigger execution of event driven task
CONTRM (2,255,0). The main (and only) difference of MB90REC
and AFREC is in the way, they deal with short integer data. (see
below)

Call MB90REC (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of I values. 0...16
C2 Number of IL values. 0...8
C3 Number of R values. 0...8
Where: 0
C 1  2  C 2  2  C 3  16

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 IDENT II Dataset IDENTity number. 1...50
F2 STATION II Node number of the sender. 1...79
1 ACT IB Input. ACTivates dataset 1 = active
reception.

10 - 22 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
10 ERR OB Communication ERRor.
11 RDY OB Output data has been
updated
21 I1 OI Output. I value number 1.
.
.
.
20+C1 IC1 OI Output. I value number C1.
51 IL1 OIL Output. IL value number 1.
.
.
50+C2 ILC2 OIL Output. IL value number
C2.
71 R1 OR Output. R value number 1.
.
.
.
70+C3 RC3 OR Output. R value number C1.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code. see Table 3.

Error Codes Table 3.

Error # Description
Communication startup errors:
3002 Bus coupler self-test failed.
3003 Not enough memory available in system-RWM.
3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB-element.
3005 Station address in the hardware is not equal to the STNNO
value of PM825 AF100 part.
3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the
same AC80).
3102 STATION value is equal to the address defined in the PM825
STNNO. (=impossible to receive from itself)
3103 Illegal IDENT.
3104 Illegal length of CDP.
3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified
3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part
3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length
3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction
3201 Too many CDPs used in this station.
3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP
configuration.
Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up):
3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA.
3403 No response to address frame from the data source station.
3501 CRC-error (data frame corrupted during transfer, or two stations
responded to same address frame).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 23

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 3 continued
Error # Description
When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error
code (above) are translated to texts:
3000...3099 MB90 START FAILED
3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ.
3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL)
3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL
3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE

Function Upon initialization the MB90REC function block:

• checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus
coupler
• checks the working condition of the bus coupler
• checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters
• checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application
• allocates a communication port for the CDP.

The reception of the CDP is introduced internally to AF100 specific

system software of the station, which then configures the local bus
coupler respectively. But the reception preparations are not told to (or
made in) the BusAdministrator. The specified CDP should be
configured into BA by some other station, which thereafter is
responsible also to send the data always after BA sends the proper
address frames. If the sender is an AC80 station, it should contain a
respective MB90TRA PC element or if some other type of station,
contain a respective sending DSP element. This mechanism makes it
possible, that MB90REC can for MB90REC to be able to indicate at
ERRC pin, why the data was not received: Either address frames
from the BA or actual CDP data from the sending station were
missing.

MB90REC captures from AF100 the CDP telegrams tagged with the
specified signal address. The signal address is computed using the
STATION and IDENT parameters.

To enable the receive function of a communication port, the

STATION and IDENT of the MB90REC PC element must equal the
station and ident numbers found in the sending block.

10 - 24 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Additionally, the length of the telegram must equal the length

specified by the transmitting block. Identical values for call
parameters (which effectively specify CDP length) should be
therefore used in transmitting and receiving ends (mismatching
length specification may disable the bus coupler to receive the CDPs,
although they contained correct signal address).

The STATION parameter of the MB90REC must be equal to the

STNNO value of PM825 (AF100 part of it) DB element in the sending
station. The IDENT parameter must be equal to IDENT of the
sending MB90TRA.

RDY is set (to 1) if a new CDP telegram was transferred after the
previous execution, and the output terminals were updated. Updating
of output data (and all other output pins as well) can be temporarily or
permanently disabled by clearing the input ACT = 0. Error code
ERRC, if set for any reason, can be cleared only by a rising edge
(=transition 0 -> 1) at ACT pin.

Boolean values must be unpacked from integers (I) or long integers

(IL). Packed booleans DAT(B) or DAT(NB) from DSPs of other
Advant Controller types must be unpacked from long integers. Short
integers (I) within a CDP are assumed to be 2 bytes long, and pcked
without paddings. This makes MB90REC “incompatible” with DSPs of
other Advant Controller types, where DAT(I) is placed into CDPs so,
that it takes 4 bytes space. Therefore we have also different
restriction for call parameter C1 (C1 must be <= 16, whereas in
AFREC it must be <= 8). If the sending DSP contains DAT(II) or
DAT(NI), they can be received in AC80 by MB90REC as individual
short integers (presuming that they reside in DSP before any DAT(IL)
or DAT(R)).

The order of the data in the CDP received by the MB90REC PC

element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is
important to keep track of this rule, when assembling DSPs in other
Advant Controller stations, if they should be receivable by AC80. If
receiving integers (I) sent by AFTRA, C1 of MB90REC shall be twice
the value of AFTRA, and every second (I)-type output of MB90REC
will be continuously = 0. (However such communication (AFTRA ->
MB90REC) is never necessary (or should not be used) between two
APC or AC80 stations).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 25

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Fault Handling The ERR output is set (to 1) when a new reception does not occur
within 4 receiving intervals (or within 4 execution intervals, if the
respective DSP is missing from the DB-part). A diagnostic error code
is loaded to output ERRC (see table 3). The ERR output will reset (to
0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last
error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is
reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the
station, or by a 0-pulse in the ACT-pin.)

A mismatch between the NODE value and hardware switch settings

disables all CDP communications from and to the station. However,
service communications to the station are still possible via AF100.

During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the

value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not
been received from the bus administrator and is not an error
condition. Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up,
because BA does not send proper address frames for MB90REC
before respective CDP is configured there by the sending station, and
this may happen after MB90TRA became active. Look always ERR
pin before you worry about ERRC contents.

Event Triggering In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC,
AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC elements that specifies an
interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to
denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and
start an event driven application task in the station. A MB90REC or
MB90TRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with
respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was
positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of
CDP interrupts.

MB90REC will be typically used. to specify the triggering CDP,

although MB90TRA may be used as well.

In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM
that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must
have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined
as 2 (AF100 interrupts).

10 - 26 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The event triggering MB90REC PC element will normally reside

inside the event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between
the physical data reception and the actual updating of the output pins
of the MB90REC PC element.

The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be

reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur:

• the respective CDP communication port will be disabled

• no AF100 interrupts will be generated
• the event task will no longer be executed
• if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM
then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the
MB90REC is never executed and therefore never detects the
change of ACT signal. (If the MB90REC element is outside the
event driven task, then setting the ACT input (to 1 from 0) will
reenable events to be triggered.)

It is not necessary that the interrupting CDP is the same in all AC80
stations.

Type Circuits AF_INW type circuits are available to make it easier to insert both
MB90REC and respective DSP into AC80 application.

AF_INW will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common

DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content.
DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_INW can be
inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application.

Note: If you need such a CDP, which has dedicated DATs for each
contained data items, you shall build it from elementary blocks, or
use type circuit AFIN, which however always uses PC element
AFREC (and never MB90REC).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 27

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

DataSet Transmitter for AF100 MB90TRA MB90TRA

MB90TRA
Summary MB90TRA element is used to send cyclic F1 IDENT ERR 10
dataset (=CDPs) to the Advant Field Bus F2 SCAN
AF100 (old name of the bus was sometimes 1 ACT

MB90, that is explanation for the name). The ERRC

21 I1 99
data values are updated in the bus coupler 20+... I...
memory each time the PC element is 20+C1 I*C1
executed. The actual cyclic transmission of 51 IL1
the data is however independent of the PC 50+... IL...
50+C2 IL*C2
element execution. The sending interval is
71 R1
configured by this block. Data types within 70+... R...
the packet are indicated by the call 70+C3 RC3
parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and
should equal the call parameters of the Figure 1.
respective receiving MB90REC PC elements
(or DSP DB elements if the receiving station is not APC or AC80).
MB90TRA element should be always accompanied with respective
DSP in DB part of the application (in order to enable AF100
BusConfiguration tools to summarize various CDPs in each station).
The MB90TRA PC element can be used to trigger execution of event
driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0)) The main (and only) difference of
MB90TRA and AFTRA is in the way, they deal with short integer
data. (see below)

Call MB90TRA (C1,C2,C3)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of I values. 0...16
C2 Number of IL values. 0...8
C3 Number of R values. 0...8
Where: 0
C 1  2  C 2  2  C 3  16

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 IDENT II Data packets IDENTity 1...50
number.
F2 SCAN II Transmission interval. 1 = active

10 - 28 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
1 ACT IB Input. ACTivates dataset 1 = active
transmission.
10 ERR OB Communication ERRor.
21 I1 II Input. I value number 1.
.
.
.
20+C1 IC1 II Input. I value number C1.
.
.
.
51 IL1 IIL Input. IL value number 1.
.
.
.
50+C2 ILC2 IIL Input. IL value number C2.
71 R1 IR Input. R value number 1.
.
.
.
70+C3 RC3 IR Input. R value number C3.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code. see Table 4.

SCAN Values Table 3.

Value of SCAN Actual used Transmission Interval
used
1 1
2 2
3..5 4
6...11 8
12...23 16
24...47 32
48...95 64
96...191 128
192...383 256
384...767 512
768...1535 1024
1536...3071 2048
3072...4096 4096

Error Codes Table 4.

Error # Description
Communication startup errors:
3002 Bus coupler self-test failed.
3003 Not enough memory available in system RWM.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 29

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 4 continued
Error # Description
3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element.
3005 Station address in the hardware is equal to the STNNO value of
PM825 AF100 part.
3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the
same AC80).
3103 Illegal IDENT value.
3104 Illegal length or SCAN value of CDP.
3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified.
3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part.
3107 Respective DSP specified different scan time.
3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length.
3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction.
3201 Too many CDPs used in this station.
3301 Time slots cannot be allocated for the CDP.
3302 CDP identifier reserved by another station.
3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP
configuration.
Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up):
3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA.
When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code
(above) are translated to text:
3000...3099 MB90 START FAILED
3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ.
3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL)
3300...3399 MB90 FULL (GLOBAL)
3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL
3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE

Function Upon initialization the MB90TRA PC element:

• checks that the PM825 DB-element has specified the AF100 bus
coupler
• checks the working condition of the bus coupler
• checks the legality of the IDENT and SCAN parameters
• checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application
• allocates a communication port for the CDP.

The CDP is introduced to the Bus Administrator. After approval, the

transmission of the CDP is started after a while (=not immediately),
and repeated at intervals determined by the parameter SCAN.

10 - 30 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Time-out of approval message and/or disappearance of cyclic time

slots for the CDP (=disappearance of respective address frames from
the BA) will be detected and signaled at MB90TRA error pins.

The CDP configured by a MB90TRA PC element can be received by

MB90REC PC element in other AC80s or APCs or by a DSP
database element in other Advant Controller stations. Each
MB90TRA IDENT value should be unique for a station.

To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a

receiver block MB90REC with identical call parameter and IDENT
values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the
station number of the transmitting AC80.

The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the

STNNO parameter of the DB element PM825. The matching address
value must be also set physically in the AC80 hardware using the
provided rotary switches in front panel. Allowed address range is
1 ... 79, and the station number must match STNNO parameter
defined in PM825. Otherwise it is impossible to even download the
application into the AC80.

(Note: Hardware address is set up as decimal number: tens with

upper switch ones with lower switch)

SCAN determines the transmission interval for the CDP on AF100

(i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for
possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than
the execution interval of MB90TRA, provided there is capacity on
AF100. (Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded and there
is free capacity available in AC80, MB90TRA execution interval may
be much shorter than than the CDP transfer interval.)

Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by

reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the MB90TRA PC element
will present a CDP to the bus administrator and a communication port
is locally reserved in the bus coupler memory for the CDP. However,
the transmit function associated with the signal address will be
disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will
show an error.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 31

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers

(IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller stations (= for
DAT(B)s in DSPs) must be packed to long integers with CONV-BI
before connecting to MB90TRA input. Short integer data items sent
by MB90TRA occupy only 2 bytes each. (In all other respects
MB90TRA functions are equal to AFTRA.) The order of the data in
the CDP sent by the MB90TRA PC element is always: I values, IL
values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this rule,
when transmitting to other Advant Controller stations.

Fault Handling The ERR output is set (to 1) when a transmission does not occur
within 4 sending intervals as defined by SCAN pin of the PC element.
A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 4). The
ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the
communication status, but the last error code will always remain at
the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be
cleared during the next restart of the station or by a zero-pulse in the
ACT-pin).

A mismatch between the STNNO value of PM825 and hardware

switch settings disables all CDP communication from and to the
station. However, service communication to the station is still possible
via AF100.

During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the

value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not
been received from the bus administrator and is not an error
condition. Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up,
because BA does not start sending proper address frames for
MB90TRA immediately after it sent acknowledgement message
about the CDP configuration. Look always ERR pin before you worry
about ERRC contents.

Event Triggering In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC,
AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC element that specifies an
interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to
denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and
start an event driven application task in the station. A MB90REC or
MB90TRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with
respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was
positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of
CDP interrupts.

MB90TRA may be used to specify the event triggering CDP, although

AFREC or MB90REC will be typically used.

10 - 32 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM
that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must
have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined
as 2 (AF100 event task).

The event triggering MB90TRA PC element will normally reside

inside the AF100 event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay
between the physical data transmitted and the actual updating of data
for next transmission (=maximizes the time, how long updated data
waits for transfer along the bus, and makes that time constant = c.
scan time of the CDP).

Note: that the first event caused by the MB90TRA is generated after
the configuration message is received from the Bus Administrator.
This first event does not signify that actual data has been sent from
this MB90TRA by the AF100 bus coupler.

The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be

reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur:
• the respective CDP communication port will be disabled
• no AF100 interrupts will be generated
• the event task will no longer be executed
• if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM
then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the
MB90TRA is never executed and therefore never detects the
change of ACT signal. (If the MB90TRA element is outside the
event driven task, then setting the ACT input (to 1 from 0) will
reenable events to be triggered.)

It is not necessary that the interrupting CDP is the same in all AC80
stations.

Type Circuits AF_OUTW type circuit is available to make it easier to insert both
MB90TRA and respective DSP into AC80 application.

AF_OUTW will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common

DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content.
DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_OUTW can be
inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application.

Note: If you need such a CDP, which has dedicated DATs for each
contained data items, you shall build it from elementary blocks, or
use type circuit AFOUT, which however always uses PC element
AFTRA (and never MB90TRA).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 33

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Minimum Selector MIN

Summary MIN (MINimum selector) is used to select MIN(C1,C2)

the lowest value of an optional number of 1 DEADB A 30
integers or real numbers. 11 IA1 O 31
12 IA2

10+C2 IAC2

Call MIN (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data Type I, IL, R
C2 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 DEADB IC1 DEADBand. Input for deadband.
11 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input which is compared with
the other inputs.
12 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input which is compared with
the other inputs.
.
.
.
10 + C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2 Input which is compared
with the other inputs.
30 A OI Address. Output for the number of the input
having the lowest value.
31 O OC1 Output. Output for the least value.

Function The values at the inputs IA1 .. IAC2 are compared and the lowest
value is written to the output O. The number of the input with the
lowest value is written to the output A. If the two lowest signal values
are equal when the element is executed for the first time, the signal
with the lowest input number is selected.

10 - 34 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Deadband The deadband specified at the input DEADB is symmetrical around

the value of the lowest input. The upper and lower deadband limits
are calculated from the value for the lowest input in the preceding
execution cycle. To prevent rapid changes at the output A, the value
at A is retained until the value at the corresponding input exceeds the
calculated upper deadband or until one of the other inputs falls below
the lower deadband limit.

1 2 3 4

Signal 1 = lowest
Sample n

2 4 1 3

Signal 1 is still
Sample n + 1
seen as lowest
DEADB
2 4 1 3

Signal 2 = lowest
Sample n + 2
DEADB
4 1 2 3

Signal 4 = lowest
Sample n + 3
DEADB

Sample n + 4 Signal 4 is still

seen as lowest
DEADB
1 2 4 3

Sample n + 5 Signal 4 is still

DEADB seen as lowest
4 1 2 3

Sample n + 6 Signal 4 = lowest

DEADB

Figure 2. Example of Function with Deadband.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 35

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

ModBus Read MODR

Summary MODR PC element can be used for reading data 1

MODR
STATION
from a remote device through ModBus. AC80 2 REGADDR
station shall be always the master station and the 3 ACTIVE ERR 10
remote device is a slave station. MODR is always 4 >RESET

included in the standard PC element set of AC80. OUT1 21

In other words, it does not presume Embedded OUT2 22
ModBus option to be loaded. But in stead of OUT3 23

MVICHAN DB element, MODR presumes OUT4 24

ERRC 99
insertion of PANBUS DB element in DataBase
part of the AC80 application. Figure 1.

Call MODR(C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of output pins (= data length of (1...32)
the message in words)

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
F1 STATION II STATION number of the remote device on
ModBus..
F2 REGADDR II Internal REGister ADDress in Remote
station, from where the data should be red
(0...9998 if large address mode, otherwise
0...998).
1 ACTIVE IB 1 = Enables operations
2 RESET IB 1 = Clear ERRC
10 ERR OB ERRor
21 OUT1 OI First data OUTput pin
.
.
.
20+C1 OUTC1 OI Last data OUTput pin.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

10 - 36 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Function The PC element can read data from the remote device using ModBus
function code 03 (= Read Output Registers).
The station address of the remote device is given in pin F1
(=STATION).

The start address for reading is given through pin F2 (= REGADDR)

and and this value should contain the Base Address 4001 (=Small
Address Mode) or 40001 (=Large Address Mode) depending on the
value Param1of PANBUS DB element. Param1 = 0 causes large
addresses to be used and Param1 = 1 respectively small addresses.
The base address is subtracted from REGADDR when the actual
ModBus telegram is created.

Note that all MODR and MODW elements must use same Address
Mode (Small or Large, but not mixed). This restriction comes from
fact, that it is possible to have only one PANBUS instance in the
system, and it has only one PARAM1 pin.

The “dataset” must consist of integers. No other data type is

supported. The number of integers is given by C1. And respectively
an output pin is created for each of them. The first integer is read
from register of REGADDR, the next from REGADDR+1 etc.

ACTIVE input pin selects whether new inquiries are sent or not (and
whether new responses are used to update the output pins.) ACTIVE
= 0 will disable all functions of MODR.

RESET input pin is used for clearing the error code in ERRC output
pin.

Error Codes The error codes for station #1 are 25100..., for station number #2
they are 25200... etc. The last two digits indicate the found error type:

Table 3.
Error # Description
1 DB element PANBUS missing from application.
2 Too many different STATIONs accessed (=no control blocks
available any more).
3 Too many elements per STATION (= no buffers available any
more).
4 Attempted to delete nonexisting buffer (this error should never
occur).
10 ModBus handler not found (this error should never occur).
11 Illegal size of ModBus buffer.
12 Access to ModBus block denied.
13 Error response from the remote device.
14 No response from the remote device.
15 Remote station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot detect).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 37

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

ModBus Write MODW

Summary MODW PC element can be used for writing F=1-F1

MODW
STATION
data to a remote device through ModBus. F=1-F2 REGADDR
AC80 station shall be always the master 1 ACTIVE ERR 10
station and the remote device is a slave 2 >RESET

station. MODW is always included in the 21 IN1 ERRC 99

standard PC element set of AC80. In other 22 IN2
words, it does not presume Embedded 23 IN3

ModBus option to be loaded. But in stead of 24 IN4

MVICHAN DB element, MODW presumes

insertion of PANBUS DB element in Figure 1.
DataBase part of the AC80 application.

Call MODW (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of input pins (= data length of (1...32)
the message in words).

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
F1 STATION II STATION number of the remote device on
ModBus.
F2 REGADDR II Internal REGister ADDress in Remote
station, from where the data should be red.
(0...9998 if large address mode, otherwise
0...998).
1 ACTIVE IB 1 = Enables operations
2 RESET IB 1 = Clear ERRC
10 ERR OB ERRor
21 IN1 OI First data INput pin.
.
.
.
20+C1 INC1 OI Last data INput pin.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

Function The PC element can write data to the remote device using ModBus
function code 16 (= Preset Multiple Registers).

10 - 38 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The station address of the remote device is given in pin F1

(=STATION).

The start address for writing is given through pin F2 (= REGADDR)

and this value should contain the Base Address 4001 (=Small
Address Mode) or 40001 (=Large Address Mode) depending on the
value Param1of PANBUS DB element. Param1 = 0 causes large
addresses to be assumed and Param1 = 1 respectively small
addresses. The base address is subtracted from REGADDR when
the actual ModBus telegram is created.

Note that all MODR and MODW blocks must use same Address
Mode (Small or Large, but not mixed). This restriction comes from the
fact that it is possible to have only one PANBUS instance in the
system, and it has only one PARAM1 pin.

The “dataset” must consist of integers. No other data type is

supported. The number of integers is given by C1. And respectively
an input pin is created for each of them. The first integer is written to
register of REGADDR, the next to REGADDR+1 etc.

ACTIVE input pin selects whether new update messages are sent or
not. ACTIVE = 0 will disable all functions of MODW.

RESET input pin is used for clearing the error code in ERRC output
pin.

Error Codes The error codes for station #1 are 25100..., for station number #2
they are 25200... etc.
The last two digits indicate the found error type:

Table 3.
Error # Description
1 DB element PANBUS missing from application.
2 Too many different STATIONs accessed (=no control blocks
available any more).
3 Too many elements per STATION (= no buffers available any
more).
4 Attempted to delete nonexisting buffer (this error should never
occur).
10 ModBus handler not found (this error should never occur).
11 Illegal size of ModBus buffer.
12 Access to ModBus block denied.
13 Error response from the remote device.
14 No response from the remote device.
15 Remote station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot detect).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 39

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Mono Function MONO

MONO
Summary The MONO element can be used for limiting or 1 RTG O 5
extending of the time for which a Boolean value is 2 I TE 6
set (time for which the Boolean value is 1). 3 TP

Figure 1.
Call MONO

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 RTG IB ReTrigG. Input to select whether or not the
MONO function is to be retriggerable. If RTG is
set, a retriggerable function is selected.
2 I IN Input. Input for starting the MONO function when
the input changes from 0 to 1.
3 TP IT Time Pulse. Input for setting the pulse time.
5 O OB Output. Output which is set when the MONO
function starts and resets (to 0) when the time TP
has elapsed.
6 TE OT Time Elapsed. Output for time elapsed when O is
set. When the set time (TP) has elapsed, TE will
stop.

Function When the value of input I is changed from 0 to 1, the output O is set
(to 1) and a timer is started. The output O is reset (to 0) when the
time TP has elapsed.

2 I O 5
S

T R
1 &
TP TE TE 6

1
>1
1 RTG

3 TP

Figure 2. Function Diagram

10 - 40 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

MONO Function, If the input RTG is reset (value is 0), the MONO function is not
retriggerable. If a new pulse occurs at the input I before the time TP
Not Retriggerable has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only after the time TP has
elapsed and the output O is reset can the MONO function be
restarted.

MONO Function, If RTG is set (value is 1), a retriggerable MONO function is selected,
i.e. the timer starts from 0 each time a new pulse occurs at the input
Retriggerable
I.

0 1 2 3 5 10
TP = 4 s
RTG = 0
Figure 3. Time Diagram for the MONO Function, not Retriggerable.

0 1 2 3 5 10
TP = 2 s
RTG = 1
Figure 4. Time Diagram for the MONO Function, Retriggerable.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 41

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Element for Copying Data MOVE

Summary MOVE copies the value at the inputs to the MOVE

(C1,C2)
corresponding outputs.
1 21
2 22

Call MOVE (C1, C2)

C2 20+C2

Call Parameters Table 1. Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs and outputs 1...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IC1 Input for value 1.
2 - IC1 Input for value 2.
.
.
.
C2 - IC1 Input for value C2
21 - OC1 Output for value 1.
22 - OC1 Output for value 2.
.
.
.
20+C2 OC1 Output for value C2.

Function The element copies the values at the inputs to the respective outputs.
The type of data to be moved is determined by the call parameter C1.
The number of values moved is determined by the call parameter C2.

10 - 42 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplier MUL

Summary MUL (MULtiplier) is used for multiplication of up to 1 * 20

19 integers or real numbers. 2 C1

C2

Figure 1.
Call MUL (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R
C2 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IC1 Input for multiplicand.
2 - IC1 Input for multiplier
:
.
.
C2 - IC1 Input for multiplier.
20 - OC1 Output for product.

Function The values at the inputs 1 ... C2 are multiplied and the product is
stored at the output 20.

Overflow If the maximum positive or negative value is exceeded, the output is

limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 43

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Integer Scaling Element MULDIV

Summary MULtiplier DIVider element is used to scale an MULDIV

1 I O 10
integer value by dividing the product of two
2 MUL REM 11
integers with a third value. 3 DIV

Figure 1.

Call MULDIV

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IIL Input for multiplicand
2 MUL IIL Input for MULtiplier.
3 DIV IIL Input for DIVisor
10 O OIL Output for quotient.
11 REM OIL Output for REMainder.

Function The product of inputs I and MUL is divided by the input DIV. The
quotient is loaded to the output O and the remainder to the output
REM. The element uses internal 32-bit accuracy.

Overflow If the maximum positive value is exceeded then the output O is

limited to +32767. If the minimum negative value is exceeded then
the output O is limited to -32768.

10 - 44 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplexer for Text MUXA-I

Summary MUltipleXer Array with Integer address is a 11

MUXA-I (C1,C2)
A AERR 5
PC element used as a selector for text arrays.
An optional number of inputs can be specified 31 IA1 O 50
as well as the number of characters in the .. ..
text arrays. 30+C2 IA*C2

Call MUXA-I (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs. 1...19
C2 Number of characters in the arrays. 1...30

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Set (to 1) when input A is
greater than call parameter C1 or a negative
value.
11 A II Address. Selection of which input value
should be stored at the output O. If the value
is 0 a blank text is stored at the output.
31 IA1 IAC2 Input Address 1. The first input in the
selector.
32 IA2 IAC2 Input Address 2. The second input in the
selector.
. IAx IAC2 Input Address x...
.

30+ IAC1 IAC” Input Address C1. The last input in the
C1 selector.
50 O OAC2 Output. Output from the selector.

Function The text string at the input (IA1...IAC1), specified by the input
address A (1...C1), is stored at the output O. If A is 0, then a blank
text string is loaded at O.

Supervision The value of the input address A is checked each execution of the
PC element. If it is greater than the number of outputs specified by
the call parameter C1 or it is a negative number, then the AERR
output is set (to 1). A blank text string is loaded at output O.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 45

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplexer with Integer Address MUX-I

Summary MUX-I (MUltipleXer - with Integer address) MUX-I

(C1,C2)
is used as a selector. The data type can
11 A AERR 5
be integers, real numbers, Boolean
variables or time 31 IA1 O 50
32 IA2

30+C2 IAC2
Call MUX-I (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when
the address value is greater than the number
of outputs, or negative.
11 A IIL Address. Input for address value that specifies
which input is to be connected to the output O.
When A = 0, the output is set to 0.
31 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the
selector.
32 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the
selector.
.
.
.
30 +C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the
selector.
50 O OC1 Output. Data output from the selector.
Function
Addressing The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) connected to the output O is
specified with an address (integer 1 .. C2) at the input A. If the
address is 0, the data value 0 is connected to the output O.

10 - 46 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Supervision The address A is monitored and if its value is greater than the
number of inputs or negative, the error output AERR is set. The data
value 0 is then written to the output O.

11 A1 A > C2
AERR 5
or

A<0

test

D =0 A0
31 IA1

32 IA2 O 50

30 + C2 IAC2

Figure 2. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 47

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplexer with Memory and Integer Address MUX-MI

Summary MUX-MI (MUltipleXer - with Memory and MUX-MI

(C1,C2)
Integer address) is used as a selector with
1 S AERR 5
memory function. The data type can be 2 L
integers, real numbers, Boolean variables 3 R
or time. 11 A

31 IA1 O 50
32 IA2

Call MUX-MI (C1,C2) 30+C2 IAC2

Call Parameters Table 1. Figure 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for loading of new values each time
the element is executed. When the input S is
reset, the last value loaded will remain at the
output.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of the data
addressed.
3 R IB Reset. Input for resetting the output. This input
overrides inputs S and L.
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when
the address value is greater than the number of
outputs, or negative.
11 A II Address. Input for address value which
specifies from which input data is to be loaded
to the output O. When A = 0, the output is set to
0.
31 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector.
32 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector.
.
.
.
30 + C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the
selector.
50 O OC1 Output. Data output from the selector.

10 - 48 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Function
Addressing The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) stored to the output O is specified
with an address (integer 1 .. C2) at the input A. If the address is 0,
the data value 0 is stored to the output O.

Loading The value is loaded when the input L is set. If input S is set, new data
is loaded each time the element is executed. When S is reset after
having been set, the data most recently loaded remains until the
element is executed with one of the inputs S, L or R set. The input S
overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect.

Clearing Setting the input R clears the data output and prevents further
storage of data.

Supervision The address A is monitored and if its value is greater than the
number of inputs, or negative, the error signal output AERR is set.
The data value 0 is then stored to the output.

11 A1 AERR 5

D =0 A0
31 IA1

32 IA2

30 + C2 IAC2
O 50
1 S
≥
2 L

3 R R

Figure 2. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 49

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N Address MUX-MN

Summary MUX-MN (MUltipleXer - with Memory and MUX-MN

(C1,C2)
1-of-N address) is used as a selector with
1 S AERR 5
memory function. The data type can be 2 L
integers, real numbers, Boolean variables 3 R
or time. 11 A1
12 A2

10+C2 AC2

31 IA1 O 50
32 IA2

30+C2 IAC2
Call MUX-MN (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...16

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for loading of new values each time
the element is executed. When the input S is
reset, the last value loaded will remain at the
output.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of the data
addressed.
3 R IB Reset. Input for resetting the output. This input
overrides inputs S and L.
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when
two or more of the inputs A1...AC2 are set.
11 A1 IB Address 1. Input to store data from the input IA1
to the output O.
12 A2 IB Address 2. Input to store data from the input IA2
to the output O.
.
.
.
10 + C2 AC2 IB Address C2 Input to store data from the input
IAC2 to the output O.
31 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector.

10 - 50 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
32 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector.
.
.
.
30 + C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the
selector.
50 O OC1 Output. Data output from the selector.
Function
Addressing The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) stored at the output is specified
with the inputs A1 .. AC2. If the input A1 is 1, the value from input IA1
is stored to the output. If A2 is 1, the value from input IA2, etc. If none
of the inputs A1 .. AC2 is set to 1, the data value 0 is stored to the
output O.

Loading The value is loaded when the input L is set. If input S is set, new data
is loaded each time the element is executed. When S is reset after
having been set, the data most recently loaded remains until the
element is executed with one of the input S, L or R set. The input S
overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect.

Clearing Setting the input R clears the data output and prevents further
storage of data.

Supervision If two or more of the inputs A1 .. AC2 are set simultaneously, the
output AERR is set and the value from the input which corresponds
to the address input set with the lowest number is stored at the output
O.

11 A1
12 A2

2 AERR 5
test
10 + C2 AC2

D =0 A0
31 IA1
32 IA2

30 + C2 IAC2
I O 50
1 S

1 C
2 L
1
3 R R

Figure 2. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 51

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address MUX-N

Summary MUX-N (MUltipleXer - with 1-of-N address) MUX-N

(C1,C2)
is used as a selector. The data type can be 11 A1 AERR 5
integers, real numbers, Boolean variables 12 A2
or time.
10+C2 AC2

31 IA1 O 50
32 IA2

30+C2 IAC2

Call MUX-N (C1,C2)

Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
5 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when
two or more of the inputs A1...AC2 are set.
11 A1 IB Address 1. Input to store data from the input IA1
to the output O.
12 A2 IB Address 2. Input to store data from the input IA2
to the output O.
.
.
.
10 + C2 AC2 IB Address C2 Input to store data from the input
IAC2 to the output O.
31 IA1 IC1 Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector.
32 IA2 IC1 Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector.
.
.
.
30 + C2 IAC2 IC1 Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the
selector.
50 O OC1 Output. Data output from the selector.

10 - 52 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Function
Addressing The value of the input address IA1 ... IAC2, which corresponds to the
lowest address A1 ... AC2 that is set (to 1), is connected to the output
O.

If none of the inputs A1 ... AC2 is set, then the data value 0 is written
to the output O.

Supervision If two or more of the inputs A1 .. AC2 are set simultaneously, the
output AERR is set and the value from the input which corresponds
to the lowest address is stored to the output O.

11 A1
12 A2

2 AERR 5
test
10 + C2 AC2

D =0 A0
31 IA1
32 IA2

30 + C2 IAC2
O 50

Figure 2. Function Diagram

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 53

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Or Gate OR

Summary OR is used to form general combinatory expressions 1 OR 20

with Boolean variables. 2

C1

Figure 1.
Call OR (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs 2...19

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input
2 - IB Input
. . . .
. . . .
C1 - IB Input
20 - OB Output

Function The output signal is set to 1 if any of the inputs 1..C1 is 1. See the
truth table below.

Table 3. Truth table OR (3)

1 2 3 20

0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1

10 - 54 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Or Gate OR-A

Summary OR with AND gates on the inputs is used to 1 >1 60

form general combinatory expressions with -
C1
Boolean variables.
11
- &
10+C2

51
- &
50+C6
Call OR-A (C1,C2,C3...Cn)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the OR part of the 0...9
element.
C2 Number of inputs in the first AND gate of 0...9
the element.
C3 Number of inputs in the second AND 0...9
gate of the element.
.
.
.
Cn Number of inputs in the last AND gate of 0...9
the element.
Where: 1
n
6
1
C1  C 2 ...  Cn
40

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IB Input direct to the OR gate in the element.
2 IB Input direct to the OR gate in the element.
. Input direct to the OR gate in the element.
.
.
C1 IB Input direct to the OR gate in the element
11 IB Input to the first AND gate in the element.
12 IB Input to the first AND gate in the element.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 55

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
. IB
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the first AND gate in the element.
21 IB Input to the second AND gate in the
element.
22 IB Input to the second AND gate in the
element.
. IB Input to the second AND gate in the
. element.
.
10*(n-1)+1 IB Input to the last AND gate in the element.
10*(n-1)+2 IB Input to the last AND gate in the element.
. IB Input to the last AND gate in the element
.
.
10*(n-1)+Cn IB Input to the last AND gate in the element.
60 OB Output

Function This function provides faster execution than if separate elements are
used. The inputs only need to be tested until the value of the output
can be determined. If input 1 is 1 then the output can be set (to 1)
irrespective of all other inputs.
See the example of OR-A (3,3,3) as shown in figure 1 and in table 3.

Table 3. Truth table AND-O (3)

1 2 3 11 12 13 21 22 23 60
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 x x 0 x x 0
0 0 0 0 x x 1 0 x 0
0 0 0 0 x x 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 x 0 x x 0
0 0 0 1 0 x 1 0 x 0
0 0 0 1 0 x 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 x 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 x x 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x 1
0 0 1 x x x x x x 1
0 1 x x x x x x x 1
1 x x x x x x x x 1

x indicates that the input has no effect on the value of the output or
the execution time of the PC element.

10 - 56 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Oscillator OSC-B

OSC-B
Summary Oscillator OSC-B (OSCillator -Boolean variables) 1 EN
with variable frequency and pulse time is used 2 TP O 5
when pulse trains with periods from 2 x cycle time 3 TC
up to 14 hours are needed.
Figure 1.
Call OSC-B

Connections Table 1.

No Name Type Description

1 EN IB ENable. Input for start of oscillator.
2 TP IT Time Pulse. Input for setting of pulse time.
3 TC IT Time Cycle. Input for setting of period. The
period must be greater than the pulse duration.
5 O OB Output. Oscillator output.

Function The oscillator starts when the input EN is set (to 1).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 57

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Oscillator for Sine Wave OSC-SIN

Summary OSCillator - SINe wave element is used to 1

OSC-SIN
EN O 5
generate a sinusoidal signal. The period and 2 TC ERR 6
amplitude are controlled by the inputs. 3 AMP

Figure 1.
Call OSC-SIN

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 EN IB ENable. Input for activation of sine wave
generation.
2 TC ITR Time Cycle. Input for period.
3 AMP IR AMPlitude. Input for amplitude.
5 O OR Output. Output for sine wave.
6 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if the period
TC is undersized.

Function If EN is set (to 1) then the OSC-

SIN function block generates a AMP
sinusoidal wave with period TC
and amplitude AMP, as shown in
figure 2. The sine wave is created
from a table with 256 values per TC

period.
If EN is reset (to 0) the output O is Figure 2. General Waveform.
cleared.
When EN is set to 1 after having been 0, the sine wave begins from
t=0.

Supervision If the PC element is executed with a time period TC less than 20

times the cycle time of the function block, then the output ERR is set
to 1.

If the cycle time is less than the period TC, the output O is cleared (to
0).

10 - 58 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Panel Control PC Element PANC

PANC (10,10)
Summary PANC controls one CDP80 panel. CDP80 F=1-F1 PAN_ID ERR 10
has 16 push buttons and a display with F=1-F2 LOGNR BUTTONS 11
four 20 character lines. PANC reads the 1 RESET STATUS 12
pressing of the panel push buttons and 2 CNTRL DATSTAT 30
20 DAT DATNAME 31
builds four text lines. The panel operator
21 PAR DATVALI 32
can switch between 4 operation modes: DATVALR 33
PARSTAT 40
1. In internal mode CDP80 parameters
PARNAME 41
can be set, e.g. the node number of PARVALI 42
the panel. PARVALR 43
ERRC 99
2. In event mode two events from one
event logger are displayed. Figure 1.
3. In signal mode two DATs from a list of
DATs are displayed.
4. In parameter mode two PARDATs from a list of PARDATs are
displayed.

Communication with the panel(s) uses ModBus protocol. However,

Embedded ModBus option is not necessary to enable. In stead, the
application must contain a DB element PANBUS, which must specify
19200 bits/s speed and 8bits/no parity character structure. AC80 is
the master station and CDP80s slave stations.

Call PANC (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of DATs 0...72, default value = 0
0 = not used
C2 Number of PARDATs 0..144, default value = 0
0 = not used

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 PAN_ID II Station address of control panel. 1...15
F2 LOGNR II ID NumbeR of event LOGger. 1...8
1 RESET IB RESETs the error code, initializes 0 or 1
the pointers.
2 CNTRL II Specify optional modes PANC
operation.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 59

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
20 DAT IA20 String mask for DAT elements.
21 PAR IA20 String mask for PARDAT elements.
10 ERR OB ERRor indication outputs.
11 BUTTONS OI Pressed push BUTTONS code.
12 STATUS OI PANC operation STATUS.
30 DATSTAT OI STATus of current DAT.
31 DATNAME OA20 NAME of current DAT.
32 DATVAL1 OIL VALue of current DAT, if integer.
33 DATVALR OR VALue of current DAT, if Real
40 PARSTAT OI STATus of current PARDAT
41 PARNAME OB NAMEof current PARDAT.
42 PARVAL1 OIL VALue of current PARDAT, if integer.
43 PARVALR OR VALue of current PARDAT, if Real.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

Cycle Time of PANC generates a panel link message every time it is executed.
The panel/printer link ModBus-protocol software operates cyclically at
PANC
100ms intervals. One panel is served during one transmission cycle.
The cycle time of PANC should not be less than 200ms in order to
avoid panel link overload. The cycle time can be 400ms without
decline of panel performance.

Call Parameters C1 defines the number of DATs that can be handled in signal mode.
The DATs are fetched from the symbol table

If C1 = 0 signal mode is not enabled. No values are therefore

displayed. C2 defines the number ot PARDATs that can be handled
in parameter mode. The PARDATs are fetched from the symbol
table. If C2 = 0 parameter mode is not enabled. No values are
therefore displayed.

Control Terminal Terminal F1 (PAN_ID) should match the node number (1 to 15) set
on CDP80 in internal mode.
Functions
• In case no panel with corresponding station number is active on
the panel link, ERR is set and the error code 2xx05 (no response
from panel) is output on ERRC.

Terminal F2 (LOGNR) specifies the logger to which PANC connects.

• In event mode CDP80 displays two successive events at a time,
which can be scrolled. However if event mode is entered from
other modes after a new event has occurred, you will first see the
latest event alone. (You can scroll backwards to see the other
events.)

10 - 60 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

• If no logger with the specified number exists ERR is set and an

error code output on ERRC

Terminal 1 (RESET) activates on the rising edge.

• The current event pointer is set to LAST event

• The symbol table search is initialized for DATs. The current DAT
pointer is set to the first DAT
• The symbol table search is inititilaise for PARDATs. The current
PARDAT pointer is set to the first PARDAT
• The communication buffer is initialised
• Terminal ERRC is cleared

Terminal 2 (CNTRL) is used to set special features to operation

modes.

Bit # Value Description

0 0 Display unacknowledged events only.
0x1 Display all events (acknowledged, too).
1 0 Display only those DATs, whose name match with string in
DAT pin.
0x2 Display all DATs.
2 0 Display only those PARDATs, whose name match with string
in PAR pin.
0x4 Display all PARDATs.

Terminal 3 ( DAT ) defines the DAT: NAME mask used at look up.
• DATs are fetched in alphabetical order from the symbol table
• If more than C1 symbols exist DATSTAT displays 100
(= C1_TOO_SMALL).

Terminal 4 (PAR) defines the PARDAT:

NAME mask used at look up.
• PARDATs are fetched in alphabetical order from the symbol table
• If more than C2 symbols exist PARSTAT displays 200
(= C2_TOO_SMALL).

Terminal 10 (ERR) is activated when an error has been detected.

Terminal 11 (BUTTONS) displays the push button states.

• BUTTONS is updated every time PANC is executed. If it is not
possible, the rest of PANC execution is bypassed.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 61

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The push buttons are shown identifiable by the following codes:

Code Push Button

1 DAT button
2 PAR button
4 INT button
8 EVT button
16 UP/UP button
32 DOWN/DOWN button
64 UP button
128 DOWN button
256 ENTER/ACK button
512 F1 button
1024 F2 button
2048 F3 button
4096 F4 button
8192 F5 button
16384 RESTORE button
-32758 SAVE button

Terminal 12 (STATUS) displays the current PANC status:

STATUS_UNKNOWN (0)
INTERNAL_MODE (110)
SIGNAL_MODE (120)
PARAMETER_MODE (130)
PARAMETER_EDIT_MODE (131)
EVENT_MODE (140)

Terminals 30..33 show current DAT data. Data is updated in signal

mode only.

• If the shown DAT is of I or IL type, it is value is shown in pin 32

and pin 33 = 0
• If the DAT is R type, it is value is shown in pin 33 and pin 32 = 0.

Terminals 40..43 show current PARDAT data. Data is updated in

parameter mode only.
• If the shown PARDAT is of I or IL type, it is value is shown in pin
42 and pin 43 = 0
• If the PARDAT is R type, it is value is shown in pin 43 and pin 42
= 0.

Terminal 30..43 are intended for diagnostics of panel functions.

10 - 62 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Panel Push Button Push button states are returned from CDP80 in the Button Status
Word of an inquiry message. Bits PB1 to PB16 on output terminal
Functions BUTTONS indicates the pressing of push buttons 1..16. The pushing
of a button generates a pulse at the corresponding bit. Terminal
BUTTONS is updated every time PANC is executed.

IN T PA R DAT EV T

EN T
A CK

F1 F2 F7 REST

F3 SA V E

Figure 2. CDP80.

Table 3 Push Buttons

Push Name Significance Activation Function
Button
PB1 DAT Selects Internal On rising edge Exclusive with
mode. PB2,PB3, PB4.
PB2 PAR Selects On rising edge Exclusive with
Parameter mode. PB1,PB3, PB4.
PB3 INT Selects Signal On rising edge Exclusive with
mode. PB1,PB2, PB4.
PB4 EVT Selects Event On rising edge Exclusive with
mode. PB1,PB2, PB3.
PB5 2 Up Scrolls current When pushed Exclusive with
display upwards. PB6.
PB6 2 Down Scrolls current When pushed Exclusive with
display PB5.
downwards.
PB7 Up Increase current When pushed Parameter mode
value. only.
PB8 Down Decrease current When pushed Parameter mode
value. only.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 63

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 3 Push Buttons continued

Push Name Significance Activation Function
Button
PB9 ENTER/ Enter current value On rising edge ENTER in
ACK or ACKnowledge Parameter
event(s). edit mode.
ACK in
Event mode.
PB10 F1 Function Button 1. On rising edge Application
specific.
PB11 F2 Function Button 2. On rising edge Application
specific.
PB12 F3 Function Button 3. On rising edge. Application
specific.
PB13 F4 Function Button 4. On rising edge. Application
specific.
PB14 F5 Function Button 5. On rising edge. Application
specific.
PB15 RESTORE Restore PAR data On rising edge. Parameter
(not abailable yet) mode only.
PB16 SAVE Save PAR to On rising edge. Parameter
PROM mode only.

Function of PB1..PB4 are used to change operational mode and switch display:
Buttons • PB1/DAT selects DAT mode (=signal mode)
• PB2/PAR selects PARDAT mode (=parameter mode)
• PB3/INT selects internal mode
• PB4/EVT selects event mode.

Pushing a mode button may change the current mode. The new
mode is activated on the display after PANC has detected that
operator pressed such button, and sent a message for the first
display in the new mode. PANC sends messages for on display mode
only. (= for current mode). While switching modes PANC saves
position data of the old mode. When the old mode is reentered PANC
restores the display according saved data.

PB5/2up, PB6/2down are used to scroll up and down:

• In internal mode the panel configuration parameters
• In parameter mode the PARDAT list
• In signal mode the DAT list the current
• In event mode the event buffer
• A pointer ( > ) indicates the current item.

10 - 64 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

PB7/up, PB8/down are used to increase/decrease the value of the

current item.
• In internal mode the value of the current configuration parameter
• In parameter mode the value of the current PARDAT
• In signal mode the value of the current DAT (if writable)
• In event mode: no significance.

PB9/ENTER/ACK is used
• In internal mode to enter the value of the current configuration
parameter
• In parameter mode to enter the parameter edit mode
• In parameter edit mode to enter the displayed value into the
current PARDAT
• In event mode to acknowlefge the current event, and all older
events.

PB10...PB14 can be freely used for application programming.

PB15/RESTORE is used
• In parameter mode to restore old parameter values from FPROM.
(however this function is not yet implemented)
• In signal and event mode for application programming.

PB16/SAVE is used
• In parameter mode to write changed PARDAT values to FPROM
• In signal and event mode for application programming.

Internal Mode Internal mode is used to:

• Display and set the station number
• Display and set the contrast of the panel display
• Display and set the communication timeout time for the panel
• Display the version number of the panel.

Internal mode is entered by pressing PB3/INT. Internal mode is

exited by pressing PB1 or PB2 or PB4 (= any other button on top
row) assuming that a PANC element is active and detects the
pressed buttons (i.e. CDP80 panel does not change it is operation
mode because an operator requested it, but because the AC80
software did it.) The exception to this rule is: When operator presses
PB3/INT, the panel enters immediately internal mode (=just as said
above).

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 65

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The configuration parameter to be set ( station, contrast etc. ) is

selected by 2up/2down buttons. The set point is changed with
up/down buttons and taken into active use with ENTER/ACK button.

The entered station number must match the value of PAN_ID pin to
enable PANC to communicate with the panel.

Parameter Mode Parameter mode is enter by PB2. Parameter mode is exited by PB1
or PB3 or PB4 (or ENTER/ACK).

In parameter mode two parameters are displayed.

A parameter is represented by 2 lines.

The upper line shows the PARDAT:

NAME (text string with up to 20 characters)

The lower line consists of

• Arrow indicating current PARDAT data type
• PARDAT: VALUE right aligned

The parameter mode display can be scrolled with 2up / 2down

buttons. The PARDATs are automatically sorted in alphabetical order,
and can be scrolled only in such order. By planning suitable prefixes
into PARDAT names, the AC80 application designer can arrange the
scrolling order of PARDATs. The PAR pin of PANC can be used to
make a certain group of PARDATs scrollable. In such case PAR text
must end with asterisk *. All those PARDATs, whose name up to
asterisk match with PAR are then possible to display and modify. (It
is also possible to see/modify other PARDATs on the panel display,
but then you need to have bit #2 set in PANC CNTRL pin.)

Parameter display example

DR3 NOM POWER KW
> I 300
DR3 NOM SPEED RPM
1003
The text on the topmost line is the PARDAT:
NAME DR3__NOM_POWER__KW. PARDAT:
NAMED underscores will be replaced by spaces on panel display.

In parameter mode button states PB10 to PB16 are written to output

terminal BUTTONS. However buttons PB15,16 have their special
meanings (Restore and Save) in Parameter mode only. In other
modes PB15 and PB16 are traded just as PB10...PB14.

10 - 66 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Parameter Edit Parameter edit mode is entered by ENTER/ACK while in Parameter

mode. Parameter edit mode is exited with new parameter value by
Mode pressing ENTER/ACK or without changing the parameter value by
pressing PB1, PB2, PB3 or PB4.

Visually you can recognize parameter mode and parameter edit

mode from each other, as in edit mode the current parameter value is
surrounded by brackets.

While in parameter edit mode, the PANC does not update the
displayed parameter values at all, but allows you to increase or
decrease it is value with PB8/UP and PB9/DOWN buttons. The speed
of change increases gradually if you press the button continuously.
So you can make big changes with good accuracy and within
reasonable time, even if the parameter is a real number.

Event Mode Event mode is activated by PB4/EVT. Event mode is exited by

pushing PB1 or PB2 or PB3.

Event mode is enabled if:

• An Event logger exists, whose number matches LOGNR pin of
PANCON
• The Event logger contains at least one event.

An event is represented by two lines on the CDP80 display. The

upper line shows the text assigned to the event (character string with
up to 20 characters). The lower line shows date and time (100 us
resolution) for the event.

Event display example:

DR2 OVERCURRENT
+ 990324 13:20:24,324
DR2 SWITCHED ON
+ 990324 13:18:57,678
The shown event and all older events are acknowledged by PB9
(ENT/ACK). So, do not press ENT/ACK before you have looked the
older events, too, if you are interested to see them. (It is also possible
to see acknowledged events afterwards on the panel display, but
then you need to have bit #0 set in PANC CNTRL pin.)

Signal Mode In Signal mode two variables (= contents of DAT elements) are
displayed. The upper line is the DAT:
NAME (text string with up to 20 characters).

The lower line consists

• data type
• value right aligned

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 67

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The signal mode display can be scrolled with 2up / 2down buttons.
The DATs are automatically sorted in alphabetical order, and can be
scrolled only in such order. By planning suitable prefixes into DAT
names, the AC80 application designer can arrange the scrolling order
of DATs. The DAT pin of PANC can be used to make a certain group
of DATs scrollable. In such case DAT text must end with an asterisk
*. All those DATs, whose name up to asterrisk match with DAT are
then possible to display. (It is also possible to see other DATs on the
panel display, but then you need to have bit #1 set in PANC CNTRL
pin.)

Signal display example

DRIVE3 SPEED RPM
R 1124.5
DRIVE3 CURRENT A
I 1003

The text on the topmost line is DAT:

NAME DRIVE3_SPEED___RPM.

DAT:
NAME underscores have been replaced by spaces on panel display.

In signal mode pressing of buttons PB10 to PB16 are shown in output

terminal BUTTONS.

Error Codes Table 4.

Error # Description
2xx01 No database element PANBUS found.
2xx02 No more available node control blocks (= too many nodes)
2xx03 No more available buffers.
2xx04 Attempt to delete none existing buffer (should never happen).
2xx05 Eventlogger not faund.
2xx10 ModBus handler not found.
2xx11 Illegal size of ModBus buffer (should never happen).
2xx12 Access to ModBus element denied.
2xx14 No response from the panel.
2xx15 Station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot be detected).
2xx16 Parameter values not received.
2xx17 Symbol table read error.

10 - 68 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Save PARDAT Values to PROM PARSAVE

Summary PARSAVE PC element provides means for PARSAVE

1 TRIG BUSY 3
controlling the storage of current PARDAT values 2 CNTRL RDY 4
into PROM memory. This PC element was SWAPS 5
considered necessary, because PARDAT values SAVED 6
may be changed continuously by the application ERRC 99

program, and therefore automatic storage of new Figure 1.

values could happen too frequently and ruin the
flashPROM chip. (The flashPROM chips be wearing a little bit each
time they are written, and after 10 000...100 000 rewrite cycles they
may become permanently burned out.)

Call PARSAVE

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 TRIG IB TRIGger next save action (0 −> 1 sensitive).
2 CNTRL II Options how to save parameters.
3 BUSY OB Is save session active.
4 RDY OB Has save session become ReaDY.
5 SWAPS OIL How many times active and passive
Segments are SWAPped.
6 SAVED OI How many PARDATs were SAVED this time.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

Functions Whenever there is positive signal edge (=change from 0 to 1) in pin

TRIG and the BUSY pin = 0, a new parameter save sequence will be
started. There after you can see when the sequence becomes ready
by looking output pins BUSY and RDY.

In beginning BUSY changes from 0 to 1, and RDY is set = 0 (RDY

might have been 0 already).

At the end BUSY changes from 1 to 0, and RDY changes from 0 to 1.

CNTRL pin is not (yet) used for anything.

BUSY = 1 indicates, that saving has started, but not yet ended.

SWAPS shows how many times parameter segments of flashPROM

are swapped, i.e. how big the risk is that flash PROM is worn out.

SAVED shows how many parameters (=PARDATs) were save. While

BUSY=1 SAVED is = 0.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 69

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Error Codes Table 2.

Error # Description
-20482 = Calling of function PARAM_GetStatus() failed
16 Passed function parameters were wrong
17 FPROM hardware error
18 Error accessing domains
19 Insufficient space for storage

10 - 70 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Program Header PCPGM

Summary The program header PCPGM is used for the 1

PCPGM(C1,C2)
ON RUN 5
structuring and execution control of the application 2 R
program of a PC system.
Figure 1.

Call PCPGM (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Cyclicity in ms Allowed values are between 2
ms and 2000 ms in steps of 2
ms.
C2* Place in the cycle time table 1...251: place in the cycle time
and / or scheduling strategy, table cyclic activation.
i.e. Task priority. 252: activation at initialisation
after power down.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description Values
1 ON IB CONtrol input which is set (to 1) with
normal execution.
2 R IB Reset Input for clearing execution units
in the PC program.
5 RUN OB RUN indidates that the execution units
in the PC program may be executed.

Function The PC program is the highest level in the PC program structure. The
program is intended to perform a complete control function. The
program header PCPGM is used to control the enabling, disabling
and resetting of the complete PC program, irrespective of
subordinate execution units. The parameter C1 (see table 1)
specifies how often the program header is to be executed.

Parameter C2 is used to specify the position in the cycle time table

which determines the execution order of the execution units with the
same cycle time.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 71

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The program header cannot have directly subordinate elements. The

control inputs ON and R are used to control when and how the
complete PC program with subordinate execution units is to be
executed. PCPGM itself is always executed, irrespective of the inputs
ON and R.

Normal The input ON must be set to allow the normal execution of

Execution subordinate execution. At the start of the execution of subordinate
execution units, a check is performed to ensure that the program
header has RUN status.

Clearing If the input R is set, the complete PC program is executed in reset

mode. Input R overrides input ON.

RUN Output RUN is set only if normal execution is permitted, i.e. if the ON
input is set and the R input is reset (to 0).

1 ON RUN 5

2 R &

Supervisory control
of execution units

Figure 2. Function Diagram

10 - 72 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

PDP-Function PDP

Summary PDP (Proportional Derivating Proportional

1
PDP
I O 10
regulator) is used to give proportional 2 K O=HL 11
effect and limited derivation effect. The 3 T1 O=LL 12
output signal can be limited with limit 4 T2 ERR 13
values specified at special inputs. The 5 BAL
6
balancing function permits the output BALREF
7 OHL
signal to track an external reference and 8 OLL t
permits a bumpless return to the normal
function. All transfers from balancing or Figure 1.
from limited output signal are bumpless.

Call PDP

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for actual value.
2 K IR Input for setting gain.
3 T1 ITR Time 1. Input for time constant for lead.
4 T2 ITR Time 2. Input for time constant for lag.
5 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking.
6 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when tracking.
7 OHL IR Output High Limit.Input for lower limit value.
8 OLL IR Output Low Limit.
10 O OR Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output O reaches the upper limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output O reaches the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set to 1 if OHL is less than
OLL.
T1
K
T2

Function The step response for a PDP function is:

K
O(t) = I(t)(K + k1e-tòT2) where
t
k1 = K(T1/T2-1) T2

Figure 2. Step Response.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 73

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The transfer function for a PDP IgIGI

function is:
IgK
G(s) = K(1 +sT1)/(1 +sT2) where

T2<T1 Ig ω
1 1
This has been implemented in the PDP T1 T2
element as a recursive algorithm. The G
design of this algorithm is such that -90
normal functioning is maintained even
during limiting. This ensures a Ig ω
controlled return to a dynamic state.
Figure 3. Bode Diagram.
Gain, Time Certain constants are precalculated to
make the execution time of the element as short as possible. The
Constants and
results are stored internally in the element. These constants are
Sampling Time recalculated if T1, T2 or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their
previous value, or if the sampling time TS is changed. When
recalculating, a test is performed to check whether T1 and T2 > 2 x
TS. If not, T1 or T2 respectively is set
equal to 2 x TS.
Tracking
If BAL is set to 1, the regulator
immediately goes into tracking and the OHL

output O is set to value of the input

t
BALREF. If the value at BALREF
exceeds the output signal limits, the Figure 4. Function in
output is set to the limit value. Return to Limiting State.
dynamic state is bumpless.

Limitation Function The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the
inputs OHL for the upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual
value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls
below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. The element
checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit
value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status
persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the value they had
in the sample before the error occurred. After an error, the return to a
dynamic state is bumpless, as in the case of tracking.

10 - 74 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

PI-Function PI

Summary PI (Proportional Integrating regulator) is

F1
PI
REVACT O 10
used as a standard PI-regulator for serial 1 REFV O=HL 11
compensation in feed back systems. The 2 I O=LL 12
control deviation is calculated internally in 3 K ERR 13
the element. The output signal can be 4 TI DEV 14

limited to limits specified at special inputs. 5 RINT

6
The balancing function permits the output 7 BAL BALREF
signal to track an external reference and 8 OHL
permits a bumpless return to normal 9 OLL t
function. All transfers from balancing
limited output signal are bumpless. Figure 1.

Call PI

Call Parameters Table 1.

No Name Type Description
F1 REVACT IB REVerse ACTion. Parameter input for inverted
control action. REVACT = 1 gives inverted
control action.
1 REFV IR REFerence Value. Input for desired value.
2 I OR Input. Input for actual value.
3 K IR Input for setting gain.
4 T1 ITR Time Integration. Input for time constant for
integration.
5 RINT IB Reset INTegrator. Input for clearing integrator.
6 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking
7 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when tracking.
8 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper limit.
9 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit.
10 O OR Output Signal.
11 O=HL OB Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output O reaches the upper limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output reaches the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
14 DEV OR DEViation. Output for control deviations, i.e.
DEV = 1-REFV.
Function
DEV, the control deviation, is calculated as follows even when the
Control
regulator is tracking: DEV = 1-REFV.
Deviation

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 75

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Inverted Control REVACT is a function parameter which

Effect controls the direction of the output signal 2K
change in relation to the actual value. If K
REVACT is set to 0, direct action occurs, i.e. t
increasing actual value gives increasing T1

output signal. When REVACT is set to 1, Figure 2. Step

inverted action occurs, i.e. increasing actual Response.
value gives decreasing output signal.

Transfer The PI function can be written in the time plane as:

Function
O(t) = K(DEV(t) + òtDEV(τ)/TI d τ)

Its main property when controlling is that it permits the integral

section to retain its value when the error DEV(t) = 0, i.e. the output
signal is then constant.

The transfer function for a PI function is:

G(s) = K(1 + 1/sTI)

This has been implemented in the PI element as a recursive

algorithm.

Gain, Integration The constant K x TS/TI is IgIGI

Time Constant precalculated to make the

execution time of the element
and Sampling IgK
as short as possible. The
Time result is stored internally in the Ig ω
1
element. This constant is
T1
recalculated if TI or K is
changed more than 1/128 of G
Ig ω
the preceding value or if the
45
sampling time TS is changed.
When the value is -90
recalculated, a test is Figure 3. Bode Diagram.
performed to ensure that
TS/TI < 1. If not, TS/TI is set
to 1.

10 - 76 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Clearing of The integration section of the algorithm is cleared when RINT goes to
Integrator 1. If the proportional section of the algorithm exceeds the limits of the
output signal, the limit status remains and the internal status is
updated in accordance with the section "Bumpless transfer from
tracking or limitation". When RINT is set permanently to 1, the
element functions as a P-regulator.

Clearing of The integration section of the algorithm is cleared when RINT goes to
Integrator 1. If the proportional section of the algorithm exceeds the limits of the
output signal, the limit status remains and the internal status is
updated in accordance with the section "Bumpless transfer from
tracking or limitation". When RINT is set permanently to 1, the
element functions as a P-regulator.

Tracking If BAL is set to 1, the regulator immediately goes into tracking and the
output O follows the value of the input BALREF. If the value at
BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the
applicable limit value. On return to a normal function the value to the
output O during the last sample in tracking remains during one
sample time. See below under "Bumpless transfer from tracking or
limiting".

Limitation The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the
Function inputs OHL for upper limit value and OLL for the lower limit value. If
the actual value exceeds the upper limit value, the output O = HL is
set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit value, the output O = LL is set
to 1. The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater
than the lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1.
While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL. O = LL and O
retain the values they had in the sample before the error occurred.

Bumpless Transfer from following status (BAL = 1) or from a limited output

Transfer from signals is bumpless. This is performed by recalculation of internal
states, i.e. the integration part according to INT(t) = O(t) - K x DEV(t).
Following or
Limitation

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 77

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

8 O HL
9 OLL

A CT
O 10
6 BA L
A CT
7 B AL RE F
I1 O = HL 11
I1 > I2
F1 REVACT I2
A CT + I1 O = LL 12
1 R E FV P I1 < I2
+ I2
2 I
I1 E RR 13
3 K t I I1 < I2
I2

4 TI t Lim iting

5 R IN T 1
A CT
R e se t
Pr es et
Alg orit hm

D E V 14

Figure 4. Function Diagram.

10 - 78 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

PII Regulator PII

Summary PII (Proportional Integrating regulator with

2
PII
I O 10
Integer calculation) is used as a PI-regulator 3 K O=HL 11
for serial compensation in the closed loop 4 T1 O=LL 12
control system where the 16 bit integer 5 RESET ERR 13
representation of the parameters and signals is 6 BAL OPI 14

sufficient. Control deviation is an input signal to 7 BALREF

8 OHL
the controller. The output signal can be limited 9 OLL
to limits specified by input parameters. The
Tracking function forces the output signal to
follow an external reference. The transfers Figure 1.
from Tracking to normal function with PI
algorithm is bumpless. Integer calculation inside the element is done
with 32 bit resolution (using long Integers) to assure the adequate
regulation accuracy.

Call PII

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
2 I II Input deviation. -32767...+32767
3 KI II Proportional gain 0...+32767(%)
4 TI II Time Integration constant 0...32767 (ms)
5 RESET IB RESET the regulator outputs
OPI and O to “0”.
6 BAL IB BALance. Forcing the output
OPI to follow the input
reference
7 BALREF II BALance REFerence input 32767...+32767
8 OHL II Output High Limit. -32767...+32767
9 OLL II Output Low Limit. -32767...+32767
10 O OI Regulator Output signal. -32767...+32767
11 O=OHL OB Output signal On High Limit
12 O=OLL OB Output signal On Low Limit.
13 ERR OB ERRor. OHL is less than OLL .
14 OPI OI Output of PI controller before -32767...+32767
limits.

Gain and The calibration of the Proportional Gain KI is in "%". It means that
value KI = 100 corresponds to a multiplication factor of 1.0 (100%).
Integration Time
The calibration of the Integration Time Constant TI is directly in
Constant millisecond.
Calibration

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 79

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Transfer Function P and I parts of the controller are

calculated independently. 2K

K
The PI function can be written in the time
plane as: t
T1
t Figure 2. Step
O(t) = KI ∗[ I(t)+ò(1/TI) ∗I(t)∗dt]
Response.
0
The transfer function of the PI function is:
G(s) = KI∗[1+1/(s∗TI)]
This has been implemented in the PII IgIGI

element with a recursive algorithm. The

basic form of this algorithm is: IgK

1. INT(k) = INT(k-1) + KI∗I(k)∗TS/TI Ig ω

1
2. = KI ∗I(k) +INT(k)
T1

where: G
Ig ω
• TS is an execution interval of the 45
controller
-90
• INT is the integral component.
Figure 3. Bode Diagram.
Clearing the When the RESET input signal is set to 1
he output of controller is reset to 0 if. The Integrator part of regulator
Requlator Output
can be cleared by setting input TI to 0. When TI is set again to value
other than 0 is transfer bumpless.

Limitation Function The OLL and OHL inputs provide the minimum and maximum limit
values for the controller output signal. If the actual value exceeds the
maximum limit value, then output "O=HL" is set to 1 and if it falls
below the minimum limit value,then output "O=LL" is set to 1. The
Element also compares OHL with OLL. If OLL value is greater then
OHL then the ERR output is set to 1. While the error status persists,
the output limits "O=HL", "O=LL" retain the previously accepted
values .

Tracking When BAL input is set to "1" the regulator "O" output is forced to
follow the REFerence value from the BALREF input. If the BALREF
signal exceeds the output limits, the output is set to the applicable
limit value.

10 - 80 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Bumpless Transfer The transfer from Tracking mode is bumpless. This is achieved by
internal recalculation of the integration part in the tracking mode
between Tracking
according to:
and Normal Mode
INT(k) = O(k)- KI∗I(k)
There is no explicit feature in the regulator to support directly the
bumpless transfer to the tracking mode. However such function can
be easily implemented, by using the external FB (like e.g. RAMP
element) to back feed the "O "output of the controller to its BALREF
input.

Figure 4. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 81

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

PIP-Function PIP

Summary PIP (Proportional Integrating Proportional) 1

PIP
I O 10
is used to give a proportional effect and a 2 K O=HL 11
limited integration effect. The output signal 3 T1 O=LL 12
in the steady state is proportional to the 4 T2 ERR 13
input signal. The output signal can be 5 BAL

limited with limit values specified at special 6 BALREF

7 OHL
inputs. The balancing function permits the OLL
8
output signal to follow an external
reference and permits a bumpless return t
to the normal function. All transfers from
static states are bumpless. Figure 1.

Call PIP

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I II Input. Input for actual value.
2 K II Input for setting gain.
3 T1 II Time 1. Input for time constant for lead.
4 T2 IB Time 2. Input for time constant for lag.
5 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of following.
6 BALREF II BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when following.
7 OHL II Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value.
8 OLL II Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value.
10 O OI Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output O is limited to the upper limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output=Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the
output O is limited to the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
Function
Transfer The step response in the time plane for the PIP function is:
Function The transfer function for a PIP function is:
This has been implemented in the PIP element as a recursive
function.

10 - 82 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Gain, Time Certain constants are precalculated to make the execution time of the
elements as short as possible. The result is stored internally in the
Constant and
element. These constants are recalculated if T1, T2 or K are changed
Sampling Time by more than 1/128 of their previous value or if the sampling time TS
is changed. When recalculating a test is performed to check if T1 and
T2 ≥ 2 x TS. If this is not the case, T1 or T2 respectively is set equal
to 2 x TS.

Following If BAL is set to 1, the regulator immediately goes into following and
the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at
BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the limit
value concerned. Return to dynamic state is bumpless.

Limitation Function The limitation functions limits the output signal to the values at the
inputs OHL for the upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual
value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1 and if it
falls below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1.

When the limitation status has been detected, a check is made each
time the element is executed to determine whether K x I (t) exceeds
the output signal limitations. Is such is the case, the limitation status
remains. If not, the calculated of the output signal is performed by the
algorithm in the normal way.

Normal updating of the internal status is sufficient to ensure

bumpless return to the dynamic status. The element checks that the
upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If this
is not the case, the output ERR is set to 1.

While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O

retain the values they had in the sample before that in which the error
occurred. After an error the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, in
the same way as in the case of following.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 83

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Pointer to next PC element POINT

Summary POINT PC element provides information about 1

POINT
USE_DPM PODEP 3
the absolute code and data locations of the next 2 IDENT POLOP 4
PC element. It is intended for debugging new ERRC 99
PC elements during their development. If the
“next” PC element is known to be error free, Figure 1.
POINT is a rather useless PC element. (except
e.g. for educational purpose: to show how AC80 memory domains
are relocating during online changes). POINT is available only if you
have enabled “Toolbox option” of AC80.

Call POINT

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 USE_DPM IB Are the result stored in DPM or not.
2 IDENT II Index, where to store the results (1...15)
3 PODEP IL The absolute start address of next PC element
instance.
4 POLOP IL The absolute start address of POLO for these
PC elements.
99 ERRC I EERor Code.

Function The PC element shows currently used absolute addresses of the next
PC element in the output pins and additionally may store these
results DualPortMemory area (starting from DPM offset 0x7F80 = 64
bytes from the bottom of DPM).

If the result values are stored in DPM, you may have 15 POINT
blocks in various places of your application program without results
overwriting. This is accomplished with specifying unique IDENT value
for each POINT instance.

10 - 84 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The DPM contents (which may be read from NCB side with
appropriate tools (e.g.DriveDebug) are:

Offset # Content
0x7F80 PODEP of POINT(ident = 1)
0x7F84 POLOP of POINT(ident = 1)
0x7F88 PODEP of POINT(ident = 2)
0x7F8C POLOP of POINT(ident = 2)
0x7F90 PODEP of POINT(ident = 3)
0x7F94 POLOP of POINT(ident = 3)
0x7F98 PODEP of POINT(ident = 4)
0x7F9C POLOP of POINT(ident = 4)
0x7FA0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 5)
0x7FA4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 5)
0x7FA8 PODEP of POINT(ident = 6)
0x7FAC POLOP of POINT(ident = 6)
0x7FB0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 7)
0x7FB4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 7)
0x7FB8 PODEP of POINT(ident = 8)
0x7FBC POLOP of POINT(ident = 8)
0x7FC0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 9)
0x7FC4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 9)
0x7FC8 PODEP of POINT(ident = 10)
0x7FCC POLOP of POINT(ident = 10)
0x7FD0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 11)
0x7FD4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 11)
0x7FD8 PODEP of POINT(ident = 12)
0x7FDC POLOP of POINT(ident = 12)
0x7FE0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 13)
0x7FE4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 13)
0x7FE8 PODEP of POINT(ident = 14)
0x7FEC POLOP of POINT(ident = 14)
0x7FF0 PODEP of POINT(ident = 15)
0x7FF4 POLOP of POINT(ident = 15)
0x7FF8 not used
0x7FFC interrupt handshaking locations
If USE_DPM = 0, the results are not stored to DPM, but available
only in output pins PODEP and POLOP. However, even then IDENT
must be in range 1...15.

If IDENT = 0, the POINT does nothing.

If IDENT >15, ERRC is set = 1, no values written to DPM, and output

pins PODEP and POLOP set = 0xFFFFFFFF.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 85

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Typical usage of POINT is such, that the result values of POINT can
be entered as input values to some other debugging tools. E.g. XRAY
or DriveDebug. In case of DriveDebug, the values may be read by
the tool itself from the DPM (see the address list above, and
remember conversion rules:

“DPM is in Y-address range.

Divide the AC80-side DPM offset by 2, and add thereafter 0x2000,

then you have respective absolute DPM address for NCB-side.”

10 - 86 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Printer Control PC element PRTCON

Summary The PRTCON element transfers event data PRTCON

F=1-F1 PRT_ID ERR 10
from the specified event logger through F=1-F2 LOGNR BUTTONS 11
AC80’s ModBus-protocol panel/printer link 1 RESET STATUS 12
and NAPI-01 Alarm Printer Interface unit to 2 CNTRL ERRC 99
a standard matrix printer (e.g OKI Microline
280). The NAPI-01 unit has two functions: It Figure 1.
converts the RS-485 level ModBus signals
to parallel Centronics (TTL) signals. In addition it converts the
ModBus protocol messages, which PRTCON has sent and the binary
time stamp of the events to ASCII format for printing

Event data consists of date, time, event type, code and text ( max 20
characters ). The printer interface converts event data to one row of
printout characters.

Call PRTCON

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
F1 PRT_ID II Station number of the printer. 1...15
F2 LOGNR II LOGger NumbeR. 1...8
1 RESET IB Clear the error code. 0...1
2 CNTRL II CoNTRoL of PRTCON operation.
10 ERR OB ERRor indication output.
11 BUTTONS OI Feedback from the printer.
12 STATUS OI PRTCON opeation STATUS.
99 ERRC OI ERRor Code.

PRTCON PRTCON generates, when executed, a printer message if the event

logger contains an event, which has not yet been output. PRTCON
Operation
writes the message to the ModBus-protocol panel/printer link handler,
which sends it to printer interface (NAPI-01) unit. The interface unit
returns an acknowledgement, if the message was transferred
successfully, and if the unit was able to receive it. (=no older
messages still printing) PRTCON acknowledges in turn the event
record in the event logger.

PRTCON generates event messages in order starting from the oldest

not acknowledged message (FIRST) to the newest not acknowledged
(LAST). When the LAST message has been generated and
acknowledged, PRTCON remains inactive waiting for the logger to
write a new event.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 87

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

The panel/printer link ModBus-protocol software operates cyclically at

fixed intervals. It takes one transmission cycle to output a message to
the printer.

To reduce ModBus load the cycle time of PRTCON should be longer

than 400 ms.

Control Terminal Terminal F1 (PRT_ID) is the node number on ModBus of the printer
interface module.
Functions
PRT_ID should match the node number (1 to 15) set on the module.
In case no printer with corresponding station number is active on the
panel link, ERR is set and the error code 2xx05 (no response from
printer) is output on ERRC.

Note: Printer interface units are delivered with default station address
= 15.

Terminal F2 (LOGNR) is number of the logger (1..8) from which

PRTCON fetches messages to be transferred.

Terminal 1 (RESET) resets on 0 ->1 the error code and the ModBus
driver interface.

Terminal 2 (CNTRL) consist of bits to control special operations

Bit #0
• 0 => normal operation, messages are generated for new events
• 1 => reprint operation, send logger messages to the printer from
the oldest (LAST+1) to the newest (LAST) when changed ->1.

Bit #1

• 2 => print without acknowledgements

• 0 => normal operation = acknowledgement after printing.

Terminal 3 (ERR) is set if

• no event logger has been defined (by EVTLOG)
• the ModBus handler returns error
(e.g. on no response from the panel link).

Printer Messages PRTCON transfers following data to the printer interface module.

Date and time:

• as 2 long integers according to Advant time definition.

10 - 88 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Event type:
• 1 = system error (originated by system SW)
• 2 = boolean (change) event (originated by PC element EVT or
EVENT)
• 3 = error coded event (originated by PC element ERROR)
• 4 = drive event (not implemented)

Drive number:
• drive ID, where the event occurred (with drive events only)

Text:
• application specific descriptive text (max. 20 characters)

Code:
• original error code (in case of “error” type event)

Event type numbers are converted to character strings:

• 1 = SYS
• 2 = EVT
• 3 = ERR
• 4 = DR#

As said earlier, there are two kinds of boolean (change) events.

EVENT PC element records such event, when a boolean signal
becomes TRUE, whereas EVT element records both edges of the
boolean signal. Changes from 0 to 1 are symbolized with + sign and
changes from 1 to 0 with - sign.

EVENT and EVT events are thus typically different so that EVENT
text is without leading + or - sign, but EVT text has always a leading +
or - (Note that if the programmer has put + character in the beginning
of his text, which he assigned to EVENT- element, it will be printed as
if the same same text came from EVT without “+” character in the
programmed text.

Note also that only 19 first characters of the EVT text will be shown
on panels and printed by PRTCON. The reason is, that the text in
event logger may be only 20 characters long, and the leading + or -
takes one character position.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 10 - 89

 Chapter 10 - PC Element Descriptions

Formatting of Each line consist of fields:

• type TYP(3), drive number DD(2), text XXXX(20), code CC(5),
Printer Output
date DD(8), time TT(12)
Lines
There is a separating space between all fields except type and drive
number.
SR|TYPDD|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|CCCCC|DDDDDDDD|TTTTTTTTTTTT
See example below:
SYS System error 23 99-03-25 12:31:57.202
EVT High Temperature 99-03-25 12:31:59.289
EVT +High Load 99-03-25 12:31:59.289
EVT -High Load 99-03-25 12:31:59.289
ERR PC elem error 12345 99-03-25 12:31:57.202
DR#07 Overcurrent 99-03-25 12:31:57.202
DR#11 Overcurrent 99-03-25 12:31:57.202

Error Codes Table 2.

Error # Description
2xx01 PANBUS DB element missing.
2xx02 No more available node control blocks.
2xx03 No more available buffers.
2xx04 Attempted to delete non-existing buffer. (This should never
happen.)
2xx05 Eventlogger not found.
2xx10 ModBus handler not found.
2xx11 Illegal size of ModBus buffer.
2xx12 Access to ModBus block denied.
2xx13 Error response from the printer.
2xx14 No response from the printer.
2xx15 Station too busy to handle message (cannot be detected).
Where xx is equal to 50 + node number (1...15).

10 - 90 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Chapter 11 - PC ELEMENTS from R to X

Ramp Generator RAMP

Summary RAMP (RAMP generator) is used to limit 1

RAMP
I O 10
the rate of change of a signal. The output 2 STEP+ O = HL 11
signal can be limited with (limit) values 3 STEP- O = LL 12
specified at special inputs. The balancing 4 SLOPE+ ERR 13
function permits the output signal to track 5 SLOPE-

an external reference. 6 BAL

7 BALREF
8 OHL
9 OLL
t
Call RAMP
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for the start value.
2 STEP+ IR The greatest allowed positive STEP change.
3 STEP- IR The greatest allowed negative STEP change.
4 SLOPE+ IR Positive ramp for the output.
5 SLOPE- IR Negative ramp for the output.
6 BAL IB BALance. Input for activation of tracking
mode.
7 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference
value in tracking mode.
8 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value.
9 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value.
10 O OR Output. Output signal.
11 O=HL OB Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output reaches the higher limit value.
12 O=LL OB Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if
the output reaches the lower limit value.
13 ERR OB ERRor is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL

Function The main property of the RAMP element is that the output signal
tracks the input signal, while the input signal is not changed more
than the value specified at the step inputs.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 1

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

If the input signal change is greater than the specified step changes,
the output signal is first changed by STEP+ or STEP- depending on
the direction of change, and then by SLOPE+ or SLOPE- per second,
until the values at the input and output are equal. This means that if
STEP- = STEP+ = 0, a pure ramp function i.e. SLOPE/sec is
obtained at the output. The greatest step change allowed at the
output O is specified with the inputs STEP+ and STEP- for the
respective direction of change. The ramp which the output signal is to
track, if the change at the input I exceeds STEP+ or STEP-, is
specified with the inputs SLOPE+ and SLOPE-.

All parameters are specified as absolute values with the same unit as
input I. The values of the parameters are stored internally in the
element. New values are only entered under stationary conditions,
i.e. when I(t) = O(t). Certain constants are precalculated to make the
execution time of the element as short as possible. The results are
stored internally in the element. These constants are recalculated if
SLOPE+ or SLOPE- values are changed or if the cycle time TS is
changed. Figure 3 shows the relationship between input, output and
internal auxiliary variables when the element functions normally.

Calculation of When calculating the output signal O, three cases must be

distinguished (see Figure 2):
Output Signal
• If I(t) = O(t-TS), then O(t) = I(t)
• If I(t) > O(t-TS), then the change of the output O value is limited
as follows:

An internal auxiliary variable VPOS follows the input I value with the
maximum rate of change defined by SLOPE+. If the input I value is
greater than VPOS + STEP+, the output O value is limited to the
value VPOS + STEP+. If the input I value is less than VPOS +
STEP+ the output O value is set to be equal to I.
• If I(t) < O(t-TS), then the change of the output O value is limited
as follows:

An internal auxiliary variable VNEG follows the input I value, with the
maximum rate of change defined by SLOPE-. If the input I value is
less than VNEG - STEP-, the output O value is limited to the value
VPOS - STEP-. If the input I value is greater than VNEG - STEP- the
output O value is set to be equal to I.

11 - 2 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

VNEG(t) = O(t)

STEP-
SLOPE+ * TS SLOPE- * TS
I(t)
VNEG(t)
STEP+

O(t)
O(t)

SLOPE+ * TS VPOS(t) = O(t)

I(t) O(t)
STEP+ VPOS(t)

I(t) < STEP-

TS

Figure 2. Relation between Input, Output and Auxiliary

Variables under Normal Conditions.

Tracking Mode If the input BAL is set to 1, the filter immediately goes into tracking
mode and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the
value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to
the applicable limit value. During tracking mode VPOS = VNEG = O =
BALREF. Return to normal operation is done as if an unit step had
occurred at the input.

Limitation The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the
Function inputs OHL for upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual
value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls
below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. In the limiting
state, VPOS(t), VNEG(t) and O(t) are set to the applicable limit value.
The element checks that upper limit value OHL is greater than the
lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the
error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the
values they had in the execution cycle before the error occurred.
8 OHL
9 OLL

ACT
O 10
7 BAL ACT
6 BALREF
I1 O =HL 11
I 1 > I2
I2
I1 O = LI 12
I 1 < I2
I2
I1 ERR 13
I 1 < I2
I2

1 I
2 ST EP+ SLOPE+
3 ST EP- VPOS
1 sec
4 SLOPE+ STEP+
5 SLOPE- t
STEP- VNEG
1 sec
SLOPE-

Figure 3. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 3

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

S-RAMP Generator RAMP-S1

Summary RAMP-S1 (S-RAMP reference generator) 1

RAMP-S1
I O 21
element provides the signal ramp function with 2 OHL DVDT 22
the first and second derivative values 3 OLL ERR 23
limitation. Typically used as a speed reference 4 MAXSLP ENDSPH 24
ramp to generate the output (speed reference) 5 STME

signal with smooth "rounded" transitions. 6 MAXSLPF

7 STMEF
Recommended whenever the acceleration MAXSLPE
8
(torque) rate of change has to be limited. 9 STMEE
10 HOLD
11 HOLDS
12 FASTSTOP
13 EMSTOP
14 BAL
15 O
Call RAMP-S1
Figure 1.
Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input signal.
2 MAXSLOPE IR MAXimum SLOPE. Maximum absolute value
of signal acceleration in "signal units" /seconds
(e.g. in m/s/s). Value "0" connected to this
input is internally substituted by the very small
nonzero value.
3 TMESTRTS IR TiME STaRTS. Time in seconds for the initial
S-phase. The time of second derivative ( =
acceleration) absolute value transition from
zero to the MAXSLOPE value.
4 TMEENDS IR TiME ENDS. Time in seconds for the end S-
phase. The time of second derivative
( = acceleration) absolute value transition from
the MAXSLOPE value to zero.
5 ENDSLIM IR ENDS LIMit. Limit that determines the
characteristics of the S-ramp in the end phase
in terms of the under/overshoot.
6 BALREF IB BALance REFerence. Input for reference
value for tracking mode.
7 BAL IR BALance. Forcing the tracking mode in which
the Output "O" value follows the BALREF input
value.
8 HOLD IR HOLD. Instantaneous freezing of the output
"O" value. Ramping stopped.
9 HOLDS IR HOLD with S function. Forced termination of
the ramping concluded with the end S-phase.

11 - 4 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
No Name Type Description
10 HYST OR HYSTeresis. The Hysteresis for the stationary
state of the ramp. The Ramp function is not
activated as long as the "DIFF" output value is
within the Hysteresis value.
11 OHL OB Output High Limit. Affects the "I", "O" and
"BALREF " signals.
12 OLL OB Output Low Limit. Affects the "I","O" and
"BALREF " signals.
21 ERR OB ERRor. Set to "1" when the OHL ≤ OLL.
22 O OR S-Ramp Generator Output signal.
23 DIFF OR The DIFFerence between the input "I" and
output "O" signals.
24 DVDT OR DVDT. The actual value of the output signal
first derivative*TS.
(The step of the S-Ramp output per execution
cycle).
25 START OB START. Indication that the Ramp function is
activated.
26 ENDSEC OB END SECtor. Indication of the active end S-
phase of the ramp.

Function The S-ramp function is activated when the absolute value of "DIFF" is
greater then the absolute value of "HYST". The second derivative of
the signal (or in other words the first derivatives rate of change) is
calculated from the parameter "TMSTRTS" and is constant until the
end S-phase is entered. The calculated second derivative is
integrated (accumulated) to a first derivative (DVDT) which is limited
by a parameter MAXSLOPE. DVDT is then integrated (accumulated)
to the output signal "O".

When the S-Ramp is activated, the element continuously recalculates

the conditions that determine switching to the end S-phase. During
the end S-phase the second derivative is calculated continuously to
assure a correct ending of the ramp. The calculated second
derivative is limited in this phase by the "ENDSLIM" input parameter
value. The output of the S-ramp may be overshooting or
undershooting the input "I" setpoint value based on the applied to
"ENDSLIM" input limit function. Normally when no over- or
undershoot is required the "ENSDSLIM" should be connected to the
"DVDT" output.

While the end S-phase is in progress the operation is unaffected by

the changes on the "MAXSLOPE" and "TMEENDS". The Ramp can
force the end S-phase also if the output "O" is calculated to go over
one of the specified limit values "OHL" or "OLL".

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 5

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

The "HOLD" input overrides the normal ramp operation and freezes
the value of the output "O" signal. The "HOLDS" input overrides the
"normal ramping" by forcing the end S-phase. The overriding does
not disturb the end S-phase that had been already in progress when
"HOLDS" input became active.

With the "BAL" input set to "1" the output signal "O" is immediately
forced to follow the signal value from the "BALREF" input. In that
case the "DVDT", "DIFF", "START" and "ENDSEC" outputs are all set
to "0" and the Hold and Hold_S functions blocked. The value of
"BAL" returning to "0" state reactivates the normal ramp function.
"I" (Input signal)

"BAL" = "HOLD" = "HOLDS" = 0

"O" (Output signal)

"TMEENDS" "TMEENDS"
"TMESTRTS" "TMESTRTS"

"DVDT" "MAXSLOPE"TS"

"MAXSLOPE"TS"

Figure 2. Basic Operation of the RAMP-S1 Reference Generator.

"I"(Input signal)

"O"(Output signal)

"BALREF"

"DV/DT"

"HOLD" t

"HOLD" t

"BAL" t

Figure 3. Effect of the Forcing Signals on the Operation of the RAMP-

S1 Generator.

11 - 6 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

S-RAMP Generator RAMP-SSH

Summary The PC element RAMP-SSH generates an 1

RAMP-SSH
I O 21
S-haped output signal when reaching the level 2 OHL DVDT 22
of the input signal. 3 IOLL ERR 23
4 MAXSLP ENDSPH 24
5 STME
6 MAXSLPF
7 STMEF
8 MAXSLPE
9 STMEE
10 HOLD
11 HOLDS
12 FASTSTOP
13 EMSTOP

Call RAMP-SSH 14 BAL

15 BALREF

Connections Table 1.
Figure 1.

No Name Type Description

1 I IR Input. Input for the start value concerned.
2 OHL IR Output High Limit. Input for upper high limit.
3 OLL IR Output Low Limit. Input for lower high limit.
4 MAXSLP IR MAXimum SLoPe. Maximum acceleration in the
linear phase of the ramp, at normal run.
5 STME ITR S-TiME. S-time for normal run.
6 MAXSLPF IR MAXimum SLoPe emergency stop. Maximum
acceleration in the linear phase of the ramp, at
Faststop.
7 STMEF ITR S-TiME Faststop. S-time for faststop.
8 MAXSLPE IR MAXimum SLoPe Emergency stop. Maximum
acceleration in the linear phase of the ramp, at
emergency stop.
9 STMEE ITR S-TiME Emergency. S-time for emergency stop.
10 HOLD IB HOLD. Instantaneous stop of the ramp.
11 HOLDS IB HOLD with S. Stop O the ramp with a s-phase.
12 FASTSTOP IB FASTSTOP. Faststop of the ramp.
13 EMSTOP IB EMergency STOP. Emergency stop of the ramp.
14 BAL IB BALance. Input for activating following.
15 BALREF IR BALance REFerence. Input for reference value
when following.
21 O OR Output. Output signal.
22 DVDT OR DVDT, (dv/dt) / (cycle time).
23 ERR OB ERRor. Error signal which is set at error
conditions.
24 ENDSPH OB END-S PHase. Signal which indicate end-s
phase of the ramp function.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 7

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Execution time, max 1.0 ms

Data
Memory requirement object code
• PC statement 68 bytes
• Local data area 54 bytes

Function The s-ramp generator has facilities such as:

• operates with both positive and negative reference signals.
• orders for forced breaking a down to zero of the output signal.
• forcel setting if the end-s when the input signal is exceeding the
limits.
• adaptation of d2V/dt2 in the end s-phase to reduce no of
overshoots.
• following of a reference without any s-ramp function. Bumpless
transition when switching between input references I and
BALREF.

The s-ramp generator is activated when the input signal I ∩ output

signal ∩. The ramp starts with the starts-s phase continued with the
linear phase and finish with the end-s phase, in the end-s phase is
the output signal ENDSPH set to true. Depending on the size of the
difference of I and O the linear phase is not always executed.

HOLD and HOLDS is used to stop the s-ramp generator. HOLD stop
the s-ramp momentarily without any s-function and HOLDS stops the
s-ramp with an s-function.

FASTSTOP and EMSTOP are conditions to break down the output

signal O to zero. When FASTSTOP or EMSTOP order is released,
the s-ramp generator is activated again. The EMSTOP order has
higher priority than FASTSTOP.

When the input BAL is set to true the s-ramp generator is activated
until the output signal O has reached the level of the input signal
BALREF. Then the output signal is following BALREF. The s-ramp
generator is activated when BAL is set to false. It is recommended
that the function which generate the BALREF input signal is executed
with the same cyclicity as RAMP-SSH.

When the s-ramp generator is activated to reach the level of the

BALREF reference, it is recommended that the parameter STME is
set to a minimum value and the parameter MAXSLP is set to a
maximum value.

11 - 8 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

O I BALREF
OHL

OLL

DVDT

ENDSPH
HOLD
HOLDS
FASTSTOP
EMSTOP
BAL

Figure 2. Timing Diagram of the Ramp Function at HOLd and HOLDS

Order.

O I BALREF
OHL

OLL

DVDT

ENDSPH
HOLD
HOLDS
FASTSTOP
EMSTOP
BAL

Figure 3. Timing Diagram of the Ramp Function at FASTSTOP

EMSTOP and BAL Order.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 9

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Register REG

REG (C1,C2)
Summary REG (REGister) is used as a 1 S
memory element. The value of 2 > L
the data can be integer, real 3 R
numbers, Boolean or time.
11 I1 12
13 I2 14

9+2xC2 IC2 10+2xC2

Call REG (C1,C2)

Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs and outputs 1...35

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for loading of new data each time
the element is executed. When S is set to 0,
the last data loaded remains.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of data to the
register. Loading is performed when L goes
to 1.
3 R IB Reset. Input for clearing the register. R
prevents all further entry while it is 1.
11 I1 IC1 Input 1. Input data to position 1.
12 O1 OC1 Output 1. Output data from position 1.
13 I2 IC1 Input 2. Input data to position 2.
14 O2 OC1 Output 2. Output data from position 2.
9+2∗C2 IC2 IC1 Input C2. Input data to position C2.
10+2∗C2 OC2 OC1 Output C2. Output data from position C2.

Function When input L becomes 1, the register is loaded with data from inputs
I1 .. IC2. Data previously in the register is owerwritten. If input S is
set, loading is performed each time the element REG is executed.
When S is reset, the data most recently loaded remains until the
element is executed again, with input S, L or R set. Input S overrides
L so that when input S is set, L has no effect.

11 - 10 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Clearing When input R is set, the register is cleared and all further entry is
prevented. R overrides both S and L.

REG
11 I1 O1 12
I1 O1
1 S 1
L
2 L >1
>1 R
13 I2 O2 14
I2 O2
L 2
R

9+2xC2 IC2 OC2 10+2xC2

IC2OC2
L C2
3 R
R

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 11

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Group Data Register REG-G

Summary REG-G (REGister - Group data) is used to REG-G(C1,C2

C3,C4,C5)
assemble individual variables to a single 1 S AERR 7
variable of group data type. The data type 2 >L
can be integer, real numbers, Boolean or 3 >WR
4 AWR
time.
5 R
6 EXP

11 I1 O 50
12 I2
10+C2 IC2

Call REG-G (C1,C2,C3,C4,C5) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...30
C3 Selection for expander input EXP 0...1
C4 Number of places in group data for 0...254
expander input
C5 Number of places in group data for 1...255
output

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set. Input for loading new data each time the
element is executed. When S is set to 0, the last
data loaded remains.
2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading data to the
register. Loading is performed when L goes to 1.
3 WR IB WRite. Dynamic input for changing data at the
place specified by AWR.
4 AWR IIL Address WRite. Input for address to the data to
be changed according to WR.
5 R IB Reset. Input for clearing the register. R prevents
entry further all while its 1.
6 EXP IGC4 EXPander input. Input for group data to be linked
with data at inputs I1...IC2.
7 AERR OB Address ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if the
address at AWR is greater than the number of
inputs or is negative.

11 - 12 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
11 I1 IC1 Input 1. Input data to position 1.
12 I2 IC1 Input 2. Input data to position 2.
.
.
.
10 + C2 IC2 IC1 Input C2 Input data to position C2.
50 O OGC1 Output. Output for group data.

Function REG-G combines individual variables of the same data type into a
single group variable. The element has an expander input EXP for a
group variable, which can be used when more than C2 variables are
to be linked together.

Normal Assembly When input S is set, data is continuously assembled at the group
variable of the output. The group variable of the output consists firstly
of group data from the input EXP, and then of the values from the
inputs I1 ... IC2. The element acts as a latch when the input S is
reset. The latest data assembled then remains at the output.

Loading If S is reset and input L goes from 0 to 1, an assembly is performed

to output O during this program cycle, as during normal assembly. If
S or R is set, L has no effect.

Changing of Data One of the ordinary data inputs I1...IC2 is used for changing data at a
specified place in REG-G. The address (integer 1...C2.) of the place
at an Optional at which data is to be changed is stated at the input AWR. The new
Place data value is entered from the input to the specified place when the
input WR goes to 1. If AWR = 0 and the input WR goes to 1, group
data is read from the input EXP to their different places. Places
corresponding to the ordinary inputs are not affected.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 13

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Clearing When input R is set, data at all places in the group register are
cleared and all further entry is prevented. R overrides both S and L.

Supervision The address at the input AWR is checked and if its value is greater
than the number of inputs, or is negative, the error signal output
AERR is set. When an error is detected, AERR is set during one
cycle if input WR is set. No place in the register is affected when an
error occurs.

REG-G REG
1
1 S C 1

2 L 1
R
> 1
6 EXP 2
C 2

C4
C 3

R
11 I1
I1 O 50
C I1
1
R
12 I2
I2
C I2
1
R

10 + C2 IC2
IC2
C IC2
1
R
5 R
0
1

3 WR 2
> 1
C2
A > C2
4 AWR ERR 7
or &
A<0

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

11 - 14 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Monitoring RWM

RWM
Summary RWM (Read-Write Memory monitoring) fetches 1 SEL SIZE 11
information about the APC memory usage. It is AFREE 12
used to reveal memory overrun situations before MFREE 13
SQSTAT 14
they occur.
SYSRWM 20

Figure 1.

Call RWM

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description Values
1 SEL IB SELection of data to output See table 2.
terminal SIZE.
11 SIZE IB SIZE of data selected by input. Bytes or
Fractions
12 AFREE IB Size of the contiguous Area in Fractions
memory that is FREE.
13 MFREE IIL Total number of Memory Fractions
Fractions that is FREE.
14 SQSTAT IB Memory SQueeze (i.e. 0: squeeze
reorganising the memory to ready
maximise the contiguous free <>0: squeeze
area) STATus. requested or
active (internal
squeeze flags)
20 SYSRWM IGC4 Size of the free SYStem Read- Bytes
Write Memory area for DB
elements.

Function The PC element fetches information about the usage of the AC80
memory. The value in output terminal SIZE depends on the value
connected to the input terminal SEL.

Examples:
• 30 = size of task 3 (TADE+PODE+POLO)
• 152 = SIZE OF PODE of task 15.

The other outputs are explained in Table 1.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 15

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Save a Value SAVE

SAVE
Summary SAVE PC element provides means for the 1 EN ERR 10
application program to save reference values or 2 I O 11
other semipermanent values to battery secured 3 DEF ERRC 99

RAM memory, where these values are sustained

over (not extensive) power breaks. The saved
Figure 1.
value is automatically fetched into output pin of
SAVE block during power up of AC80 station.

Call SAVE (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 EN IB ENable recording of present input value.
2 I IC1 Input value to be stored.
3 DEF IC1 DEFault value (in case stored value is lost, and
EN=1)
10 ERR OB ERRor indicator.
11 O OC1 Output value (=saved value)
99 ERRC I ERRor Code.

Error Codes Table 3.

Error # Description
28020 Saved values lost during power off period.
28021 Saved value not found (although other saved values are
O.K.)
28022 All storage space used.

11 - 16 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Function The SAVE PC-element reads the value saved in battery backup RAM
to the output O, if the input EN = 0. If the input EN = 1, SAVE writes
the input value from I to battery backup RAM and copies it also to
output O.

The output ERR is set = 1, if the contents of battery backup RAM

area was changed during power off period (and EN has not been =
1). In such case the DEF value is set to output O.

The other possible reason for ERR = 1 is such case, there are too
many SAVE instances. The battery backup area in RWM is sufficient
for 100 SAVE blocks (= for 100 saved values)

Note: Using SAVE blocks in AC80 does not require any DB element
for specifying the SAVE area. In fact, there is no such DB element
available.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 17

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Shift Register SHIFT

SHIFT (C1,C2)
Summary Shift register SHIFT is used as a shift register of 2 F/B-N
up to 250 positions. Data can be integers, real 3 > C
numbers, Boolean or time. 4 R

11 IF OB 12
13 IB OF 14

Call SHIFT (C1,C2)

Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of positions 2...250

Table 2.
Connections
No Name Type Description
2 F/B-N IB Forward/Backward-N. Input for selection of shift
direction. Shifting is forward when F/B-N=1 and
backward when F/B-N=0.
3 C IB Control. Dynamic input for shifting.
4 R IB Reset. Input for clearing the sift register. All further
shifting is prevented when R=1.
11 IF IC1 Input Forward. Input data with forward shift.
12 OB OC1 Output Backward. Output data with backward shift.
13 IB IC1 Input Backward. Input data with backward shift.
14 OF OC1 Output Forward. Output data with forward shift.

Function
Forward Shift When input C goes to 1 and the input F/B-N is 1, data is shifted
forward in the register and data is read into position 1 from input IF.
Data which was located at output OF before the shifting, is replaced
at the shift forward by data at the next to last position.

Backward Shift When input C goes to 1 and the input F/B-N is 0, data is shifted
backwards in the register and data is read into position C2 from input
IB. Data which was located at output OB before the shifting, is
replaced at the shift backward by data from position 2.

11 - 18 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Clearing The input R clears the shift register and prevents all further reading
into the shift register.

2 F/B-N
FORWARD
&

BACKWARD
3 C &
> 1

11 IF OB 12
1 O
1
R

R 2 BACKWARD

FORWARD

13 IB OF 14
1 O
4 R C2
R

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 19

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Slave Header SLAVEM

Summary SLAVEM (SLAVE Module) is used for structuring a SLAVEM(C1,C2)

PC program. PC elements can be included in a
slave module. Figure 1.

Call SLAVEM (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Identity of execution The second part of the PC item
controlling master header designation of the master
header.
C2 Currently not used

Function The slave header SLAVEM is an element header for a slave module.
The numerical identity of the master header associated with the slave
module is specified with the call parameter C1. Numerical identity of a
master header is the second part of its item designation (e.g. if
master header item designation is PC1.4, the identity number is 4).

The cycle time and the priority of the slave module in relation to other
execution units is determined by the master header (see element
MASTER).

The slave modules within the same master are executed in the order
of the documentation.

Reading variables
from the I/O devices
N orm al execution of
F or all slave m odules
elem ents in all slave
of the rela ted M aster.
m odules.
Writing variables to
the I/O dev ices

11 - 20 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Square Root Element SQRT

SQRT
Summary SQRT (SQuare RooT) is used to calculate the square
1 I O 5
root of a real number. The result can be multiplied by 2 K ERR 6
an optional value.
Figure 1.
Call SQRT

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IR Input. Input for number whose square root is to be
calculated.
2 K IR Input for multiplication factor K.
5 O OR Output. Output for the product of the value at
input K and the square root of the value at input I.
6 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set if the value at input is
negative.

Function The square root of the value at input I is calculated. The result is
multiplied by the value at input K. The product is stored at the output
O.

Supervision If the value at the input I is negative, the error output ERR is set to 1
and value 0 is stored at the output O.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 21

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR

SR
Summary The memory element SR (Set Reset memory) is used as 1 I 5
a memory for Boolean variables. 2 K

Call SR Figure 1.

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set input
2 R IB Reset input which overrides the set input.
5 - OB Output from the memory element.

Function The element output is set (to 1) if the set input is set at the same time
that the reset input is reset (to 0). If the reset input is set, the output is
unconditionally reset.

1 S 5

1 &

2 R

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

11 - 22 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR-AA

1 20
Summary Set Reset with AND set gate and AND reset & S
2
gate PC element is used as a memory element
for Boolean variables. C1
11
& R
12

10+C2
Call SR-AA (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the set gate. 1...9
C2 Number of inputs in the reset gate. 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IB Input to the set function.
2 IB Input to the set function.
.
.
.
C1 IB Input to the set function.
11 IB Input to the set function.
12 IB Input to the reset function.
.
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the reset function.
20 OB Memory element output.

Function The element output O is set to 1 if all the conditions (1...C1) for the
AND set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time at least one of
the conditions (11...C2) for the AND reset gate is not set. If all
conditions for the reset gate are satisfied (all of 11 ...C2 are 1) then
the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides
the set function.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 23

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

1 20
> 1
& &
2
C!
11
12 &
10+C2

Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-AA.

11 - 24 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR-AO

1 20
Summary Set Reset with AND set gate and OR reset gate & S
2
PC element is used as a memory element for
Boolean variables. C1
11
>1 R
12

10+C2
Call SR-AO (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the set gate. 1...9
C2 Number of inputs in the reset gate. 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IB Input to the set function.
2 IB Input to the set function.
.
.
.
C1 IB Input to the set function.
11 IB Input to the set function.
12 IB Input to the reset function.
.
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the reset function.
20 OB Memory element output.

Function The element output O is set to 1 if all the conditions (1...C1) for the
AND set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time none of the
conditions (11...C2) for the OR reset gate is set. If any condition for
the reset gate is satisfied (any of 11 ...C2 is 1) then the output is
unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the set
function.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 25

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

1 20
> 1
& &
2
C!
11
12 1

10+C2

Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-AO.

11 - 26 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR-D

Summary The memory element SR-D (Set Reset memory-Data 1 S 5

input) 2 D
3 >C
4 R

Figure 1.
Call SR-D

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 S IB Set input
2 D IB Data input
3 C IB Clock. Dynamic input for entry of data from the D-
input.
4 R IB Reset input which overrides all other inputs.
5 - OB Output from the memory element.

Function If only the S and R inputs are used, SR-D functions as an ordinary
SR element. When the input R is reset and the input C goes to 1, the
value at the input D is stored at the output 5. When the input R is set,
the output 5 is unconditionally reset, i.e. R overrides the other inputs.

1 S 5
1 S
2 D
&
3 C
> 1
& 1 R

4 R

Figure 2. Function Diagram.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 27

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR-OA

1 20
Summary Set Reset with OR set gate and AND reset gate >1 S
2
PC element is used as a memory element for ...
Boolean variables. C1
11
& R
12
...
10+C2
Call SR-OA (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the set gate. 1...9
C2 Number of inputs in the reset 1...9
gate.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IB Input to the Set function.
2 IB Input to the Set function.
.
.
.
C1 IB Input to the set function.
11 IB Input to the reset function.
12 IB Input to the reset function.
.
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the reset function.
20 OB Memory element output.

Function The element output O is set to 1 if one or more of the conditions (1 to

C1) for the OR set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time one
of the conditions (11 to C2) for the AND reset gate is not set. If all
conditions for the reset gate are satisfied (all of 11 to C2 is 1) then
the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides
the set function.

11 - 28 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

1 20
1 > 1
&
2
C!
11
&
12
10+C2

Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-OA.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 29

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Memory Element SR-OO

1 20
Summary Set Reset with OR set gate and OR reset gate >1 S
2
PC element is used as a memory element for ...
Boolean variables. C1
11
>1 R
12
...
10+C2
Call SR-OA (C1,C2)
Figure 1.
Call Parameters Table 1.
Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Number of inputs in the set gate. 1...9
C2 Number of inputs in the reset gate. 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 IB Input to the Set function.
2 IB Input to the Set function.
.
.
.
C1 IB Input to the set function.
11 IB Input to the reset function.
12 IB Input to the reset function.
.
.
.
10+C2 IB Input to the reset function.
20 OB Memory element output.

Function The element output O is set to 1 if one or more of the conditions (1 to

C1) for the OR set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time none
of the conditions (11 to C2) for the OR reset gate is set. If any
condition for the reset gate is satisfied (any of 11 to C2 is 1) then the
output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the
set function.

11 - 30 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

1 20
1 > 1
&
2
C!
11
1
12
10+C2

Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-OO.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 31

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Subtractor SUB

Summary SUB is used for subtraction of two integers or real 1 - 20

numbers. 2 C1

Figure 1.

Call SUB (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type I, IL, R

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IC1 Input for minuend.
2 - IC1 Input for subtrahend.
20 - OC1 Output for difference.

Function The value at input 2 is subtracted from value at input 1 and the result
is stored at output 20.

Overflow If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the output
is limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.

11 - 32 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Switch SW

Summary SW (SWitch) is used as a SW

(C1,C2)
connection element for data and
1 ACT
has channels with a closing 11 --/- 12
function. The data type can be 21 --/- 22
integer, real number, Boolean or
time. 10xC2+1 --/- 10xC2+2

Figure 1.

Call SW (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR
C2 Number of inputs 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 ACT IB ACTivate. Input for activation of the switch.
When the input is set to 1 the switch is activated.
11 - IC1 Input to channel 1 which is connected to the
output for channel 1 when the switch is
activated.
12 - OC1 Output from channel 1.
21 - IC1 Input to channel 2 which is connected to the
output for channel 2 when the switch is
activated.
22 - OC1 Output from channel 2.
.
.
.
10∗C2+1 - IC1 Input to channel C2 which is connected to the
output for channel C2 when the switch is
activated.
10∗C2+2 - OC1 Output from channel C2.

Function When the control input ACT is 0, the output data is 0 according to the
data type. When ACT is set, data comes from the inputs 11 ..
(10*C2 + 1)

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 33

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Switch - Change Over SW-C

Summary SW-C (SWitch - Changeover) is SW

(C1,C2)
used as a connection element for
1 ACT
up to 9 channels of data with 11 --/- 13
switching functions. The data type 12 --
can be integer, real number, 21 --/- 23
Boolean or time. 22 --

10xC2+1 --/- 10xC2+3

10xC2+2 --

Call SW-C (C1,C2) Figure 1.

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Data type B, I, IL, R, T, TR,
C2 Number of inputs 1...9

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 ACT IB ACTivate. Input for activation of the switch.
When the input is set to 1 the switch is
activated.
11 - IC1 Input to channel 1 which is connected to the
output for channel 1 when the switch is
activated.
12 - IC1 Input to channel 1 which is connected to the
output for channel 1 when the switch is not
activated.
13 - IC1 Output from channel 1.
21 - IC1 Input to channel 2 which is connected to the
output for channel 2 when the switch is
activated.
22 - IC1 Input to channel 2 which is connected to the
output for channel 2 when the switch is not
activated.
23 OC1 Output from channel 2.
.
.
.
10xC2+1 IC1 Input to channel C2 which is connected to the
output for channel C2 when the switch is
activated.

11 - 34 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description
10∗C2+2 - IC1 Input to channel C2 which is connected to the
output for channel C2 when the switch is not
activated.
10∗C2+3 - OC1 Output from channel C2.

Function When the control input ACT is 0, the data from the inputs 12 to
10*C2+2 are connected to the appropriate outputs. When ACT is set,
data comes from the inputs 11 to 10*C2+1.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 35

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Element for Calculation of System Load SYSL

SYSL (C1)
Summary SYSL (SYStem Load) calculates the system
1 MAXL LOAD 5
load. If the system is overloaded this is
2 HYS OVERL 6
indicated. Inputs and outputs for handling of L>ML 7
maximum load may be selected with a call
parameter. Figure 1.

Call SYSL (C1)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Determines whether inputs and outputs 0...1
for the maximum load is to be included in
the element.

Connection Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1* MAXL IR MAXimum Load. Input for maximum system
load.
2* HYS IS HYSteris. Input for hysteresis for maximum
system load.
5 LOAD OR Output for system LOAD in percent.
6 OVERL OB OVERLoad. Output that is set to 1 when the
system is fully loaded.
7* L>ML OB Load>Maximum Load. Input that is set to 1
when the load exceeds the value specified the
input MAXL.
*These connections are only included if the call parameter C1 = 1.

Function If the system is fully loaded the output OVERL is set to 1. The system
load in percent (%) is given at the output LOAD. If the call parameter
C1 has been set to 1 the element will have inputs MAXL and HYS, for
maximum load and hysteresis respectively. When the load MAXL is
exceeded the output L>ML is set to one. L>ML is reset when the load
lowers to below MAXL-HYS. If MAXL the MAXL is used. If MAXL or
HYS is negative the value 0 is used.

11 - 36 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Time and Date Element SYSTIME

SYSTIME
Summary SYSTIME is used to get actual time and date. MILLI 5
SECOND 6
MINUTE 7
HOUR 8
DAY 11
MONTH 12
YEAR 13
Call SYSTIME WEEKDAY 16

Table 2. Figure 1.
Connections
No Name Type Description
5 MILLI OI Output for MILLIsecond (0...999).
6 SECOND OI Output for SECOND (0...59).
7 MINUTE OI Output for MINUTE (0...59).
8 HOUR OI Output for HOUR (0...23).
11 DAY OI Output for DAY of month (1...31).
12 MONTH OI Output for MONTH (1...12).
13 YEAR OI Output for YEAR (>=1990).
16 WEEKDAY OI Output for DAY of WEEK (1...7):
Monday = 1,...,
Sunday = 7

Function Actual system time and date are output at the terminals of the PC
element.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 37

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Threshold Element THRESH-L

Summary THRESH-L (THRESHold - Logic) is used to 1 >=C1 20

determine when more than, or equal to, a 2

given number of Boolean signals are set (to

C2
1).
Figure 1.

Call THRESH-L (C1,C2)

Call Parameters Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 Threshold value 1...C2
C2 Number of inputs 1...19
C2 must be greater than or equal to C1.

Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input for the first Boolean value.
2 - IB Input for the second Boolean value.
.
.
.
C2 - IB Input for the last Boolean value.
20 - OB Output which is set to 1 if C1 or more of the inputs
1...C2 are set.

Function The THRESH-L element is used to determine if more than, or equal

to, a specified number of Boolean values in a group are set to 1. If so,
the output (20) is set.

11 - 38 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Time Delay Off TOFF

Summary Time delay off TOFF (Timer OFF-delay) is used T

1 I /--/ O 5
for Boolean off state delay.
2 TD TE 6

Figure 1.

Call TOFF

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IB Input for start of time delay.
2 TD IT Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m
59.999s.
5 O OB Output. Output which is reset when the preset
time (TD) has elapsed.
6 TE OT Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I
has been reset. When the preset time (TD) has
elapsed, TE stops.

Function The value at the input I is delayed at the output O when the input
value changes from 1...0 in accordance with the time pulse diagram,
figure 2. The output value returns to 1 when the input value changes
from 0 to 1.

Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TOFF with Preset Time 3s.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 39

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Time Delay On TON

Summary Time delay on TON (Timer ON-delay) is used for T

1 I /--/ O 5
Boolean on state delay.
2 TD TE 6

Figure 1.

Call TON

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IB Input for start of time delay.
2 TD IT Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m
59.999s.
5 O OB Output. Output which is set when the preset time
(TD) has elapsed.
6 TE OT Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I
has been set. When the preset time (TD) has
elapsed, TE stops.

Function The value at the input I is delayed at the output O when the input I
value changes from 0...1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram,
figure 2. The output value returns to 0 when the input value changes
from 1...0.

Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TON with Preset Time 3s.

11 - 40 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Time Delay On Retentive TON-RET

Summary TON-RET (Timer delay ON - RETentive) is a T

1 I /--/ O 5
switch-on delay with accumulating time
2 R TE 6
measurement of Boolean variables for use in 3 TD
connection with combinatory expressions. TON-
RET is used for e.g. operational time monitoring. Figure 1.

Call TON-RET

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 I IB Input for start of time delay when the input changes
from 0 to 1. The time circuit maintains its status
even when the input returns to 0.
2 R IB Reset. Input which resets the timer. R must be reset
(to 0) for the timer to function.
3 TD IT Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m
59.999s.
5 O OB Output. Output which is set when the preset time
(TD) has elapsed.
6 TE OT Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I
has been set to 1. When the preset time (TD) has
elapsed, TE stops.

Function The value of the input I is delayed at the output O when the input I
value changes from 0 to 1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram
(figure 2). If the input I value returns to 0, the time which has elapsed
remains in the timer and when the value returns to 1, the time
continues from the value which applied when the input I variable went
to 0. The input R must be reset (to 0) when the timer functions. If R is
set (to 1) both outputs O and TE are reset.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 41

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

1s
= 3s

I
0

1
R
0

1
O
0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TON-RET with Preset Time

3s.

11 - 42 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Trigger Element TRIGG

Summary The triggering element TRIGG is used for reducing 1 >

1
5
impulse times at the start of automatic procedures and
for calculating functions.
Figure 1.

Call TRIGG

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input for start of trigger pulse.
5 - OB Output for trigger pulse.

Function When the input signal is set, the output signal is also set. The output
signal is cleared at the next program cycle, irrespective of the value
of the input signal. For the output signal to be set, the input signal
must have been 0 for the duration of one program cycle. The output
signal from the element may only be used within its own execution
unit, otherwise, detection of it cannot be guaranteed.

Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TRIGG.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 43

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Watchdog for AC80 WDOG80

WDOG80
Summary WDOG80 PC element provides means for the ALIVE 1
application program to be continuously aware of COUNTER 2
running status (=health) of NCB board.
Figure 1.
Call WDOG80

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 ALIVE OB NCB board ALIVE or not.
2 COUNTER OI Contents of NCB watchdog COUNTER in
Dualport Memory.

Function The PC element compares the contents of NCB watchdog counter in

DualPortMemory with the previous value (from last execution time).
If the values are different, the NCB board is considered to be alive
(because NCB should increment the value once per each
millisecond) and ALIVE is set = 1. Or if the values are same, ALIVE is
assigned = 0. So the property, how soon WDOG80 can detect death
of NCB board is determined by the cycle time of the CONTRM or
MASTER/SLAVEM, which contains the WDOG80.

Note however, if you put WDOG80 in 2 ms task, that e.g. interrupt

load may cause 2 successive executions of WDOG80 to occur
sometimes with shorter interval. Therefore WDOG80 might indicate
dead NCB now and then for one ececution period.

11 - 44 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

Exclusive Or Gate XOR

Summary XOR (eXclusive OR) is used to generate combinatory 1 = 1 5

expressions with Boolean variables. 2

Figure 1.

Call XOR

Connections Table 1.
No Name Type Description
1 - IB Input.
2 - IB Input.
5 - OB Output.

Function The output signal from the XOR element is 1 if the input signals are
different and 0 if they are equal, see table 2 below.

Table 2. Truth Table of XOR

1 2 5
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements 11 - 45

 Chapter 11 - PC Element Descriptions

11 - 46 AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Chapter 12 -DB Elements from A to P

AI Module AI810,AI820

Summary The AI Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input

hardware module of type AI810 or AI820 contained in an Advant
Fieldbus 100 I/O station. The Data Base element is superior to the
signal elements associated to the analog input channels in the
module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module.

By means of the call name AI810 or AI820 an Engineering Station will

create:
• I Data Base element of type AI module

• 8 (AI810) or 4 (AI820) Data Base elements of type Analog Input

Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_1

AI Module:
AI800_1 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
AI810 TYPE
50Hz GRIDFREQ
4...20mA CONV_PAR

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user AI800_x - Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters
BUS predef 0 - BUS number. Part of -
address.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 1

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
STATION predef STATION number. Part of
address.
POSITION user POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL user 1 B(r) IMPLemented.
0 = the module is spare
1 = the module is
implemented
TYPE predef AI810/ Module TYPE designation.
AI820
GRIDFREQ user 50Hz GRIDFREQuency.
Values: 16 2/3Hz,
50Hz, 60Hz.
CONV_PAR user 4-20mA - CONVersion PARameter. The comma
Default value for the I/O before “LL”
signal elements: in some of
0...20mA, the values
4...20mA, is part of the
0...10V, string value.
2...10V,
0...20mA,LL,
4...20mA,LL,
0...10V,LL,
2...10V,LL.
WARNING system - B(r) WARNING indicates a -
non-fatal error.
ERR system - B(r) ERRor indicates fatal -
errors, such as
configuration errors or
hardware error.
DIAG system - I(r) DIAGnostics.

12 - 2 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

RTD Module AI830

Summary The RTD Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input RTD
hardware module of type AI830 contained in an Advant FieldBus 100
I/O station. The data base element is superior to the signal elements
associated to the RTD input channels in the module and contais
diagnostic information of the I/O module:

By means of the call name AI830 an Engineering Station will create:

• 1 Data Base element of type RTD module

• 8 Data Base elements of type RTD Input

Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_2

RTD Module:
AI800_2 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
AI830 TYPE
50Hz GRIDFREQ
Pt100,850C CONV_PAR

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user AI800_x - Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters
BUS predef 0 - BUS number. Part of -
address.
STATION predef 0 - STATION number. Part of -
address.
POSITION user 0 - POSITION. Part of -
address.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 3

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
IMPL user 1 B(r) IMPLemented.
0 = the module is spare
1 = the module is
implemented
TYPE predef AI810/ Module TYPE designation.
AI820
GRIDFREQ user 50Hz GRIDFREQuency.
Values: 50Hz, 60Hz.
CONV_PAR user 4-20mA - CONVersion PARameter. Modification
Default value for the I/O denied after
signal elements: See the creation.
table “Conversion
Parameters” below.
WARNING system - B(r) WARNING indicates a non -
fatal error.
ERR system - B(r) ERRor indicates fatal
error, such as
configuration errors or
hardware errors.
DIAG system - I(r) DIAGnostics.

Conversion Table 2.
Parameters Value
1
Range Value
1
Range
Pt100,80C -80...80°C Pt100,176F -112...176°F
Pt100,250C -112...250°C Pt100,482F -328...482°F
Pt100,850C -200...850°C Pt100,1562F -328...1562°F
Ni100,180C -60...180°C Ni100,356F -76...356°F
Ni120,260C -80..260°C Ni120,500F -112...500°F
Cu10,260C -100...260°C Cu10,500F -142...500°F
Resistor,400 0...400Ω
1
( ) All values include a comma.

12 - 4 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

TC Module AI835

Summary The TC Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input TC

hardware module of type AI835 contained in an Advant Fieldbus 100
I/O station. The Data Base element is superior to the signal elements
associated to the TC input channels in the module and contains
diagnostic information of the I/O module.

By means of the call name AI835 an Engineering Station will create:

• 1 Data Base element of type TC module
• 8 Data Base elements of type TC Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_3

TC Module:
AI800_3 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
AI835 TYPE
50Hz GRIDFREQ
J,C TC_TYPE
0 CJC
30.0C FJT

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user AI800_x - Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters
BUS predef 0 - BUS number. Part of -
address.
STATION predef 0 - STATION number. Part of -
address.
POSITION user 0 - POSITION. Part of -
address.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 5

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
IMPL user 1 B(r) IMPLemented.
0=the module is spare
Module TYPE designation
1=the module is implemented
TYPE prefed AI835 Module TYPE designation
GRIDFREQ user 50Hz GRIDFREQuency.
Values: 50Hz, 60Hz.
TC_TYPE user J,C - ThermoCouple TYPE. Both for
Default value for the I/O Celsius and
signal elements. Values: See Fahrenheit.
the table “TC-Types” below. Modification
denied after
creation.
CJC user 0 Cold Junction Compensation Modification
Values 0=Cold Junction: denied after
Compensation =Fixed creation.
Junction Compensation
FJT user 30.0C Fixed Junction Temperature.
Values:
-40.0C to 100.0C or
-40.0F to 212.0F.
WARNING system - B(r) WARNING indicates a non -
fatal error.
ERR system - B(r) ERRor indicates fatal errors,
such as configuration errors
or hardware errors.
DIAG system - I(r) DIAGnostics.

TC-Types Table 2.
1 1
Value Range Value Range
B,C 0...1820°C B,F 32...3308°F
C,C 0...2300°C C,F 32...4172°F
E,C -270...1000°C E,F -454...1832°F
J,C -210...1200°C J,F -346...2192°F
K,C -270...1372°C K,F -454...2501.6°F
N,C -270...1300°C N,F -454...2372°F
R,C -50...1769°C R,F -58...3216.2°F
S,C -50...1769°C S,F -60...3216.2°F
T,C -270...400°C T,F -454...752°F
Pt100,C -40...100°C Pt100,F -40...212°F
Linear -75...75mV

12 - 6 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

AI Calculated (Event option) AIC

Summary The AI Calculated element is an event channel element used for

detection of calculated analog events. An event is detected when the
real value (terminal VALUE) exceeds one of the two high or low limits
or moves back into the range. The hysteresis parameter (terminal
HYST) can be used to suppress event generation if the value is
fluctuating around a limit.

Overview
AI Calculated: Base Part Limit Check

NAME VALUE EN_HI2

ACT ERR HI_LIM2
NORM_TR EN_HI1
AL_DIAL HI_LIM1
SCANT EN_LO1
LO_LIM1
EN_LO2
LO_LIM2
HYST

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DAT4

AI Calculated: Base Part

AIC1 NAME VALUE

1 ACT ERR
0 NORM_TR
0 AL_DIAL
640ms SCANT

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user AICx Unique module NAME. Max 20 characters.
ACT user 1 The element is: Element must be
0 = spare referenced by an EVS(S)
1 = ACTive when ACT=1.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 7

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NORM_TR user/ 0 B(r/w) NORMal TReatment. Not allowed
PC 0=event detection to change
disabled on-line.
1=event detection enabled
AL_DIAL user 0 DIAL the master on RCOM
ALarm. only.
0=no dial on alarm
1=dial on alarm
SCANT user 640ms SCAN Time for event
recording. Values: 10ms,
20ms, 40ms, 80ms,
160ms, 320ms,
640ms,1280ms, 2560ms,
5120ms, 10240ms,
20480ms,40960ms,
81920ms, 163840ms,
327680ms.
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag indicating fatal
errors.
VALUE PC 0 R(r/w) Signal VALUE (is watched
for events).

Limit Check Edit DB Terminal Values-AIC1

AI Calculated: Limit Check

0 EN_HI2
90.0 HI_LIM2
0 EN_HI1
80.0 HI_LIM1
0 EN_LO1
-80.0 LO_LIM1
0 EN_LO2
-90.0 LO_LIM2
5.0 HYST

Figure 3.

12 - 8 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Limit Check
1 2 3 4 5 6
EN_HI2 user/ 0x B(r/w) ENables High limit no. 2 for Not allowed
PC event generation. to change
0=disable on-line.
1=enable
HI_LIM2 user/ 90.0 R(r/w) HIgh LIMit no.2 for event Not allowed
PC generation of VALUE. to change
on-line.
EN_HI1 user/ 0 B(r/w) ENables HIgh limit no. 1 for Not allowed
PC event generation. to change
0=disable on-line.
1=enable
HI_LIM1 user/ 80.0 R(r/w) HIgh LIMit no. 1 for event Not allowed
PC generation of VALUE. to change
on-line.
EN_LO1 user/ 0 B(r/w) ENables LOw limit no. 1 for Not allowed
PC event generation of VALUE. to change
on-line.
LO_LIM1 user/ -80.0 R(r/w) LOw LIMit no.1 for event Not allowed
PC generation of VALUE. to change
on-line.
EN_LO2 user/ 0 B(r/w) ENables LOw limit no. 2 for Not allowed
PC event generation. to change
0=disable on-line.
1=enable
LO_LIM2 user/ -90.0 R(r/w) LOw LIMit no.2 for event Not allowed
PC generation of VALUE. to change
on-line.
HYST user/ 5.0 R(r/w) HYSTeresis for limit check. ≥0.0
PC Not allowed
to change
on-line.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 9

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

AO Module AO810,AO820

Summary The AO Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Output

hardware module of type AO810 or AO820 contained in an Advant
FieldBus 100 I/O Station. The Data Base element is superior to the
signal elements associated to the analog output chanels in the
module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module.

By means of the call name AO810 or AO820 an Engineering Station

will create:
• 1 Data Base element of type AO module
• 8 (AO810) or 4 (AO820) Data Base elements of typeAnalog
Output.
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_1

AI Module:
AI800_1 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
AI810 TYPE
50Hz GRIDFREQ
4...20mA CONV_PAR

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user AI800_x - Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters
BUS predef 0 - BUS number. Part of -
address.
STATION predef 0 - STATION number. Part of
address.
POSITION user 0 - POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL user 1 IMPLemented.
0 = the module is spare
1 = the module is
implemented

12 - 10 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE predef AO810/ Module TYPE See call
AO820 designation. name
CONV_PAR user 4-20mA - CONVersion PARameter. Modification
Default value for the I/O denied after
signal elements: creation.
0...20mA,
4...20mA,
WARNING system - B(r) WARNING indicates a -
non-fatal error.
ERR system - B(r) ERRor indicates fatal
errors, such as
configuration errors or
hardware errors.
DIAG system - I(r) DIAGnostics.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 11

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Boolean Data DAT(B)

Summary The DAT(B) Data Base element holds 32 packed Boolean Data
values. The data values are given a name and a valid flag. By means
of the call name DAT(B) the Engineering Station will create 1 data
base element of type Boolean Data.

Overview
Boolean Base Part VALUE11-VALUE20 VALUE21-VALUE32
Data:
NAME VALID VALUE11 VALUE21
VALUE VALUE12 VALUE22
VALUE2 VALUE13 VALUE23
VALUE3 VALUE14 VALUE24
VALUE4 VALUE15 VALUE25
VALUE5 VALUE16 VALUE26
VALUE6 VALUE17 VALUE27
VALUE7 VALUE18 VALUE28
VALUE8 VALUE19 VALUE29
VALUE9 VALUE20 VALUE30
VALUE10 VALUE31
VALUE32

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1

Boolean Data: Base Part

NAME VALID
VALUE
VALUE2
VALUE3
VALUE4
VALUE5
VALUE6
VALUE7
VALUE8
VALUE9
VALUE10

Figure 2.

12 - 12 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user * B(r/w) Unique element NAME. Max 20
Default name from superior characters.
Data Set element. When Example if DSP
created independently is named
default name is DATx. SET1:SET1.B1
VALID PC 0 B(r/w) VALID. Can be set by PC
element (or MMI,...).
VALUE system B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.
VALUE2 system B( r ) Boolean VALUE.
.
.
.
VALUE10 system B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.

VALUE11- Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1

Boolean Data: VALUE11-VALUE20

VALUE20 VALUE11
VALUE12
VALUE13
VALUE14
VALUE15
VALUE16
VALUE17
VALUE18
VALUE19
VALUE20

Figure 3.

VALUE21- Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1

Boolean Data: VALUE21-VALUE32

VALUE32 VALUE21
VALUE22
VALUE23
VALUE24
VALUE25
VALUE26
VALUE27
VALUE28
VALUE29
VALUE30
VALUE31
VALUE32

Figure 4.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 13

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
VALUE11-
1 2 3 4 5 6
VALUE32 VALUE11 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.
VALUE12 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.
.
.
.
VALUE32 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.

12 - 14 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Integer Data DAT(I)

Summary The DAT(I) Data Base element holds one 16 bit integer data value.
The data value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call
name DAT(I) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element
of type Integer Data.

Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.14

Integer Data:
SET1.14 NAME VALID
VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user * Unique element NAME. Max 20
Default name from superior characters.
Data Set element. When Example if DSP
created independently is named
default name is DATx. SET1:SET1.B1
VALID PC 0 B(r/w) VALID flag. Can be set by
PC element (or MMI,...).
VALUE system I(r/w) VALUE of type Integer.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 15

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Packed Integer Data DAT(II)

Summary The DAT(II) Data Base element holds two 16 bit integer values. The
data values are given a name and a valid flag. The element can not
be created automatically by a DSP. By means of the call name
DAT(II) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of
type Packed Integer Data.

Edit DB Terminal Values-DAT4

Packed Integer Data:

DAT4 NAME VALID
1 SCA_FTR VALUE
1 SCA_FTR2 VALUE2

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DATx Unique element NAME. Max 19
characters.
SCA_FTR user 1 SCAling FacTorR for
VALUE. Allowed values:
0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10,
100, 1000.
SCA_FTR2 system 1 SCAling FacTorR for
VALUE2. Allowed values:
0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10,
100, 1000.
VALID PC 0 B(r/w) VALID flag. Can be set
by PC element (or MMI).
VALUE system - I(r/w) VALUE of type Integer.
VALUE2 system - I(r/w) VALUE number 2 of type
Integer.

12 - 16 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

IntegerLong Data DAT(IL)

Summary The DAT(IL) Data Base element contains one 32 bit integer data
value. The data value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of
the call name DAT(IL) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base
element of type IntegerLong Data.

Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.IL7

IntegerLong Data:
SET1.IL7 NAME VALID
VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user * Unique element NAME. Max 20
Default name from superior characters.
Data Set element. When Example if DSP
created independently is named SET1:
default name is DATx. SET1.IL1
VALID PC 0 B(r/w) VALID flag. Can be set by
PC element (or MMI):
VALUE system IL(r/w) VALUE of type
IntegerLong.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 17

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Real Data DAT(R)

Summary The DAT(R) Data Base element holds one real dat value. The data
value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call name
DAT(R) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of
type Real Data.

Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.R2

Real Data:
SET1.R2 NAME VALID
VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user * Unique element NAME. Max 20
Default name from superior characters.
Data Set element. When Example if DSP
created independently is named SET1:
default name is DATx. SET1.R1
VALID PC 0 B(r/w) VALID flag. Can be set by
PC element (or MMI):
VALUE system R(r/w) VALUE of type Real..

12 - 18 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Fieldbus Adapter Parameters(=DCB initialisation) DCB01

Summary The DCB01 Data Base element is necessary for initialization and
usage of an optional FBA module of AC80. (FBA acronym comes
from FieldBus Adapter. The name DCB01 comes from former APC-
systems, where respective boards were called DCB boards = Drive
Communication Boards.)

"DCB interface" is a programming and hardware standard used to link

the AC80 with various types of FBA modules (=in order to interface
an AC80 station to various types of communication systems which
presume attached stations to use specific communication protocol).

DCB01 defines the usage of the DCB segment within

DualPortMemory of AC80. (DualPortMemory is a common interface
media between CPU board and NCB board inside AC80.) The actual
FBA is connected to NCB board (= to AC80) with optic fibers and
DDCS protocol.
The DCB segment has always preallocated fixed size, but it can be
divided into appropriate number of buffers for VCIs (= Virtual
Interface Connectors) according input values of DCB01.
Each buffer (of same channel) will have equal size. And the number
of VCIs will be limited so, that the available fixed data area size of the
channel(s) is not exceeded.

The existence (and acceptable configuration values) of DCB01 is a

prerequisite for any other FBA related PC elements (=
DCBAID,DCBRX, …).

DCB01 is also used/necessary to specify, which type of FBA is

presumed to exist in installed AC80 hardware, and which protocol
variant (of possible multivariant FBA) should be used by (and exist in)
the FBA.

Additionally the programmer may define max. 30 communication

parameters, which shall be downloaded into FBA during initialisation
phase. These parameters do not have any specific meaning for
DCB01 or for any other DCBxx elements in general. Their
interpretation and checking is done thoroughly (=and only) by the
interfaced FBA module. However, if some of the parameter values
is/are not acceptable with specified protocol and FBA module, such
configuration error prevents operations of FBA and is indicated back
to AC80 and to user by DCBxx PC elements and/or DriDeb tool
connected to NCB board. (DCB01 DB element has no live output
pins).

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 19

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Generally it is not necessary to specify those communications

parameter values, which equal with default values of parameters
inside FBA. However if you specify such values, you thus define, that
this particular application should use your given values even if the
default values in FBA firmware are later changed (for some reason).

Most of the FBA modules will be "single channel" type (= use channel
#1). But it is possible to specify also the second channel (with same
or different VCI size) with DCB01 (if the FBA module supports 2
channels).

The communication channels of FBA modules are principally

dependent of each other and may not be parameterized individually.
However, there is an exception: both channels may have their own
number and size of VCIs. (It is possible to design a FBA so, that both
channels have their own parameters, but these channel specific
parameters must then have different identifying numbers. DCB01 or
AC80 systems software does not know, which parameter is
specifying e.g. baud rate for channel #1 and which for channel #2.
(Note: This is different from DCB00 and DCBINIT of APC, where
both channels had equal independent set of parameters).

Overview
DCB Link: Base Part Channels Par.Adjustments 1..

NAME RECS1 IND1

FBATYPE RECSIZE1 VAL1
PROTOCOL RECS2 IND2
RECSIZE2 VAL2
IND3
VAL3
IND4
VAL4
IND5
VAL5
IND6
VAL6
IND7
VAL7
IND8
VAL8
IND9
VAL9

Figure 1.

12 - 20 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1

DCB Link: Base Part

DCB1 NAME
NPBA_80 FBATYPE
10 PROTOCOL

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DCB Unique element NAME. Max 20
characters.
FBATYPE user NFBA_xx TYPE of the FBA module
(a string converted to a
number).
PROTOCOL user 10 A code number to specify
the desired PROTOCOL.

Channels Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1

DCB Link: Channels

0 RECS1
12 RECSIZE1
0 RECS2
0 RECSIZE2

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6
RECS1 user 0 Number of data buffers (1)
(VCIs) for channel #1.
RECSIZE1 user 12 Size of a data buffer (VCI) for channel #1 (1)
(in bytes).
RECS2 user 0 Number of data buffers (VCIs) for channel (1)
#2.
RECSIZE2 user 0 Size of a data buffer (VCI) for channel #2 (1)
(in bytes).

(Note, that RECS2 > 0 or RECSIZE2 > 0 are allowed values with
dual channel FBAs only).

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 21

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

(1) If RECSx = 0 and RECSIZEx > 0 the RECSx will be tuned as

high as possible. Respectively if RECSx > 0 and RECSIZEx = 0. If
both RECSx > 0 and RECSIZEx > 0 given RECSIZEx will be used as
it is.

Table 3. Valid strings for the protocol and respective integer codes in
DCBAID.
String Code
NFBA_xx 0
NPBA_80 141

Note 1: Recerved memory for each VCI buffer is 2*RECSIZE + 22

words. In other words: RECSIZE = length of the dat block (in words),
and for each block it is necessary to allocate storage of 2 copies of
the block (= for concurrent reading and writing) and additional VCI
header (= 22 words regardless of data block size).

Note 2: Max possible value for RECSIZE1 or RECSIZE2 = 127.

Communication Communication Parameters are entered in parameter windows.

There are 3 windows with 9 parameter entries (= pin pairs) in each,
Parameters and one window with 3 parameter entries. Each pin pair is
PARIDx/PARVALx. (both pins can be connected to integers).

PARIDx value specifies, which parameter is the destination of

PARVALx. Relevant PARIDx values are in range 3…40. It is not
necessary to put them in increasing order (although recommended).
If PARIDx = 0 (default value), the respective PARVALx value has no
significance.

Parameters 3…32 are sent to FBA.

Parameters 33…40 are for internal use in AC80.
E.g. Parameter 33 = Timeout value in milliseconds for all DCBRX
elements.

12 - 22 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Par. Adjustments Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1

DCB Link: Par.Adjustments 1..

1.. 0 IND1
0 VAL1
0 IND2
0 VAL2
0 IND3
0 VAL3
0 IND4
0 VAL4
0 IND5
0 VAL5
0 IND6
0 VAL6
0 IND7
0 VAL7
0 IND8
0 VAL8
0 IND9
0 VAL9

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 4.
Description, Par. 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Adjustments 1..
1 2 3 4 5 6
IND1 user 0 INDx = index of the parameter to By means of
be changed. INDx…VALx
0…40 combinations
some default
values of DCB
parameters can
be changed.
VAL1 user 0 VALx = new value for the
parameter.
IND2 user 0
VAL2 user 0
IND3 user 0
VAL3 user 0
IND4 user 0
VAL4. user 0
.
.
.
IND30 user 0
VAL30 user 0

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 23

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DI Module DI810,DI811,DI820,DI821

Summary The DI module Data Base element specifies a Digital Input hardware
module of type DI810, DI811, DI820 or DI821 contained in an Advant
FieldBus 100 I/O station. The data base element is superior to the
siganal elements associated to the digital input channels in the
module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module.

By means of the call name DI810, DI811, DI820 or DI821 an

Engineering Station will create:
• 1 data base element of type DI module
• 16 (DI810,DI811) or 8 (DI820, DO821) data base elements of
type Digital Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-DI800_1

DI Module:
DI800_1 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
DI810 TYPE
8 FILT
NO SUP
64 INSCANT

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DI800_x Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters.
BUS predef 0 BUS number. Part of
address.
STATION predef 0 STATION number. Part
of address.
POSITION user 0 POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL user 1 B(r) IMPLemented.
0=the module is spare
1=the module is
implemented

12 - 24 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE predef DI810/ Module TYPE
DI811/ designation.
DI820/
DI821
FILT user 8 On/off delay FILTer time The actual
in ms. Values: 2,4,8 and filter time may
16. vary in the
following
intervals:
2…3 ms,
4…6 ms,
8…12 ms and
16…24 ms.
SUP user NO Sensor power
SUPervision of channel
group 1 and 2. Values:
YES=enabled
NO= not enabled
INSCANT user 64 SCANner cycle time on
AF 100 for INcoming
values. Allowed
values:1,2,4,8,16,32,64,
128,256,512,1024,2048,
4096.
WARNING system B(r) WARNING indicates a
non-fatal error.
ERR system B(r) ERRor indicates fatal
errors, such as
configuration errors or
hardware errors.
DIAG system I(r) DIAGnostics.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 25

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DI Calculated (Event option) DIC

Summary The DI Calculated element is an event channel element used for

detection of calculated digital events. An event is detected when the
boolean value (terminal VALUE) changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa,
and event generation is deblocked (terminal NORM_TR=1). There is
a filtering facility to suppress event generation in case of rapidly
changing values.

Edit DB Terminal Values-DIC1

DI Calculated: Base Part

DIC1 NAME VALUE

1 ACT ERR
0 NORM_TR
0 NORM_POS
0 AL_DIAL
640ms SCANT
0 FILT_FTR

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DICx Unique NAME of the Max 20
event channel. characters.
ACT user 1 B(r/w) Element is: Element must
0= not ACTive be referenced
1=ACTive by an EVS(S)
when ACT=1.
NORM_TR user/ 0 NORMal TReatment. Not allowed to
PC 0=event detection change on-
disabled line.
1=event detection
enabled
NORM_POS user 0 NORMal POSition for
this channel.
AL_DIAL user 0 B(r) DIAL the master on RCOM only.
ALarm.
0=no dial on alarm
1=dial on alarm

12 - 26 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
SCANT user 640ms SCAN Time for event
detection. Values: 10ms,
20ms, 40ms, 80ms, 160ms,
320ms, 640ms, 1280ms,
2560ms, 5120ms, 10240ms,
20480ms, 40960ms,
81920ms, 163840ms,
327680ms.
FILT_FTR user 0 FILTer time FacToR. 0…32
The filter time = FILT_FTR x
SCANT is the duration of a
value change before the
change is accepted as event.
VALUE PC 0 B(r/w) Signal VALUE (is watched for
events).
ERR system B(r)

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 27

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DO Module DO810, DO820

Summary The DO module Data Base element specifies a Digital Output

hardware module of type DO810 or DO820 contained in an Advant
FieldBus 100 I/O station. The data base element is superior to the
siganal elements associated to the digital output channels in the
module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module.

By means of the call name DO810 or DO820 an Engineering Station

will create:

• 1 data base element of type DO module

• 16 (DO810) or 8 (DO820) data base elements of type Digital

Output
Edit DB Terminal Values-DO800_1

DO Module:
DO800_1 NAME WARNING
0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
DO810 TYPE
NO SUP

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DO800_x Unique NAME of the I/O Max 20
module. characters.
BUS predef 0 BUS number. Part of
address.
STATION predef 0 STATION number. Part
of address.
POSITION user 0 POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL user 1 B(r) IMPLemented.
0=the module is spare
1=the module is
implemented
TYPE predef DO810 Module TYPE
designation: DO810 or
Do820

12 - 28 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
SUP user NO Sensor power
SUPervision of channel
group 1 and 2. Values:
YES=enabled
NO=not enabled
WARNING system B(r) WARNING indicates a
non-fatal error.
ERR system B(r) ERRor indicates fatal
errors, such as
configuration errors or
hardware errors.
DIAG system I(r) DIAGnostics.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 29

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DriveBus Link DRB00

Summary The DB element DRB00 is used to define the (physical) drive

numbers, drive types and application identifiers of the ACS 600 drives
(e.g. ACS600 SingleDrive or ACS600 MultiDrive) connected to AC80.
The logical drive numbers of the connected drives are always in the
range 1...12 and these logical numbers are used in the DRNR inputs
of the ACS function blocks (e.g. ACSRX).

DRB00

DRNR1 Drives 1...4

DRTYPE1 Drives 5...8
APPID1 Drives 9...12
DRNR2
DRTYPE2
APPID2
DRNR3
DRTYPE3
APPID3
DRNR4
DRTYPE4
APPID4

DRNR5 DRNR9
DRTYPE5 DRTYPE9
APPID5 APPID9
DRNR6 DRNR10
DRTYPE6 DRTYPE10
APPID6 APPID10
DRNR7 DRNR11
DRTYPE7 DRTYPE11
APPID7 APPID11
DRNR8 DRNR12
DRTYPE8 DRTYPE12
APPID8 APPID12

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
DRNR1 system 1 Physical DRive NumbeR of the
first drive
(this number must be set in the
drive)
DRTYPE1 user NO_DRIVE DRive TYPE of the first drive
(NO_DRIVE or ACS600)

12 - 30 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
APPID1 user 0 APPlication IDentification
number of the first drive
(see section "Application
Identifiers").
DRNR2 system 2 Physical DRive NumbeR
of the second drive.
DRTYPE2 user NO_DRIVE DRive TYPE of the
second drive.
APPID2 user 0 APPlication IDentification
number of the second
drive.
.
.
.
DRNR12 system 12
DRTYPE12 user NO_DRIVE DRive TYPE of the 12th
drive.
APPID12 user 0 APPlication IDentification
number of the 12th drive.
Note: The terminals indicated as “Entered by the system” are not
modifiable by the USER.

Application The Application Identifier of a drive application is a 16 bit integer

defined by the drive application programmer. The value of an APPIDn
Identifiers input must be the same as the value of the Application Identifier in
the corresponding drive.

Note: Application Identifiers are not currently used (the only legal
value of an APPIDn input is the default value 0).

Related Description of PC element ACSRX.

Documents

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 31

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Drive Data Set DRIDS

Summary The Drive Data Set element is referenced by the Engineered drive
Data Base element. It specifies a data package to be exchanged
cyclicly with the drive.

Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIDS1

Drive Data Set:

DRIDS1 NAME WR_ENA
1 ACT I1
1 DS_NO I2
I3
O1
O2
O3

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DRIDSx Unique NAME of the data Max 20
set. characters.
ACT user 1 Element is: Element must
0 = not ACTive be referenced
1 = ACTive by an EVS(S)
when ACT=1.
DS_NO user 1 I(r) Data Set Number. 1…255
WR_ENA system B(r/w) WRiting ENAbled.
Enables writing the Drive
Data Set.
I1 system I(r/w) Integer 1 of the data set
transmitted.
I2 system I(r/w) Integer 2 of the data set
transmitted.
I3 system I(r/w) Integer 3 of the data set
transmitted.
O1 system I(r/w) Integer 1 of the data set
received.
O2 system I(r/w) Integer 2 of the data set
received.
O3 system I(r/w) Integer 3 of the data set
received.

12 - 32 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Engineered Drive DRIENG

Summary The DRIENG Data Base element specifies an Engineered drive

hardware module on the module bus. By means of the call name
DRIENG an Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of
type Engineered drive.

Overview
Engineered Base Part Parameter Part Reference Part
Drive:
NAME WARNING APPID SPEEDSF REF1
BUS ERR NOMSPEED REF2
STATION DIAG NOMVOLT REF3
POSITION NOMPOWER REF4
IMPL REF5
TYPE REF6
REF7
REF8
REF9
REF10

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIENG1

Engineered Drive: Base Part

DRIENG1 NAME WARNING

0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
ACS600ENG TYPE

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DRIENGx Unique NAME of the Max 20
drive. characters.
BUS predef 0 BUS number.Part of
address.
STATION predef 0 STATION number. Part of
address.
POSITION user 0 POSITION. Part of
address.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 33

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
IMPL user 1 IMPLemented.
0=the drive is spare
1=the drive is
implemented
TYPE user ACS600 I(r/w) Module TYPE. Max. 10
ENG characters.
WARNING system B(r) WARNING flag indicating
non-fatal errors.
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag indicating fatal
errors.
DIAG system I(r) DIAGnostics.

Parameter Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIENG1

Engineered Drive: Parameter Part

0 APPID SPEEDSF
NOMSPEED
NOMVOLT
NOMPOWER

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Parameter Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
APPID user 0 APPlication IDentity which
has to match with the
application identity in the
drive.
0:no match is required
>0: match is required
SPEEDSF system I(r) SPEED Scale Factor is Updated from
used in calculations to get drive when
the rpm of the motor. IMPL=1 during
configuration.
NOMSPEED NOMinal SPEED of motor. Updated from
This value can be used by drive when
the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
speed.

12 - 34 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NOMSPEED system I(r) NOMinal SPEED of Updated from
motor. This value can be drive when
used by the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
speed.
NOMVOLT system I(r) NOMinal VOLTage of the Updated from
motor. This value can be drive when
used by the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
voltage.
NOMPOWER system R(r) NOMinal POWER of the Updated from
motor. This value can be drive when
used by the application in IMPL=1 during
calculationsof the actual configuration.
power.

Reference Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIENG1

Engineered Drive: Reference Part

REF1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8
REF9
REF10

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 3.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Reference Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF1 user REFerence 1 to a DRIDS Maximum 20
element. characters.
REF2 user REFerence 2 to a DRIDS Maximum 20
element. characters
.
.
.
REF10 user REFerence 10 to a DRIDS Maximum 20
element. characters.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 35

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Standard Drive DRISTD

Summary The DRISTD Data Base element specifies a Standard drive hardware
module on the module bus. By means of the call name DRISTD an
Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Standard
drive.

Overview
Standard Base Part Parameter Part Reference Part
Drive:
NAME WARNING SPEEDSF REF1
BUS ERR NOMSPEED REF2
STATION DIAG NOMVOLT
POSITION NOMPOWER
IMPL
TYPE

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRISTD1

Standard Drive: Base Part

DRISTD1 NAME WARNING

0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION
1 IMPL
ACS600STD TYPE

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DRISTDx Unique NAME of the Max. 20
drive. characters
BUS predef 0 BUS number. Part of
address.
STATION predef 0 STATION number. Part of
address.
POSITION user 0 POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL user 1 IMPLemented.
0=the drive is spare
1=the drive is
implemented

12 - 36 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE user ACS600 Module TYPE. Max. 10
STD characters.
WARNING system B(r) WARNING flag indicating
non-fatal errors.
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag indicating fatal
error.
DIAG system I(r) DIAGnostics.

Parameter Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRISTD1

Standard Drive: Parameter Part

SPEEDSF
NOMSPEED
NOMVOLT
NOMPOWER

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Parameter Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
SPEEDSF system I(r) SPEED Scale Factor is Updated from
used in calculations to get drive when
the rpm of the motor. IMPL=1 during
configuration
NOMSPEED system I(r) NOMinal SPEED of motor. Updated from
This value can be used by drive when
the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
speed.
NOMVOLT system I(r) NOMinal VOLTage of the Updated from
motor. This value can be drive when
used by the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
voltage.
NOMPOWER system R(r) NOMinal POWER of the Updated from
motor. This value can be drive when
used by the application in IMPL=1 during
calculations of the actual configuration.
power.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 37

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Reference Part Edit DB Terminal Values-DRISTD1

Standard Drive: Reference Part

REF1
REF2

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 3.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Reference Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF1 user REFerence 1 to a DRIDS element. Maximum 20
characters.
REF2 user REFerence 2 to a DRIDS element. Maximum 20
characters.

12 - 38 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DataSet Peripheral DSP

Summary The DataSet Peripheral element represents a block of data to be

received or sent over Advant Fieldbus 100 via Data Set
Communication. However in AC80, actual communication is done by
PC-elements (=AFTRA, AFREC, MB90TRA or MB90REC) where you
must specify address, mode and data for the data set. DSP element
should specify same address, direction, cycle time and data length as
defined in respective PC-element.

By means of the call name DSP the Engineering Station will create 1
data base element of type DataSet Peripheral.

Overview DSPx
DataSet
NAME VALID Peripheral
ACT ERR Base Part
BUS Value
references
IDENT
NO_BREC
NO_INT
NO_INTL
NO_REAL
USER
SOURCE
BLOCKED
STATION
CYCLETIM
SORT_REF

REF1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8

Figure 1.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 39

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

DSPx
Base Part DSP1 NAME VALID
DataSet
Peripheral
1 ACT ERR Base Part
0 BUS Value
references
1 IDENT
0 NO_BREC
0 NO_INT
0 NO_INTL
0 NO_REAL
0 USER
RECEIVE SOURCE
0 BLOCKED
1 STATION
512 CYCLETIM
YES SORT_REF

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, Base 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user DSPx Each Data Set must have Max 20
a unique NAME characters.
ACT PC 1 The element is:
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
BUS user 0 BUS number of related Treated as
bus. comment.
IDENT user 1 IDENTifies the Data Set 1…50
on the Advant Fielbus
100.
NO_BREC user 0 Number of Boolean 0…8
RECords in the set.
NO_INIT user 0 Number of INTeger 0…8
regords in the set.
NO_INTL user 0 Number of INTegerLong 0…8
records in the set
NO_REAL user 0 Number of REAL records 0…8
in the set.
USER predef 0 USER
0 = Advant Fieldbus 100
communication
1 = not yet defined
2 = not yet defined
SOURCE user RECEIVE SOURCE, defines the
direction of the
communication,
RECEIVE, SEND

12 - 40 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
BLOCKED predef 0 For compatibility reason.
STATION user 1 STATION number of opposite 1…80
target.
CYCLETIM user 512 CYCLETIMe, transmission
interval in milliseconds.
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256,
512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
SORT_REF user YES SORT REFerences, if YES
then all DAT refs are sorted in
order: B, I, IL, R.
VALID system B(r) VALID.
Not updated in AC80.
ERR system B(r) ERRor.
Not updated in AC80

Value References DSPx

DataSet
REF1 Peripheral
REF2 Base Part
REF3 Value
references
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, Value 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
References
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF1 user REFerence: Name of a DAT
element.
REF2 user REFerence: Name of a DAT
element.
.
.
.
REF8 user REFerence: Name of a DAT
element.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 41

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Because DSP is not “executable element” in AC80, it means, that

connected DAT DB-elements are not updated by “receiving DSP”
neither sent out by “transmitting DSP”. Therefore the purpose of DAT
connections is just to specify same data length for the data set as
updated by the PC-element and all connections to from DSP REF
pins may lead to same single (dummy) DAT.

There is however one exception: If you want to update the DAT

values by AdvaCommand supervisory system with single service
messages, the DAT must be dedicated for the reference value and
belong to some DSP.)

There are 3 reasons why AC80 application should contain DSPs,

although they are not used for communication.

• Bus Configuration Builder (=tool program) extracts AF100 dataset

information from DSPs. If they are omitted, and datasets
introduced only with PC elements, thos datasets will stay hidden
from overall bus configuration files.
• PC-elements AFTRA, AFREC, MB90TRA and MB90REC check
during their initialization phase, that respective DSP element
should exist in DB part. And if not, an error code (=3106) will be
set in ERRC output pin. (However the PC element is still usable,
although it shows such error code. Maybe we should say, that it is
a “Warning code”)
• AFREC and MB90REC do not specify the CYCLETIM attribute of
the data set. If the cycle time of the data set differs much from the
CONTRM cycle time, ERR output pin of the PC-element setting
after 4 consecutive failed PC-element executions, is principally
wrong. But if the “receiving DSP” exist, it’s CYCLETIM value is
used by the PC-element for dataset supervision, and this “error”
so corrected.

To make it easier for users to insert both DSP and respective PC

element at same time, it is possible to insert a type circuit in AC80
application, which contain both. Following type circuits are prepared
for this purpose:

AFIN = AFREC and DSP with connections to individual DATs

AFOUT = AFTRA and DSP with connections to individual DATs

AF_IN = AFREC and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT

AF_OUT = AFTRA and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT

AF_INW = MB90REC and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT

AF_OUTW = MB90TRA and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT

12 - 42 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Event Set (Send) (Event option) EVS(S)

Summary Event Set (EVS) element are used for transport of time-tagged
events from Advant Controller 110 to Advant Controller 400 Series.
An Event Set element groups a set of Event Channels for sending or
receiving of events.

The Event Set (Send) element collects events from referenced Event
Channel elements and sends them to the event receiver when
requested.

The maximum number of Event Set elements is restricted to 16 per

Advant Controller 110 station. An Event Channel element (AIC, DIC)
may not be referenced by different EVS(S) elements.

Overview
Event Set Base Part Ev en t Ch an .1- 16 Ev en t Ch an .17 -3 2
(Send):
NAME CLEAR_Q REF1 REF17
ACT Q_EMPTY REF2 REF18
IDENT WARNING REF3 REF19
QUEUE ERR REF4 REF20
ERRTYPE REF5 REF21
REF6 REF22
REF7 REF23
REF8 REF24
REF9 REF25
REF10 REF26
REF11 REF27
REF12 REF28
REF13 REF29
REF14 REF30
REF15 REF31
REF16 REF32

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1

Event Set Base Part
(Send):
EVS1 NAME CLEAR_Q
1 ACT Q_EMPTY
1 IDENT WARNING
NORMAL QUEUE ERR
ERRTYPE

Figure 2.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 43

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user EVSx Unique NAME of the Max 20
Event Set. characters.
ACT user 1 The element is:
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
IDENT user 1 IDENTifies the Event Set 1…65535
element in the node. Not allowed
to change
on-line.
QUEUE user NORMAL Specifies the size of the Not allowed
event QUEUE. Values: to change
NORMAL (100 ENTRIES) on-line.
EXTENDED (500 entries)
CLEAR_Q system 0 B(r/w) CLEAR event Queue.
0=no action
1=clear event queue
Q_EMPTY system 0 B(r) Flag indicating:
0=Event Queue is not
EMPTY
1=Event Queue is EMPTY
WARNING system 0 B(r) WARNING flag indicating
non-fatal errors.
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag indicating fatal
errors.
ERRTYPE system I(r) Indicating ERRor TYPE.

Event Chan. 1-16 Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1

Event Set (Send): Ev en t Ch an .1- 16

REF1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8
REF9
REF10
REF11
REF12
REF13
REF14
REF15
REF16

Figure 3.

12 - 44 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1

Event Chan. 17-32
Event Set (Send): Ev en t Ch an .17 -3 2

REF17
REF18
REF19
REF20
REF21
REF22
REF23
REF24
REF25
REF26
REF27
REF28
REF29
REF30
REF31
REF32

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, Event 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Chan. 1-32
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF1 user EVSx REFerence: Name of an Event Channel (1)
element.
REF2 user 1 REFerence: Name of an Event Channel (1)
element.
.
.
.
REF32 user REFerence: Name of an Event Channel (1)
element.

(1) The REF1 to REF16 terminals are used to fill in the reference to
the event channels. References can be made to the AIC and DIC
elements generating events.

Bit Values of Table 3.

Terminal ERRTYPE Bit Description Value of ERR, WARNING
0 Communication disturbed to at least one WARNING=1
event source.
1 Communication disturbed to at lest one WARNING=1
event target
2 Event source error ERR=1
3 Event target error ERR=1
4 Event queue filled to 80% or more for one or ERR=1
more event targets
5 Event queue overflow for one or more ERR=1
targets

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 45

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

MVI Data Block (ModBus option) MVB

Summary The MVB specifies one block of data to be either transmitted or

received over the ModBus interface. One MVB may contain up to 128
DAT's of any type. The MVB requires creation needed DAT elements.

Overview
MVI Data Block: Ba se Part Value ref.1-16

NAME EXECUTE RE1

ACT EXECDONE REF2
REGADDR VALID REF3
CMDCODE ERR REF4
AUXINFO1 REF5
AUXINFO2 REF6
NO_BREC REF7
NO_INT REF8
NO_INTL REF9
NO_REAL REF10
SOURCE REF11
BLOCKED REF12
NET REF13
REMNODE REF14
CYCLETIM REF15
SORT_REF REF16

Va lu e re f. 11 3- 12 8

Value ref.17-32 REF113

REF114
REF115
Value ref.33-48
REF116
REF117

Value ref.49-64
REF118
REF119
REF120

Value ref.65-80
REF121
REF122
REF123

Value ref.81-96
REF124
REF125
REF126
Value ref.97-112 REF127
REF128

Figure 1.

12 - 46 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Edit DB Terminal Values-MVB1

Base Part MVI Data Block: Ba se Part

MVB1 NAME EXECUTE

1 ACT EXECDONE
0 REGADDR VALID
110 CMDCODE ERR
0 AUXINFO1
0 AUXINFO2
0 NO_BREC
0 NO_INT
0 NO_INTL
0 NO_REAL
RECEIVE SOURCE
0 BLOCKED
1 NET
1 REMNODE
512 CYCLETIM
YES SORT_REF

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user MVBx Unique module NAME. Max 20
characters.
ACT user 1 The element is:
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
REGADDR user 0 REGister start ADDRess in ModBus:
external PLC/RTU. 3001...49999
CMDCODE user 110 CoMmand CODE to be 1…500
executed by the MVI
protocol handler, protocol
dependent.
AUXINFO1 user 0 AUXiliary INFOrmation 1,
protocol dependent.
AUXINFO2 user 0 AUXiliary INFOrmation 2,
protocol dependent.
NO_BREC user 0 Number of Boolean 0…128
RECords DAT(B).
NO_INT user 0 Number of INTeger records 0…128
DAT(I).
NO_INTL user 0 Number of INTegerLong 0...128
records DAT(IL).
NO_REAL user 0 Number of REAL records 0...128
DAT(R).
SOURCE user RECEIVE SOURCE. Defines the
direction of the data
transmission. Values:
RECEIVE, SEND

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 47

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
BLOCKED user/ 0 B(r/w) Cyclic data transmission. Not
PC 0=not BLOCKED allowed to
1=BLOCKED change on-
line.
NET user 1 MVI NETwork number Set to 1
used for Data Block
transmission.
REMNODE user 1 REMote NODE number. 1…240
In master mode: node no.
of slave.
In slave mode: node no.
of master
CYCLETIM user 512 Defines the CYCLE TIMe
of the protocol command
execution in multiples of
100 milliseconds. Values:
0(no cyclic execution),
4,8,16,32,64,128,256,512,
1024,2048,4096,8192,
16384,32768
SORT_REF user YES SORT REFerences.
Values:
NO=references not sorted
YES=references sorted in
the order B,I,IL,R.
EXECUTE system B(r/w) EXECUT invokes single
execution of the specified
protocol handler
command when changing
from 0 to 1.
EXECDONE system B(r) EXECDONE indicates that
the single execution
invoked by EXECUTE
was done.
VALID system system B(r/w) Boolean VALue (IDentity)
for handshaking between
MVI and appl. program.
- receiving MVB:
0=MVB has not been
received within
3XCYCLETIM.
1=MVB has been updated
-sending MVB:
0=MVB has not been sent
1=MVB has been sent
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag.

12 - 48 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Edit DB Terminal Values-MVB1

Value ref. 1-16 MVI Data Block: Va lue ref.1-16

RE1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REF5
REF6
REF7
REF8
REF9
REF10
REF11
REF12
REF13
REF14
REF15
REF16

Figure 3.

Value ref. 17-32, 33-48, 49-64, 65-80, 81-96, 97-112, 113-128.

The value references 17-128 are analogous to Value ref. 1-16.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Value ref.1-128
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF1 user REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
REF2 user REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
.
.
.
REF128 user REFerence: Name of a DAT element.

Command Codes Table 3.

CMDCODE ModBus MOVE BLOCK Command
for ModBus Code Description
MASTER=0 MASTER=1
101 3C4 Read exception st.
102 3D0 3C8 Read I/O register.
104 3D0 3C8 Read I/O register
106 3D0 3C8 Read I/O status.
201 6 3D4 3C4 Preset 1 register
202 16 3D4 3C4 Preset register
205 5 3D4 3C4 Force 1 coil
206 15 3D4 3C4 Force coils

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 49

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

MVI Channel (ModBus option) MVICHAN

Summary The MVICHAN element specifies the configuration of the ModBus

channel. The ModBus channel should consist of less than 8 nodes
each node is configured with a MVINODE element.

Overview
MVI Channel: Base Part Co mmu nica tio n Parameters

NAME PROTTYPE CTRLERR PARAM1

ACT DUPLEX DSR PARAM2
NET DIAL DCD PARAM3
NODE SPEED CTS PARAM4
MASTER CHLEN RI PARAM5
TIMESYNC STOPBITS PARAM6
PARITY PARAM7
LINESTAB PARAM8
CARRDEL
MAXRETR
CHARTOUT
TURNTIME
UARTTOUT
POLLCYCL

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1

MVI Channel: Base Part

MVC1 NAME ERR

1 ACT
1 NET
1 NODE
0 MASTER
NONE TIMESYNC

Figure 2.

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user MVCx Unique element NAME. Max 20
characters.
ACT user 1 The element is:
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
NET user 0 NETwork number of MVI Set to 1
channel. Not used.

12 - 50 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NODE user 1 Own NODE number of MVI 1…240
channel. Not allowed
to change on-
line.
MASTER user 0 MVI channel in: Not allowed
0=slave mode to change on-
1=MASTER mode line.
TIMESYNC user 0 TIME SYNChronization. Set to 0
Values: NONE, MASTER, Not used
SLAVE
ERR system 0 B(r) ERRor flag.

Communication Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1

MVI Channel: Co mmu nica tio n

2 PROTTYPE CTRLERR
FULL DUPLEX DSR
0 DIAL DCD
9600 SPEED CTS
8 CHLEN RI
1 STOPBITS
ODD PARITY
1 LINESTAB
0 CARRDEL
2 MAXRETR
2 CHARTOUT
200 TURNTIME
1 UARTTOUT
10 POLLCYCL

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Communication
1 2 3 4 5 6
PROTTYPE user 3 PROTocol TYPE Set to 3
3=ModBus RTU
DUPLEX user FULL DUPLEX mode, concerns modem Set to
signals between MVI channel and HALF
modem.
Values:FULL,HALF,HALF
(DCD IGNORED).

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 51

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
DIAL user 0 DIALing. Set to 0
0=disabled Not used
1=enabled (for dialing)
SPEED user 9600 Transmission SPEED of 300 for testing
communication in only
bits/second. Values:
300,9600,19200
CHLEN user 8 CHaracter LENgth in bits. Set to 8
STOPBITS user 1 STOP BITS. Values:1,1.5,2 Set to 1
PARITY user ODD PARITY. Values: Use EVEN
NONE,ODD,EVEN
LINESTAB user 1 LINE STABilization time. ModBus:
Number of characters to 0…15,
allow the carrier wave to Set to 0
stabilize before transmission Not used
of the first character.
CARRDEL user 0 CARRier DELay. Number of ModBus:
characters to wait after 0…15,
transmission of the last Set to 0
character before Not used
deactivating RTS.
MAXRETR user 2 MAXimum number of ModBus:
RETRansmissions before 0…20
line is considered broken.
CHARTOUT user 2 CHARacter Time_OUT ModBus:
0...15
TURNTIME user 200 TURN around TIME in 10...20000 in
milliseconds. Assumed time steps of 10
for telegram processing in
slave mode depending only
on system load. Total time to
wait for response is:
TURNTIME + transmission
time.
UARTTOUT user 1 UART transmission 0...15
TIme_OUT. Maximum Set to 1
number of characters for the
to wait for a DCD before
aborting the transmission
(used if DUPLEX=HALF).
POLLCYCL user 10 Maximum time between two ModBus:
POLLing CYCLes in 0...255
seconds.

12 - 52 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
CTRLERR system B(r) Indicating any (ConTRoL)
ERRor in the modem
interface.
DSR system B(r) Modem signal Data Set
Ready.
DCD system B(r) Modem signal Data Carrier
Detect.
CTS system B(r) Modem signal Clear To
Send.
RI system B(r) Modem signal Ring
Indicator.

Parameters Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1

MVI Channel: Parameters

1 PARAM1
0 PARAM2
0 PARAM3
0 PARAM4
0 PARAM5
0 PARAM6
0 PARAM7
0 PARAM8

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 3.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Parameters
1 2 3 4 5 6
PARAM1 user 1 Protocol PARAMeter 1. ModBus: 0...1
PARAM2 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 2. Set to 0
PARAM3 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 3. Set to 0
PARAM4 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 4. Set to 0.
PARAM5 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 5. Set to 0
PARAM6 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 6. Set to 0
PARAM7 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 7. Set to 0
PARAM8 user 0 Protocol PARAMeter 8. Set to 0

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 53

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

MVI Node (ModBus option) MVINODE

Summary The MVINODE represents a node on ModBus and specifies:

1. In master mode
• One slave node connected to the MVI channel
• The status words 1-3 for this slave node.

2. In slave mode
• The own status in status word 1.

Dialling and phone numbers are not used with AC80/ModBus.

Edit DB Terminal Values-MVN1

MVI Node:
MVN1 NAME STATUS1
1 ACT STATUS2
1 NET STATUS3
1 REMNODE ERR
DIALSTR1
PHONENO1
DIALSTR3
PHONENO2
DIALSTR3
PHONENO3
DIALSTR4
PHONENO4

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user MVNx Unique element NAME. Max 20
characters.
ACT user 1 The element is:
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
NET user 1 MVI NETwork number Set to 1
Not used
REMNODE user 1 REMote NODE number. 1...240
In master mode: node
no. of slave.
In slave mode: node no.
of master.

12 - 54 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1 continued.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
DIALSTR1 user DIAL STRing 1 for modern. Max. 20
characters.
PHONENO1 user PHONE Number 1. Max. 20
characters.
DIALSTR2 user DIAL STRing 2 for modem. Max. 20
characters
PHONENO2 user PHONE Number 2. Max. 20
characters
DIALSTR3 user DIAL STRing 3 for modem. Max. 20
characters
PHONENO3 user PHONE Number 3. Max. 20
characters
DIALSTR4 user DIAL STRing 4 for modem. Max. 20
characters
PHONENO4 user PHONE Number 4. Max. 20
characters
STATUS1 system IL(r) MVI STATUS word 1.
STATUS2 system IL(r) MVI STATUS word 2.
STATUS3 system IL(r) MVI STATUS word 3.
ERR system B(r) ERRor flag.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 55

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Special I/O Link NCBIO

Summary The DB element NCBIO is used to define the (physical) I/O device
numbers and types connected to AC80. The logical device numbers
of the connected I/O device are always in the range 1...8 and these
logical numbers are used in the NODE inputs of the IORX PC
element.

NCBIO

IOTYPE1 Devices 1...4

IOTYPE2 Devices 5...8
IOTYPE3
IOTYPE4

IOTYPE5
IOTYPE6
IOTYPE7
IOTYPE8

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
IOTYPE1 user NO_DEVICE I/O TYPE of the first I/O module
(NO_DEVICE,DI/DO_DEVICE,
AI/AO_DEVICE,DSU_DEVICE,
COUNTER_DEVICE
IOTYPE2 user NO_DEVICE I/O TYPE of the second I/O
module
.
.
.
IOTYPE8 user NO_DEVICE I/O TYPE of the eighth I/O module.

Related Description of the PC elements IORX.

Documents

12 - 56 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Panel Bus Configuration PANBUS

Summary The PANBUS element specifies the configuration Panel Bus of AC80.
Panel Bus can consist of up to 16 nodes used PC elements type
PANC, PRTCON, MODR, MODW.

Overview
PanelBus Base Part Communication Parameters
master:
NAME ERR PROTTYPE PARAM1
ACT DUPLEX PARAM2
NET DIAL PARAM3
NODE SPEED PARAM4
MASTER CHLEN PARAM5
TIMESYNC STOPBITS PARAM6
PARITY PARAM7
LINESTAB PARAM8
CARRDEL
MAXRETR
CHARTOUT
TURNTIME
UARTTOUT
POLLCYCL

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-PANBUS1

PanelBus Master: Base Part

PANBUS1 NAME ERR
1 ACT
1 NET
1 NODE
0 MASTER
NONE TIMESYNC

Figure 2.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 57

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PANBUSx - Unique element NAME. Max 20
characters
ACT user 1 - Element is: -
0 = spare
1 = ACTive
NET user 1 - NETwork number of -
Panel Bus.
NODE user 1 - Own NODE number of 1...254
Panel Bus. No effect
because AC80 is master.
MASTER user 0 - Panel Bus in: Must be
1 = MASTER mode master.
TIMESYNC user NONE - TIMESYNChronization. -
Values:
NONE
ERR system - B(r) ERRor flag. Not
updated.

Communication Edit DB Terminal Values-PANBUS1

PanelBus Master: Communication

3 PROTTYPE
HALF DUPLEX
0 DIAL
19200 SPEED
8 CHLEN
1 STOPBITS
NONE PARITY
1 LINESTAB
0 CARRDEL
2 MAXRETR
2 CHARTOUT
200 TURNTIME
1 UARTTOUT
10 POLLCYCL

Figure 3.

12 - 58 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Communication
1 2 3 4 5 6
PROTTYPE user 3 - PROTocol TYPE (ASCII, 1...255
binary, checksum),
3 = ModBus RTU
DUPLEX user HALF - DUPLEX mode. -
Values: HALF
DIAL user 0 - DIALing. -
0 = disabled
SPEED user 19200 - Transmission SPEED of Normally
communication in used speed
bits/second. = 19200
Values: 9600, 19200
CHLEN user 8 - CHaracter LENgth in bits.
Values: 8
STOPBITS user 1 - STOP BITS. -
Values: 1, 1.5, 2
PARITY user NONE - PARITY. Values: Not updated
NONE,ODD,EVEN (for
RCOM, others), EVEN
(for Siemens 3964(R),
ModBus).
LINESTAB user 1 - LINE STABilization time. 0...15
Number of characters to
allow the carrier wave to
stabilize before transmission
of the first character.
CARRDEL user 0 - CARRier DELay. Number of 0...15
characters to wait after
transmission of the last
character before
deactivating RTS.
MAXRETR user 2 - MAXimum number of 0...20
RETRansmissions before
line is considered broken.
CHARTOUT user 2 - CHARacter Time-OUT 0...15
TURNTIME user 1000 TURN around TIME in 10...20000
milliseconds. Assumed time in steps of
for telegram processing in 10
slave mode depending only
on sytem load. Total time to
wait for response is:
TURNTIME + time for
telegram trasmission.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 59

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
TURNTIME user 1000 -
UARTTOUT user 1 - UART transmissin Time-OUT. 0...15
Maximum number of characters for
the controller to wait for a DCD
before abording the transmission
(only used if DUPLEX=HALF).
POLLCYCL user 10 - Maximum time between two 0...255
POLLing CYCLes in seconds.

Parameters Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1

PanelBus Master: Parameters

1 PARAM1
0 PARAM2
0 PARAM3
0 PARAM4
0 PARAM5
0 PARAM6
0 PARAM7
0 PARAM8

Figure 4.

Terminal Table 3.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Parameters
1 2 3 4 5 6
PARAM1 user 1 - Protocol PARAMeter 1. PANC and
(0 = large address model) PRTCON
1 = small address model assume small
address model.
PARAM1 user 1 -
PARAM2 user 0 - -
PARAM3 user 0 - -
PARAM4 user 0 -
PARAM5 user 0 -
PARAM6 user 0 - -
PARAM7 user 0 -
PARAM8 user 0 -
PARAM2...8 are used for nothing.

12 - 60 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Boolean Param PARDAT(B)

Summary The PARDAT(B) Data Base element holds 32 packed Boolean Data
values. Each data value is given an initial value. A name is given for
the complete element.
By means of the call name PARDAT(B) the engineering Station will
create 1 data base element of type Boolean Param.

Overview
Boolean Base Part VALUE11-VALUE20 VALUE21-VALUE32
Data:
NAME VALID INIVAL11 VALUE11 INIVAL21 VALUE21
INIVAL VALUE INIVAL12 VALUE12 INIVAL22 VALUE22
INIVAL2 VALUE2 INIVAL13 VALUE13 INIVAL23 VALUE23
INIVAL3 VALUE3 INIVAL14 VALUE14 INIVAL24 VALUE24
INIVAL4 VALUE4 INIVAL15 VALUE15 INIVAL25 VALUE25
INIVAL5 VALUE5 INIVAL16 VALUE16 INIVAL26 VALUE26
INIVAL6 VALUE6 INIVAL17 VALUE17 INIVAL27 VALUE27
INIVAL7 VALUE7 INIVAL18 VALUE18 INIVAL28 VALUE28
INIVAL8 VALUE8 INIVAL19 VALUE19 INIVAL29 VALUE29
INIVAL9 VALUE9 INIVAL20 VALUE20 INIVAL30 VALUE30
INIVAL10 VALUE10 INIVAL31 VALUE31
INIVAL32 VALUE32

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Boolean Data: Base Part

PD1 NAME VALID

0 INIVAL VALUE
0 INIVAL2 VALUE2
0 INIVAL3 VALUE3
0 INIVAL4 VALUE4
0 INIVAL5 VALUE5
0 INIVAL6 VALUE6
0 INIVAL7 VALUE7
0 INIVAL8 VALUE8
0 INIVAL9 VALUE9
0 INIVAL10 VALUE10

Figure 2.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 61

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 1.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max 20
characters
INIVAL user 0 - INItial VALue. -
VALUE system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE -
INVAL2 user 0 INitial VALue. -
VALUE2 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE. -
.
.
.
INVAL10 user 0 -
VALUE10 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE. -

VALUE11- Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Boolean Param: VALUE11-VALUE20

VALUE20 0 INIVAL11 VALUE11
0 INIVAL12 VALUE12
0 INIVAL13 VALUE13
0 INIVAL14 VALUE14
0 INIVAL15 VALUE15
0 INIVAL16 VALUE16
0 INIVAL17 VALUE17
0 INIVAL18 VALUE18
0 INIVAL19 VALUE19
0 INIVAL20 VALUE20

Figure 3.

VALUE21- Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Boolean Param: VALUE21-VALUE32

VALUE32 0 INIVAL21 VALUE21
0 INIVAL22 VALUE22
0 INIVAL23 VALUE23
0 INIVAL24 VALUE24
0 INIVAL25 VALUE25
0 INIVAL26 VALUE26
0 INIVAL27 VALUE27
0 INIVAL28 VALUE28
0 INIVAL29 VALUE29
0 INIVAL30 VALUE30
0 INIVAL31 VALUE31
0 INIVAL32 VALUE32

Figure 4.

12 - 62 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Table 2.
Terminal
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
Description, 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
VALUE11-32
1 2 3 4 5 6
INIVAL11 user 0 - INItial VALue. Max. 20 characters
VALUE11 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE. -
INIVAL12 user 0 - INItial VALue. -
VALUE12 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE. -
.
.
.
INIVAL32 user 0 - INItial VALue. -
VALUE32 system - B(r/w) Boolean VALUE.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 63

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Integer Param PARDAT(I)

Summary The PARDAT(I) Data Base element holds one 16 bit integer data
value. The data value is given a name and an initial value. By means
of the call name PARDAT(I) the Engineering Station will create 1 data
base element of type Integer Param.

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Integer Param:
PD1 NAME
0 INIT_VAL VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
INIT_VAL user 0 INITial VALue.
VALUE system I(r/w) VALUE of type integer.

12 - 64 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Packed Int. Param PARDAT(II)

Summary The PARDAT(II) Data Base element holds two 16 bit integer data
values. The data values are given a name and an initial value. By
means of the call name PARDAT(II) the Engineering Station will
create 1 data base element of type Packed Int. Param.

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Packed Int.Param:
PD1 NAME
0 INIT_VAL VALUE
0 INIT_VAL2 VALUE2

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
INIT_VAL user 0 INITial VALue.
INIT_VAL2 user 0 INITial VALue 2.
VALUE system I(r/w) VALUE of type Integer.
VALUE2 system I(r/w) VALUE 2 of type Integer.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 65

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

IntegerLong Param PARDAT(IL)

Summary The PARDAT(IL) Data Base element holds one 32 bit integer data
values. The data values is given a name and an initial value. By
means of the call name PARDAT(IL) the Engineering Station will
create 1 data base element of type IntegerLong Param.

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

IntegerLong Param:
PD1 NAME
0 INIT_VAL VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
INIT_VAL user 0 INITial VALue.
VALUE system IL(r/w) VALUE of type
IntegerLong.

12 - 66 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Packed Bool. Param PARDAT(NB)

Summary The PARDAT(NB) Data Base element holds a data value

representing 32 bit values. By means of the call name PARDAT(NB)
the Engineering Station will create

• 1 data base element of type Packed Bool. Param.

• 32 data base elements of type Boolean Value

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Packed Bool.Param:
PD1 NAME VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
VALUE system IL(r/w) VALUE of type IntegerLong.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 67

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Packed Int. Param PARDAT(NI)

Summary The PARDAT(NI) Data Base element holds a data value representing
two 16 bit integer values. By means of the call name PARDAT(NI) the
Engineering Station will create.

• 1 data base element of type Packed Int. Param

• 2 data base elements of type Integer Value

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Packed Int.Param:
PD1 NAME VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
VALUE system IL(r/w) VALUE of type IntegerLong.

12 - 68 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Real Param PARDAT(R)

Summary The PARDAT(R) Data Base element holds one real data value. By
means of the call name PARDAT(R) the Engineering Station will
create 1 data base element of type Real Param.

Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1

Real Param:
PD1 NAME
0.0 INIT_VAL VALUE

Figure 1.

Terminal Table 1.
Description 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PDx - Unique element NAME. Max.20
characters
INIT_VAL user 0.0 INITial VALue.
VALUE system R(r/w) VALUE of type Real.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 69

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Processor Module PM825

Summary PM825 is the Processor Module (CPU) of the AC80 Advant Controller
control system. By means of the call name PM825 an Engineering
Station will create 1 data base element of type Processor Module.

Overview
Processor Ba se Part AF100 Part Serial IF Part
Module:
NAME WARNING CABLE CH2TYP
BUS ERR EN_DTMO CH2
STATION DIAG TIMESYNC
POSITION ACTSCANT BUSNO
IMPL STNNO
TYPE
SUP_PS
SUP_PS_E
SUP_BAT
STARTMOD
IOSCANT

Figure 1.

Base Part Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1

Processor Module: Ba se Part

PM1 NAME WARNING

0 BUS ERR
0 STATION DIAG
0 POSITION ACTSCANT
0 IMPL
PM825 TYPE
NO SUP_PS
NO SUP_PS_E
NO SUP_BAT
BLOCKED STARTMOD
0 IOSCANT

Figure 2.

12 - 70 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Terminal Table 1.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Base Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME user PM1 - Unique NAME of the Max 20
module. characters
BUS predef 0 - BUS number.
STATION predef 0 STATION number. Part of
address.
POSITION predef 0 POSITION. Part of
address.
IMPL predef 1 IMPLemented.
0=the module is spare
1=the module is
implemented
TYPE predef PM825 Station TYPE designation.
SUP_PS user NO Enable SUPervision of
redundant Power
Supplies. Values:
YES=enabled
NO=not enabled
SUP_PS_E user NO Enable SUPervision of
redundant Power
Supplies on the opto-fibre
Expansion. Values:
YES=enabled
NO=not enabled
SUP_BAT user NO Enable BATtery
SUPervision. Values:
YES=enabled
NO=not enabled
STARTMOD user CLEAR Define STARTMODe Default in
behaviour. Values: old
CLEAR, BLOCKED versions=
BLOCKED
IOSCANT user 0 Proposal for IOSCANner 0,2,4,6,8,
cycle Time in ms. 10,12…,
100
WARNING system B(r) WARNING indicates a
non-fatal error.
ERR system B(r) ERRor indicates fatal
errors, such as
configuration errors or
hardware errors.
DIAG system I(r) DIAGnostics.
ACTSCANT system I(r) ACTual SCANner cycle
Time.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 71

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

AF 100 Part Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1

Processor Module: AF100 Part

S CABLE
NO EN_DTMO
NONE TIMESYNC
0 BUSNO
1 STNNO

Figure 3.

Terminal Table 2.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
AF 100 Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
CABLE user S CABLE connection. Values:
S=Single
R=Redundant
EN_DTMO user NO ENable Double TiMeOut. Values:
NO, YES
TIMESYNC user NONE TIME SYNChronization. Values:
NONE, MASTER, SLAVE
BUSNO user 0 BUS Number of the bus 0…255
connected to this processor
module.
STNNO user 0 STation Number of the current 0…80
station on the bus given by
BUSNO.

Serial IF Part Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1

Processor Module: Serial IF Part

NONE CH2TYP
CH2

Figure 4.

12 - 72 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

Terminal Table 3.
Description, 1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value
4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
Serial IF Part
1 2 3 4 5 6
CH2TYP user NONE CH2TYPe. Values: The MVC
NONE, PANEL, MVC. alternative is
NONE if the RS485 interface possible only
of AC80 (=CH2) is not used att if Embedded
all. ModBus
PANEL if use it with PANBUS, Option is
PANC, PRTCON, MODW or selected and
MODR -elements. MVC if use installed in
with MVICHAN, MVINODE and AC80 target.
MVB -elements.
CH2 user CH2 pin is left unconnected if
CH2TYP=NONE or PANEL. If
CH2TYP=MVC must assign
the name of MVICHAN
element into CH-2pin.

AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements 12 - 73

 Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions

12 - 74 AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements

 EFFECTIVE: 15.03.2000
3BFE 64021737 R0225

ABB Industry Oy
Drives
P.O.Box 184
FIN-00381 Helsinki
FINLAND
Telephone + 358 10 22 2000
Telefax + 358 10 22 22681